Control System

Control System
1. Wireless remote controller............................................................. 2 
1.1 RM02 ...................................................................................................................................... 3 
1.2 R05 and RM05 ....................................................................................................................... 8 
1.3 R51 ....................................................................................................................................... 12 
1.4 R06 ....................................................................................................................................... 18 
1.5 R71A..................................................................................................................................... 22 
2. Wired controller ............................................................................ 25 
2.1 Wired controller KJR-10B ..................................................................................................... 25 
2.2 Wired controller KJR-12B ..................................................................................................... 36 
2.3 Touch key wired controller: KJR-29B ................................................................................... 43 
2.4 Wired controller: KJR-90D .................................................................................................... 53 
2.5 V4 plus R wired controller: KJR-120A .................................................................................. 59 
2.6 V4 Plus R Series: KJR-120B ................................................................................................ 67 
2.7 Wired controller KJR-90A ..................................................................................................... 76 
2.8 Mode-button hidden wired controller: KJR-86C .................................................................... 82 
2.9 Weekly schedule wired controller: MD-CCM04 .................................................................... 87 
2.10 Weekly schedule wired controller: KJR-120C .................................................................... 98 
2.11 HRV wired controller: KJR-27B ........................................................................................ 109 
3. Centralized controller ................................................................. 115 
3.1 MD-CCM03......................................................................................................................... 115 
3.2 Touch key centralized controller: CCM30 ........................................................................... 132 
3.3 Weekly schedule timer centralized controller: MD-CCM09 ................................................ 149 
3.4 Unified ON/OFF controller: KJR-90B .................................................................................. 167 
3.5 Outdoor centralized monitor: MD-CCM02 .......................................................................... 172 
4. Gateway ....................................................................................... 181 
4.1 LonWorks BMS gateway: MD-LonGW64 ........................................................................... 181 
4.2 BACnet® BMS gateway: MD-CCM08 ................................................................................ 185 
4.3 Modbus BMS gateway: CCM-18A ...................................................................................... 214 
4.4 M-interface gateway: IMM441V4PA512 ............................................................................. 248 
4.5 Data converter CCM15 ....................................................................................................... 252 
5. Network monitoring system....................................................... 282 
5.1 Intelligent Manager of Midea (IMM) - 4thgeneration network control system ...................... 282 
6. Accessories ................................................................................. 283 
6.1 Digital ammeter DTS634/DT636 ........................................................................................ 284 
6.2 Hotel card key interface module: MD-NIM05 ...................................................................... 286 
6.3 Infrared sensor controller: MD-NIM09 ................................................................................ 291 
6.4 Electricity distribution module MD-NIM10 ........................................................................... 296 
6.5 Fault alarm controller: KJR-32B ......................................................................................... 297 
6.6 Indoor unit group controller: KJR-150A .............................................................................. 300 
6.7 AHU control box 14&28&56kW: AHUKZ-01, AHUKZ-02, AHUKZ-03 ................................ 303 

1 Control System
 Control System

1.. Wireles
ss remote contrroller

Co
ontroller Appearancce Mode
el Descrip
ption
Genera
al functions with
w backlighht, follow me
e, setting
RM02
2A/BGE-A s, keyboard locking funcction, 26℃ button and
address
auto-mo
ode (Normal).
Genera
al functions with
w backlighht, follow me
e, setting
RM02
2A/BGE (T)--A address
s, keyboard locking funcction, 26℃ button
b and
auto-mo
ode (Only fo
or V4+R sysstem indoor unit).

Genera
al functions, big screen aand LCD dis
splay, with
RM05
5/BG(T)E-A backlight display, clock
c functionn, address setting
s
function
n.

Genera
al functions, big screen aand LCD dis
splay, with
R05/B
BGE
Wiireless backlight display, clock
c functionn.
rem
mote
controller R51D
D/E Genera
al functions.

R51/E
E Genera
al functions with
w econom
mic mode.

R51I4
4/BGE Genera
al functions with
w backlighht and FOLL
LOW ME.

R71A
A/E Genera
al functions, button quanntities reduce.

R06/B
BGE Genera
al functions and
a only thee appearanc
ce is different.

For coo
oling only mo
ode. The funnction is the same as
R06/B
BGCE
R05/BG
GE, and only
y the appearrance is diffe
erent.
No
otes:
Ge
eneral functions include
e the ON/O
OFF, setting mode (AUT
TO, COOL, HEAT, DR
RY and FAN
N), Fan spe
eed,
Te
emperature ssetting, Time
er function.

Control System 2
Control System

1.1 RM02

Remote controller specifications

Model RM02A/BGE-A; RM02A/BGE (T)-A
Rated Voltage 3.0 V
Lowest Voltage 2.0 V
Reaching Distance 8m～11m
Operation Condition -5°C～+60°C

Performance features
1. Operating mode: cool, heat, dry, fan only and auto.
2. Timer setting function in 24 hours.
3. Indoor setting temperature range: 17°C ~30°C.
4. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) of all functions.
5. Night light function

1.1.1 Parts name

Remote signal
emission terminal

2
1

TIMER ON TIMER OFF

4  Newly design with smart
3 AUTO
COOL
DRY
FOLLOW ME
TEMP
appearance
HEAT 5
FAN SLEEP
MODE  V4, V4+ series units applied
 Economic running mode
6
7  Turbo running mode
ON OFF
 FOLLOW ME function inside
8 MODE TIMER
9
 One-key 26℃
TEMP
SET
FAN
ECO
 Address setting function
SPEED
FAN DIRECTION
 Keyboard locking function
10 TURBO

LED DISPL AY DRY E•A•H FOLLOW ME 11

12

RM02A/BGE-A

3 Control System
 Control System

(1) ON/OFF
For turning on or turning off the air conditioner.

(2) 26℃ button

Press this button can operate the cool mode with the setting temperature 26℃. Considering about the comfort
and energy saving, 26℃ is the best setting temperature.

(3) Mode select

Once pressing, running mode will be selected in the following sequence:
AUTO → COOL → DRY → HEAT → FAN

(4)Timer button
Under the OFF state only can set TIME ON function. If pressing the button, the time will increase by 0.5 hour.
When the set time exceeds 10 hours, pressing TIMER button will increase the time by 1 hour. Adjust the
TIMER ON to be "0:00", then will cancel the TIMER ON.
Under the ON state only can set TIME OFF function. If pressing the button, the time will increase by 0.5 hour.
When the set time exceeds 10 hours, pressing TIMER button will increase the time by 1 hour. Adjust the
TIMER OFF to be "0:00" then will cancel the TIMER OFF.

(5) ECO button

When operating COOL, HEAT and AUTO mode, press the "ECO" button, and operate power save function;
press again will cancel the function. Under the DRY/FAN mode, this function is invalid. Under power save state,
press "MODE", "ON/OFF" or "FAN" button will cancel this function.

(6) Adjust button▽

Decrease the set temp. Keeping pressing will decrease the temp with 1℃ per 0.5s.
Adjust button △
Increase the set temp. Keeping pressing will increase the temp with 1℃ per 0.5s.

(7) Horiz swing

Press this button can activate or turn off wind horizontal swing function. (Only available when remote controller
is used with corresponding unit.)

(8) Fan speed

Fan speed will be selected in following sequence once pressing this button: (Under the DRY and AUTO mode
(except for the auto heat recycling mode), the fan speed will be fixed and cannot be adjusted. Under the auto
heat recycling mode, the fan speed will be automatically and can be adjusted.)
AUTO → LOW → MED → HIGH

Control System 4
Control System

(9) Vert swing

Press this button can activate or turn off vertical swing function. Under the power off state, this button will not
work (Only available when remote controller is used with corresponding unit.)

(10)TURBO button
Press this button will set the air conditioner to operate as turbo mode, and the frequency will be raised. Press
TURBO button again will cancel this mode. (Only available when remote controller is used with corresponding
unit.)

(11) DRY·AUXILIARY HEAT/FOLLOW ME

When it is operating the dry cleaning function, press the left of the button, will turn off the dry cleaning function;
when it is operating follow me function, press the right of the button, will turn off the follow me function.(Only
available when remote controller is used with corresponding unit.)

(12) LED display

When the air conditioner is the ON state, press this button, can close (open) the modules display, press again
will open (close) the display. (Only available when remote controller is used with corresponding unit.)

1.1.2 LCD display

④ Timer ON/OFF
Transmitting
display ① ⑤ Lock
TIMER ON TIMER OFF
ON/OFF ②
AUTO
COOL
Running ③ FOLLOW ME ⑥ Temperature
mode DRY TEMP
HEAT ⑦ Follow Me
FAN SLEEP
MODE

⑧ Fan speed
Notes: Reset or power on for the first time, all the icons will be lighted

5 Control System
 Control System

1.1
1.3 Other operation
ns

 FOLLOW
W ME functio
on
 The air conditioner has FOLLO
OW ME funcction, when the function
n is operatedd, the remote controller will
detect the tempe
erature near the remo
ote controlle mpare with the temperrature you set
er and com
automa
atically, and
d control the
e operation o
of the air co
onditioner ac
ccording to tthe contrasttive result, and
a
make tthe tempera
ature near the remote co
ontroller reac
ches the settting temperaature. This function
f is va
alid
only un
nder COOL,, HEAT, AUT
TO mode an d the unit ha
as follow me
e function. T
This helps making the ro
oom
environ
nment more
e comfortable
e and the te
emperature accurate.
a
No
otes: To carrry on the FO
OLLOW ME function, ple
ease keep th
he RM02A pointing
p direectly to the in
ndoor unit.
 Remotte controllerr cannot be placed nea
ar the heat source
s ow temperatture source,, otherwise will
or lo
affect iits temperature gatherin
ng precision and then afffect the follo
ow me functtion.

 Setting a
addresses
For the V
V4 plus systtem, the RM
M02A can s et the indoo
or units’ add
dresses. Thhis function helps the user
assign the o the indoor units freely.. V4 series do
e address to d not have this functionn.
 Presss the Fan speed
s button and ECO
O button sim y for more tthan 5 seco
multaneously onds, then the
contrroller gets into address setting
s mode
e.
 Presss the ON/OF
FF button to mitting signa
o start transm dress settingg mode. If the transmittting
al in the add
signa
al icon has been
b turned
d on, then sttep can be omitted. Wh
hen workingg in address
s setting mo
ode,
w not turn the controlle r off.
presss ON/OFF will
 In the
e address se
etting mode,, there are 2 main functions:
Querrying addresss: Please po
oint the rem
mote controlle ODE button, the
er to the indoor unit, theen press MO
corre ndoor unit will display itss address.
esponding in
Settin WN buttons to choose an
ng address: Use the UP and DOW a address you want. Then
T point the
ote controller to the indo
remo oor unit and s the FAN button to set the indoor unit’s addre
d then press ess.
The ccorresponding indoor un
nit will displa
ay the new address
a and
d record it. A
After about 4 seconds, this
t
displa
aying will fad
de out and the
t indoor u nits turn to normal
n display mode.
No
otes: the address canno
ot be repeated in the sa me system.
 After setting all th es, users ca n press the Fan button and ECO buutton simulta
he addresse aneously ag
gain
for 5 seconds to exit the add
dress setting
g mode.

 Keyboard
d lock
The RM0
02A allows users to loc
ck the keyb
board to pre
event mistaken operatioon or keep the kids frrom
changing the parame
eters random
mly. Press tthe "MODE"" and "TIME
ER" button ssimultaneously for 5s, and
a
then can operate ke
eyboard lock
king. In the locking mo e. Pressing the
ode, all the buttons aree ineffective

MODE an
nd TIMER bu
utton for a period
p and th
he on the
t LCD will indicate thiss function.

Control System 6
Control System

 Auto heat recycling mode function

∆T：Temperature difference, means the different temperature between the indoor temperature (Tf)
detected by the remote controller and the remote controller setting temperature (Ts). (The default
difference is 3℃, the difference range is 1~4℃).
∆T instruction：

press and buttons for 5S simultaneously,

TEMP
SET then enter ∆T setting state.

SW1 definition
SW1

Auto heat recycling Mode

∆T setting state SW1

Auto Mode (Normal)

TEMP
press or button
SET adjust∆T you want

press ON/OFF button

ON/OFF
confirm and exit the setting

Notes: SW1 dial switch is on the main control board of the remote controller.
For example:
∆T is 1°C, Ts is 25°C:
when Tf -Ts>=＋∆T, it will operate COOL mode, the fan speed will be operated according to the setting fan
speed. When Tf - Ts<= - ∆T, it will operate HEAT mode, the fan speed will be operated according to the
setting fan speed.
Notes:
This function operation can be only available for the heat recycling three-pipe system. When the remote
controller selects the auto heat recycling mode, the remote controller position must be placed at the signal
receiving range of the air conditioner. When the remote controller detects changes of the mode (cool to heat,
or heat to cool), it will send the changes to air conditioner. One beep of air conditioner changed mode signals
is giving out.

 Auto Operation (Normal)

 Press MODE to select AUTO mode.
 Adjust temperature via △ and ▽ button. Generally the Temp. range is 17℃~30℃. Press ON/OFF and
running indicator light on indoor unit is lightened. Air conditioner will work on AUTO mode and fan speed is
AUTO, the display screen on remote controller will display "AUTO", then the fan speed is not adjustable.
And press ON/OFF again, the air conditioner will be stopped.

7 Control System
 Control System

1.2 R05 an
nd RM05

Re
emote contro
oller specificcations
Model R05/BG
GE; RM05/B BG (T) E-A
Rated Volttage 3.0 V
Lowest Vo
oltage 2.4 V
Reaching Distance 8m~11mm
Operation Condition -5℃~+60℃ ℃

Pe
erformance ffeatures
1. Operating mode: cool,
c heat, drry, fan only a
and auto
2. Timer ssetting functtion in 24 ho
ours.
3. Indoor setting temp
perature ran
nge: 17°C ~3
30°C.
4. LCD (L
Liquid Crysta
al Display) of
o all function
ns.
5. Night lig
ght function

1.2
2.1 Parts n
name

Mode set ti ng 1 2 Fan s pee d se tt in g

Adjus t 3 4 Adjust

ON/ OF F 5 6 Air d ire ct ion s et ti n g

Hori z swi ng 7 9 Ti me set tinng

10 Time ON
Vert . sw ing 8

Reset 12
11 Time OFF

Lock 13
14 Confir m butt on
o

16 Economic operati on
Co ol /h eat 15

Control System 8
Control System

(1)) Mode buttton

If pressing,
p run
nning mode will be selected in the ffollowing seq
quence:
AUTO → CO
OOL → DRY → HEAT → FAN

No
otes: No hea
ating mode for
f cooling only
o type un it.

(2)) Fans peed

d
d in following sequence
an speed will be selected
Fa e, if pressing
g this button:
A
AUTO → LOW
W → MED → HIGH

(3)) Adjust bu
utton ▼
De
ecrease the set temp. Keeping pres
ssing will deccrease the temp with 1℃
℃ per 0.5s.

(4)) Adjust bu
utton ▲
Inc
crease the sset temp. Ke
eeping press
sing will incre mp with 1℃ per 0.5s.
ease the tem

(5)) ON/OFF b
button
or turning on or turning off
Fo o the air co
onditioner.

(6)) Air directiion

Ac
ctivate swing
g function off air deflecto
or. Once pre
essing, air deflector
d will turn 6 digrress. For no
ormal operattion
and better coo
oling and he
eating effect, deflector w
will not turn to
t the degre
ee which is tthe state of deflector wh
hen
the
e unit is turn
ned off (Onlyy available when
w remote s used with correspond ing unit.)
e controller is

(7)) Horiz swin

ng
ctivate or turn off horizontal swing function
Ac n. (Only av
vailable wh
hen remotee controller is used with
w
corresponding
g unit.)

(8)) Vert swing

g
Ac
ctivate or turrn off vertica
al swing func
ction. (Only available when
w remote controller iss used with correspond
ding
unit.)

(9)) Clock
Dis
splay the cu
urrent time. (12:00
( is dis
splayed whe
en resetting or electrifyin ess CLOCK for
ng for the firrst time.) Pre
5s, icon indica
ating hour will h 0.5s. Presss it again will flash minu
w flash with ute and aand botttun are used
d to
adjust the figure. Setting or
o modification is effectivve onlyby prressing OK button to maake confirma
ation.

9 Control
C System
m
 Control System

(10) Time ON
For time ON setting. Once pressing this button, the time will increase by 0.5 hour. When the set time
exceeds10 hours, pressing the button will increase the time by 1 hour. Adjusting the figure to 0.00 will cancel
time ON setting.

(11) Time OFF

For time OFF setting. Once pressing this button, the time will increase by 0.5 hour. When the set time
exceeds10 hours, pressing the button will increase the time by 1 hour. Adjust the figure to 0.00 will cancel time
ON setting.

(12) Reset button(inner located)

Press this button with a needle of 1mm to cancel the current setting and reset remote controller.

(13) Lock button(inner located)

Press this button with a needle of 1mm to lock or unlock the current setting.

(14) OK button
Used to confirm the time setting and modification.

(15) COOL/HEAT (inner located)

Press this button with a needle of 1mm to shift mode between COOL only and COOL&HEAT.
During setting, backlight will be lightened. Factory default mode is COOL &HEAT.

(16) ECO button

Activate or turn off economic operation mode. It is suggested to turn on this function when sleeping. (Only
available when remote controller is used with corresponding unit.)

1.2.2 LCD display

Temp 1

Transmittin g d si pla y 2 3 ON/ OFF

Runnin g mod e 4
AUTO
TEMP 5 Tim e
COOL
SE T
DRY 6 Lock
HEA T SET
7 Time ON /O FF
FA N

Economic operat io n 8
9 Fan sp ee d

Notes:
RM05/BG(T)E-A is able to set the indoor units’ addresses individually.

Control System 10
Control System

1.2.3 How to set address through Wireless Remote Controller RM05

● Press the LOCK button for more than 5 seconds, then the controller gets into address setting mode.
● Press the ON/OFF button to start transmitting signal in the address setting mode. If the transmitting signal
icon has been turned on, then step can be omitted. When working in address setting mode, press ON/OFF
will not turn the controller off.
● In the address setting mode, there are 2 main functions:
Querying address: Please point the remote controller to the indoor unit, then press MODE button, the
corresponding indoor unit will display its address.
Setting address: Use the UP and DOWN buttons to choose an address you want. Then point the remote
controller to the indoor unit and then press the FAN button to set the indoor unit’s address. The
corresponding indoor unit will display the new address and record it. After about 4 seconds, this displaying
will fade out and the indoor units turn to normal display mode.
Notes: Address cannot be repeated in the same system.
● After setting all the addresses, users can press the LOCK button for 5 seconds to exit the address setting
mode.

11 Control System
 Control System

1.3 R51

Re
emote contro
oller specificcations

el
Mode R51/E,R
R51D/E,R51
1I4/BGE
Rated Voltage
R 3.0 V
Lo
owest Voltag
ge 2.0 V
R
Reaching Dis
stance 8m～11m
O
Operation Co
ondition -5°C～+60°C
- C

Pe
erformance ffeatures
1. Operating mode: cool,
c heat, drry, fan only a
and auto.
2. Timer ssetting functtion in 24 ho
ours.
3. Indoor setting temp
perature ran
nge: 17°C ~3
30°C.
4. LCD (L
Liquid Crysta
al Display) of
o all function
ns.
5. Night light function (Optional)

1.3
3.1 Parts n
name

otes:
No
Th
his illustration
n is for expla poses only. The actual shape
anation purp s or button names of the remo
ote controllerr
ma
ay be slightlyy different.

Control System 12
Control System

(1) TEMP DOWN button

Press the TEMP DOWN button will decrease the indoor temperature setting or adjust the timer in a
counter-clockwise direction.

(2) Mode select button

Each time you press this button, a mode is selected in a sequence that goes from AUTO, COOL, DRY, HEAT
and FAN as the following figure indicates:
 

Notes: No heating mode for cool only type unit.

(3) Swing button

Press swing button to change the louver angle.

(4) Reset button

When press RESET button, all of the current settings are cancelled and the control will return to the initial
settings.

(5) Economic running button

Press this button will go into the Energy-Saving operation mode. (Only available when remote controller is
used with corresponding unit.)

(6) Lock button

Press this button will lock in all the current settings. To release settings, press it again.

(7) Cancel button

Press this button can cancel the TIMER settings.

(8) Timer button

This button is used to preset the time ON (start to operate) and the time OFF (turn off the operation).

(9) ON/OFF button

Press this button can start the unit operation. Press the button again will stop the unit operation.

(10) Fan speed button

This button is used for setting fan speed in the sequence that goes from AUTO, LOW, MED to HIGH, and then
back to Auto.

13 Control System
 Control System

(11) Temp UP button

Press this button can increase the indoor temperature setting or adjust the timer in a counter-clockwise
direction.

(12) Vent button

Press this button can set the ventilating mode. The ventilating mode will operate in the following sequence:

Continuous Auto Off

Ventilation Function is available for t he Fresh Star Series.

1.3.2 LCD display

1 6
2 5

AUTO FAN
COOL HIGH
DRY MED
HEAT LOW

3 4

① Transmitting display: When remote controller transmits signals to indoor unit, this indicator will light.
② Mode display: Show the current operation modes-- AUTO, COOL, DRY and HEAT. HEAT is only available
for heat pump model.

③ Lock display: To displayed by pressing the LOCK button. Press the LOCK button again will clear display.

④ Timer display: This display area shows the settings of TIMER.

That is, if only the starting time of operation is set, it will display the TIMER ON. If only the turning off time of
operation is set, it will display the TIMER OFF. If both operations are set, it will show TIMER ON and TIMER
OFF which indicates you have chosen to set both the starting time and off time.

⑤ Fan speed display: When Press the FAN button, this indicator lights.
⑥ Digital display area: This area will show the temperature, and if in the TIMER mode, will show the ON and
OFF settings of the TIMER.
Notes:
All items are shown in the Fig-2 for the purpose of clear presentation but during the actual operation only the
relative functional items are shown on the display panel.

Control System 14
Control System

1.3.3 Operating the remote controller

1) Install / Replace Batteries

The Remote Controller uses two alkaline dry batteries (R03/Ir03X2).
※ To install batteries, slide back the cover of the battery compartment and install the batteries according to the
directions (+ and -) shown on the Remote Controller.
※ To replace the old batteries, use the same method as mentioned above.
Notes:
1. When replacing batteries do not use old batteries or a different type battery. This may cause the remote
controller to malfunction.
2. If you do not use the remote controller for several weeks remove the batteries. Otherwise battery leakage
may damage the remote controller.
3. The average battery life under normal use is about 6 months.
4. Replace the batteries when there is no answering beep from the indoor unit or if the Transmission Indicator
light fails to appear.

2) Automatic Operation
When the air conditioner is ready for use, switch on the power and the OPERATION indicator lamp on the
display panel of the indoor unit starts flashing.
※ Use the MODE select button to select AUTO. In the multi system, to avoid mode conflict, auto-mode is
taken as cool mode.
※ Press the TEMP button to set the desired room temperature.
※ The most comfortable temperature settings are between 21°C and 28°C
※ Press the ON/OFF button to start the air conditioner. The OPERATION lamp on the display panel of the
indoor unit will light. The operating mode of AUTO FAN SPEED is automatically set and there are no
indicators shown on the display panel of the remote controller.
※ Press the ON/OFF button again to stop the unit operation.
Notes:
If the AUTO mode is not comfortable for you, the desired mode can be selected manually.

3) COOL, HEAT, and FAN ONLY Operation

※ If the AUTO mode is not comfortable, you may manually change the settings by using COOL, DRY, HEAT
(HEAT PUMP units only), or FAN ONLY modes.
※ Press the TEMP button to set the desired room temperature.
※ When in COOLING mode, the most comfortable settings are 21°C or above. When in HEATING mode, the
most comfortable settings are 28°C or below.
※ Press the FAN SPEED to select the FAN mode of AUTO, HIGH, MED or LOW.

15 Control System
 Control System

※ Press the ON/OFF button. The operation lamp lights and the air conditioner start to operate per your
settings. Press the ON/OFF button again to stop this unit operation.
Notes:
The FAN ONLY mode cannot be used to control the temperature. While in this mode, only steps1, 3 and 4 may
be performed.

4) DRY Operation
※ Press the MODE button to select DRY.
※ Press the TEMP button to set the desired temperature from 21°C to 28°C.
※ Press the ON/OFF button. The operation lamp lights and the air conditioner start to operate in the DRY
mode. Press the ON/OFF button again to stop this unit operation.
Notes: Due to the difference of the set temperature of the unit and the actual indoor temperature, the Air
Conditioner when in DRY mode will automatically operate many times without running the Cool and Fan mode.

5) TIMER Operation
Press TIMER button to set the unit what time turn on or off.
a. To set the STARTING time.
※ Press the CANCEL button to cancel any former settings.
※ Press the TIMER button. The remote controller will show the TIMER and the signal “h” is shown on the
display panel. The control is now ready to reset the TIMER ON to start the operation.
※ Press the TEMP button (▲ or ▼) to set desired unit START time.

※ After setting the TIMER there will be a one-half second delay before the remote controller transmits the
signal to the air conditioner. Then, after approximately another 2 seconds, the set temperature will
re-appear on the digital display.
b. To set the STOPPING time.
※ Press the CANCEL button to cancel any former settings.
※ Press the TIMER button and the remote controller will show the last set time for the START operation and
the signal “h” will be shown on the display panel. You are now ready to readjust the TIMER OFF to stop
the operation.
※ Press the TEMP button to cancel the TIMER ON setting. The digital area will show "00".
※ Press the TIMER button and the remote controller will show the last set time for the STOP operation and
the signal “h” will be shown on the display panel. You are now ready to reset the time of the STOP
operation.
※ Press the TEMP button (▲ or ▼) to set the time you want to stop the operation.

※ After setting the TIMER there will be a one-half second delay before the remote controller transmits the
signals to the air conditioner. Then after approximately another 2 seconds, the set temperature will
re-appear on the digital display.

Control System 16
Control System

c. Set the STARTING & STOPPING time

※ Press the CANCEL button to cancel any former settings.
※ Press the TIMER button and the remote controller will show the last set time for START operation and the
signal “h” will be shown on the display panel. You are now ready to readjust the TIMER ON to start the
operation.
※ Press the TEMP button (▲ or ▼) to set the time you want to start the operation.

※ Press the TIMER button and the remote controller will show the last set time for STOP operation and the
signal “h” will be shown on the display panel. You are now ready to reset the time of the STOP operation.
※ Press the TEMP button (▲ or ▼) to set the time you want to stop the operation.

※ After setting the TIMER there will be a one-half second delay before the remote controller transmits the
signal to the Air Conditioner. Then, after approximately another 2 seconds, the set temperature will
re-appear on the digital display.
Notes:
1. Please reset the TIMER after cancelling the former time settings.
2. The setting time is relative time. That is the time set is based on the delay of the current time.
Warning
1. Be sure there are no barriers between the remote controller and the receiver of indoor unit otherwise the air
conditioner will not work.
2. Keep the remote controller away from all liquids.
3. Protect the remote controller from high temperatures and exposure to radiation.
4. Keep the indoor receiver out of direct sunlight or the Air Conditioner may malfunction.
5. Keep controller away from EMI (Electro-Magnetic Interference) supplied by other household appliances.

17 Control System
 Control System

1.4 R06

Re
emote contro
oller specificcations
Model
M R06
6/BGE, R06//BGCE
Rated Voltage 3.0 V
Lowest Vo
oltage 2.0 V
Reaching Distance 8m～11m m
Operation Condition -5°C～+60°°C

Pe
erformance ffeatures
1. Operating m
mode: cool, heat,
h dry, fa
an only and a
auto.
2. Timer settin
ng function in
n 24 hours.
3. Indoor settin
ng temperatture range: 17℃~30℃.
1
4. LCD (Liquid
d Crystal Dissplay) of all functions.
f
5. Night light fu
unction

1.4
4.1 Button
ns and fun
nctions de
escription

No
otes:
Th
he”*” symbol indicates an optional button.

Control System 18
Control System

(1)) ON/OFF button

Pre
ess this buttton can start operation; press the b utton again will stop ope
eration.

(2)) Mode buttton

Ea
ach time you
u press the button,
b a mo
ode is seleccted in a seq
quence that goes from A
AUTO, COO
OL, DRY, HE
EAT
and FAN.

No
otes: COOL
L only model has no HEA
AT feature.

(3)) Swing buttton

ess the button, the louvver would sw
Pre wing up and down autom
matically. Pre
ess it again will stop.

(4)) Direction button

Pre
ess this buttton can change the swing angle of the louver. The
T swing angle
a of the louver is 6°ffor each pre
ess.
hen the louvver swing at a certain an
Wh ngle which w
would affect the
t cooling and
a heating effect of the
e air conditio
oner,
it would
w autom
matically cha
ange the sw
wing direction
n. No symbo
ol will appea
ar in the dissplay area when
w press this
t
button.

(5)) Temp Adju

ust button
Pre
ess buttton can incrrease the in
ndoor tempe
erature setting or adjust the TIMER kwise direction.
R in a clock
Pre
ess buttton can deccrease the indoor
i perature setting or adjust the TIME
temp ER in a cou
unter-clockw
wise
dirrection.

(6)) Turbo buttton

Pre
ess this buttton on COO
OL mode, th
he air condittioner goes into powerfful cooling ooperation. Press
P again will
cancel the TURBO functio
on.

(7)) Sleep buttton

Pre
ess this buttton will go in
nto the Energ
gy-Saving o ode. Press it again will ccancel. This function is only
operation mo o
can be used o
on COOL, HEAT and AU
UTO mode a
and maintain
n the most comfortable
c ttemperature
e for you.
No
otes: When the unit is running
r under the SLEE
EP operation mode, it will
w be canceeled if you press
p the other
button. This fu nly available when remotte controllerr is used with corresponnding unit.
unction is on

(8)) Reset buttton

hen you press the recesssed RESET
Wh T button, all current settiings are can w return to the
ncelled and tthe control will
inittial settings..

(9)) Fan button

n
Us ed in four steps AUTO, LOW, MED or HIGH. Each time thee button is pressed, the fan
se to select tthe Fan spee
speed mode iss shifted.

19 Control Syste
em
 Control System

(10
0) Timer bu
utton
his button is used to presset the time ON (start to
Th o operate) and the time OFF (turn ooff the opera
ation).

(11
1) Cancel button
Pre
ess this buttton to cance
el the TIMER
R ON/OFF ssettings.

(12
2) Clock bu
utton
se to set the time.
Us

(13
3) LED buttton
Pre
ess this buttton to clear the digital display
d e air conditioner, press it again to aactivate digit display in the
in the
airr conditionerr. (Only available when remote conttroller is use
ed with corre
esponding unnit.)

(14
4) Lock buttton
Wh
hen you pre cked in and the remote controller does not acccept
ess the LOCK button, all current setttings are loc
any operation except that of the LOCK again will cancel the LOCK function .
K. Press it a

(15
5) O2 button
n (optional))
Wh
hen indoor u
unit has thiss function, press
p this bu
utton to actiivate the oxygen genera anism, and the
rating mecha
oxygen densityy of indoor varies.
v Press it again ca
an stop the function.
f

1.4
4.2 LCD display ind
dications

(1)) Transmiss
sion Indicattor
Th
his transmisssion indicato
or light when
n remote con
ntroller trans
smits signals
s to the indooor unit.

(2)) Mode disp

play
Ca
an display th
he current op
perational mode,
m includiing AUTO, COOL,
C Y, HEAT (nott applicable to cooling only
DRY o
mo
odels), FAN ONLY and back to AUT
TO.

Control System 20
Control System

(3) ON/OFF display

Can display ON/OFF state and press the ON/OFF button again the icon will disappear.

(4) Time display

Indicate Timer on/off time (0~23:50 hours) or clock time. The clock time is indicated only when no
AUTO-ON/OFF timer is set. When AUTO-TIMER feature is operating, it displays the AUTO-ON/OFF time. To
check the current time, press the CLOCK button, and the time will display.

(5) Temperature display

Displays the temperature setting (17℃~30℃), when you set the operating mode to FAN ONLY, no
temperature setting is displayed.

(6) Fan speed display

Can display the selected fan speed, AUTO (no display) and three fan speed levels (LOW),

(MED), (HIGH) can be indicated. The fan speed is AUTO when the operating mode is either
AUTO or DRY.

(7) Lock Display

Can display LOCK icon, and press the LOCK button again the icon will disappear.

(8) Sleep Display

Can display SLEEP icon and press the SLEEP button again the icon will disappear.
Notes:
All displays on the remote controller are shown for illustration purposes only.

21 Control System
 Control System

1.5 R71A

Re
emote contro
oller specificcations

Mo
odel R71A/E
Rated Voltage 3.0 V
Lowest Vo
oltage 2.0 V
Reaching Distance 8m ~11m
Operation Condition -5
5°C～+60°CC

emote contro
Re oller specificcations:
eneral functions, button quantities re
Ge educe, but ffunctions inc
crease.
1. Operating m
mode: cool, heat,
h dry, fa
an only and a
auto.
2. Timer settin
ng function in
n 24 hours.
3. Indoor settin
ng temperatture range: 17℃~30℃.
1
4. LCD (Liquid
d Crystal Dissplay) of functions.

1.5
5.1 Parts n
name

(1)) ON/OFF b
button
ess this buttton can start the unit; prress it again
Pre n will stop the
e unit.

(2)) Mode buttton

Th
he mode is sselected in a sequence as
a the follow
wing figure in
ndicates
AUTO COOL DRY HEAT FAN

Control System 22
Control System

(3) Adjust button▲

Press the button will increase the indoor temperature to 30℃.

(4) Adjust button▼

Press the button will decrease the indoor temperature to 17℃.

(5) Fan button:

The fan speed is selected in a sequence that goes from AUTO, LOW, MED to HIGH, then back to Auto. When
you select the AUTO or DRY mode, the fan speed will be automatic and you cannot set the fan speed.

(6) Sleep/Turbo button

When you press the button, the operation mode is selected in a sequence as the following figure indicates. But
this function cannot be used in DRY and FAN-only mode.
SLEEP SLEEP OF F T URBO T URBO OF F

Notes: Only available when remote controller is used with corresponding unit.

(7) Swing button

Press the SWING button can activate the swing function, press it again will stop.

(8) Air direction button

Press this button can change the swing angle of the louver. The swing angle of the louver is 6o for each press.
When the louver swings at a certain angle, it would automatically change the swing direction. No symbol will
appear in the display area when press this button. (Only available when remote controller is used with
corresponding unit.)

(9) Timer on button

Press this button can initiate the auto-on time. Each press will increase the auto-on time in 30minutes
increments. When the setting time displays 10Hr, each press will increase the auto-on time in 60 minutes
increments. To cancel the auto-on time program, continue pressing the button until nothing displays.

(10) Timer off button

Press this button can initiate the auto-off time. Each press will increase the auto-off time in 30minutes
increments. When the setting time displays 10Hr, each press will increase the auto-off time in 60 minutes
increments. To cancel the auto-off time program, continue pressing the button until nothing displays.

23 Control System
 Control System

1.5
5.2 LCD display

Control System 24
Control System

2.. Wired c
controlle
er

2.1 Wired controlle

er KJR-10B

KJR-10B

Model Descripttion
Geeneral contrrol function and without backlightt. With the air filter
KJR
R-10B/DP(T))-E cle
eaning remi nd function, setting add dress, initiaalization setttings and
ca
an switch Faahrenheit deg gree and Ceentigrade deegree.
KJR--10B/DPC(T
T)-E All basic functtions, but ex
xcluding the heat mode.
KJR-10B
B/DP(T)-E(K
Korean) A Korean Edittion

Wiired controlle
er specificattions

Model
M KJR-10B
Po
ower Supply
y Voltage DC 5.00V
Am
mbient Temp
perature Ra nge -15°C～+43°C(--5℉～109℉
℉)
Am
mbient Humidity Range RH40%~RRH90%

erformance ffeatures
Pe
1. Operating m
mode: cool, heat,
h dry, fa
an and auto.
2. Indoor settin
ng temperatture range: 17°C
1 ~30°C .
3. LCD (Liquid
d Crystal Dissplay).

25 Control Syste
em
 Control System

2.1
1.1 Parts n
name

(1)) Mode sele

ection butto
on
Th
he mode is sselected in a sequence as
a the follow
wing figure in
ndicates:
AUTT O → C OOL
O → DRYY → HEAT → FAA N

No
otes: no hea
ating mode if wired conttroller is set as cooling-o
only.

(2)) Timer on button

Pre
ess this bu
utton to initiate the au
uto-on time. Each pres
ss will incre
ease the auuto-on time
e in 30minu
utes
inc
crements. W
When the se
etting time displays
d 10H
Hr, each pre
ess will incrrease the auuto-on time in 60 minu
utes
inc
crements. If want to can
ncel the TIME
ER ON, then
n adjust the time of TIMER ON as 00.0.

(3)) Timer off button

Pre
ess this bu uto-off time. Each pres
utton to initiate the au ss will incre
ease the auuto-off time
e in 30minu
utes
inc
crements. W
When the se
etting time displays
d 10H
Hr, each pre
ess will incrrease the auuto-off time in 60 minu
utes
inc
crements. If want to can
ncel the TIME
ER OFF, the
en adjust the
e time of TIM
MER OFF ass 0.0.

(4)) Clock buttton

ormally display the clocck set curren
No ntly (displayy 12:00 for the
t first electrifying or resetting).W
When press the
button for 5 se
econds, the hour part on
o the clockk display flas
shes every 0.5 secondss, then pres
ss ▲ and ▼ to
adjust hour; press the buttton CLOCK
K again, the minute partt flashes eve
ery 0.5 secoonds, then press
p ▲ and
d▼
button to adjust minute. When
W set clo o complete the
ock or alter clock setting, must press the confiirm button to
setting.

Control System 26
Control System

(5) OK button
The button is used at the state of CLOCK adjustment. After setting the time, press the button to confirm then
exit, the current clock will display
(6) Reset button (hidden)
Use a small stick with a diameter of 1mm to press the RESET button to cancel the current settings and get into
the condition of resetting.

(7) ON/OFF button

Press the button at the condition of OFF, the OPERATION lamp lights, and the wired controller enters into ON
operation, simultaneously sends the setting operation information (e.g. temperature, fan speed, timer etc.) to
the units. Press the button at the condition of ON, the OPERATION lamp extinguishes, simultaneously enters
into OFF. If having set TIMER ON or TIMER OFF, the wired controller will cancel these settings before entering
into OFF, close the relevant indicator, and then send the OFF information.

(8) Fan speed selection button

For change the fan speed from "AUTO", "LOW", "MED" to "HIGH". Each time press the button, the fan speed
will change in turn as fellow.

(9) Adjust button ▲

Set indoor temperature up. If press and hold on, it will increase at 1℃ per 0.5 second.

(10) Adjust button ▼

Set indoor temperature down. If press and hold on, it will decrease at 1℃ per 0.5 second.

(11) Swing button

Press this button for the first time in running time, start the swing function. Press the button for the second time,
cancel the swing function. (Match to some model with swing function)

(12) Economical button

Press the button to set the economical operation mode, press again will cancel the mode. The operation mode
is suitable for sleeping time.

(13) Cooling-only/cooling and heating selection button (hidden)

Use a small stick with a diameter of 1mm to press the button to switch modes. For Cooling-only type, it will be
no heating mode when pressing MODE button. The factory-setting mode is COOLING and HEATING.

(14) Lock button (hidden)

Use a small stick with the diameter of 1mm to press the LOCK button can lock the current setting, press the
button again then cancel the setting.

27 Control System
 Control System

2.1.2 LCD display

② FAN speed
① MODE display

⑤ LOCK display

⑥ CLOCK display
F1 ⑦ OFF/ON display

⑧ Temperature display
④ Filter cleaning reminding display
③ Economical operation display

(1) Mode display

Press MODE button can select "AUTO", "COOL", "DRY", "HEAT", or "FAN" mode.(HEAT is invalid for COOL
ONLY wired controller.)

(2) Fan speed display

Press FAN SPEED to select fan speed from "AUTO", "LOW”,” MED” to "HIGH".
Notes: some air conditioners have no MED fan speed, and then the MED is regarded as HIGH.

(3) Economical operation display

When indoor unit has this function, under cool, heat or auto mode, press ECONOMICAL button can operate
the economic mode. If press ECONOMICAL button again, then the display icon will disappear.

(4) Air filter cleaning remind display

When the calculated operating time reaches the setting filter cleaning time, the filter cleaning icon (F1) will be
lighted up, to remind the user to clean the filter screen. After cleaning filter, the user can long press the
"ECONOMICAL" button for 3 seconds to cancel the icon.

(5) Lock display

Press LOCK button, the LOCK icon will display. Press the button again, and then the icon of LOCK disappears.
In the LOCK mode, all the buttons are invalid except for the LOCK button and RESET button.

(6) Clock display

Usually display the actual time. Press the button CLOCK for 5 seconds, the HOUR part will flash, press ▲ and
▲ to adjust HOUR. Press the CLOCK again, the minute part flash, press ▲ or ▼ to adjust MINUTE. After
clock set or clock operation, it must press the OK button to complete the set.

Control System 28
Control System

(7) Timer ON/OFF display

When adjust setting on timer or only on timer is set, the "ON" icon is lighted. When adjust setting off timer or
only off timer is set, the "OFF" icon is lighted. If timer on and timer off are both set, the "ON" and "OFF" are
both lighted.

(8) Temperature display area

Usually displays the set temperature. It can be adjusted by press temperature button ▲ and ▼, under the FAN
mode, there is no figure display in the area.

2.1.3 Operating the wired controller

1）AUTO operation
※ Insert the power supply of indoor unit, and operation lamp of indoor unit will flash.
※ Press MODE to select AUTO.
※ Set the desired temperature by pressing the TEMP ▲ and TEMP ▼, usually the temperature range is
set from 17°C to 30°C.
※ Press ON/OFF, the operation lamp of indoor unit lights, the air conditioner starts operating at the
automatic mode, and the fan speed is controlled automatically, wired controller display screen display
AUTO, so the fan speed is un-adjustable.
※ Press the button ON/OFF again, and the air conditioner stops operating.
Notes: The ECONOMICAL button is available at the auto operation mode.

2) COOL/HEAT/FAN ONLY operation

※ Press the MODE button to select any one of COOL, DRY, HEAT or FAN ONLY mode.
※ Select the desired temperature by pressing the TEMP ▲ and TEMP ▼,usually the temperature range is
set from 17°C to 30°C.
※ Press the button FAN SPEED to select any one of AUTO, LOW, MED or HIGH fan speed modes.
※ Press the ON/OFF, the operation lamp on indoor unit lights, the air conditioner operates according the
mode selected.
※ Press the button ON/OFF again, stop the air conditioner.
Notes:
1. Under fan only mode, the temperature cannot be set.
2. The economical button is valid in cool, heat mode.
3. Cooling only unit has not heat mode.

3) DRY operation
※ Press MODE to select DRY mode.
※ Select the desired temperature by pressing the TEMP ▲ and TEMP ▼,usually the temperature range is
set from 17°C to 30°C.
※ Press the ON/OFF, the operation lamp of indoor unit lights, and the air conditioner will start to dehumidify.

29 Control System
 Control System

※ Press the ON/OFF again, stop the air conditioner.

Notes: The FAN SPEED and ECONOMICAL buttons are invalid in the dry mode.
4) Only set the Timer On
※ Press button TIME ON, the wired controller display SETTING, the icons of HOUR and ON display on the
timer setting area. The wired controller enters into the setting of timer off.
※ Press button TIME ON again, and then adjust the time of timer off as desired.
※ Continuously press the button, the time of timer will increase 0.5 hours per time. After the time of timer
reaches to 10 hours, the time will increase 1 hour each time.
※ 0.5 seconds later, after finishing the adjustment, the wired controller sends the information of time off, the
timer off setting is completed.

5) Only set the Timer Off

※ Press button TIME OFF, the wired controller display SETTING, the icons of HOUR and OFF display on the
timer setting area. The wired controller enters into the setting of timer off.
※ Press button TIME OFF again, and then adjust the time of timer off as desired.
※ Continuously press the button, the time of timer will increase 0.5 hours per time. After the time of timer
reaches to 10 hours, the time will increase 1 hour each time.
※ 0.5 seconds later, after finishing the adjustment, the wired controller sends the information of time off, the
timer off setting is completed.

6) Setting Timer ON and Timer OFF simultaneously

※ Press button TIME ON, the wired controller display SETTING, the icons of HOUR and ON display on the
timer setting area. The wired controller enters into the setting of timer off.
※ Press button TIME ON again, and then adjust the time of timer off as desired.
※ Press button TIME OFF, the wired controller display SETTING, the icons of HOUR and OFF display on the
timer setting area. The wired controller enters into the setting of timer off.
※ Press button TIME OFF again, and then adjust the time of timer off as desired.
※ When set the timer on and timer off simultaneously, if the setting times of timer on and timer off are less
than 10 hours, then timer off time will always 0.5 hours later than the timer on. If the setting times of timer
on and timer off is always later 1 hour than timer on.
※ 0.5 seconds later, after finishing the adjustment, the wired controller sends the information of timer, the
timer off and timer on setting are completed.

7) Cancel the Timer setting

※ Press the TIME ON and TIME OFF, OK once more.
※ Adjust the time of timer on and timer off as 0.0 to cancel the timer on and timer off.
Notes: The time of timer on is the relative time; it is relative to the standard time of operating wired controller. If
having setting the timer on or timer off, then the clock cannot be adjusted.

Control System 30
Control System

8) Cancel the filter cleaning icon

When the calculated operating time reach the setting filter cleaning time, the filter cleaning icon will be lighted
up, to remind the user to clean the filter screen. After cleaning it can long press the ECONOMICIAL button for 3
seconds to cancel the icon.

9) Initialization parameters setting

For some functions of the wired controller, if the default setting in following list cannot meet the user’s request,
the user can select the function for setting follow the below method.
First Second code (X)
First code function
code(Y) 0 1 2 3 4
Cooling only/Cooling and Cooling and
0 Cooling only / / /
heating selection setting heating (Default)

2 Power-off memory setting Yes (Default) No / / /

Time setting for reminding Cancel the 2500 hours 5000 10000
3 1250 hours
to clean the filter function (Default) hours hours
Centigrade/Fahrenheit Centigrade
6 Fahrenheit / / /
selection setting (Default)

※ Long press the FAN SPEED and MODE buttons for 5 seconds together, and enter into the initialization
function setting interface.
※ After enter into the setting interface, the temperature display area will display "YX". "Y" means the first
function code, and "X" means the second function code, details refer to the up table. "Y" will on all the time,
"X" will flash with 1Hz frequency.
※ Press TEMP ▲ and TEMP ▼, to select the detail function under "Y" code, then press the OK button and
the setting will work, and the system will automatically shift to next "Y" code setting, until all the function
codes have been set, then the system will quit the setting interface automatically.

10) Query for initialization function parameters

After setting the initialization function, use the following method for query:
※ Long press FAN SPEED button for 2 seconds to enter into the query interface.
※ After enter to the interface, the LCD temperature display area, minute display area will display a series of
numbers, which is the current initialization parameter value. If the current initialization function is cooling
and heating (00), no power-off memory (21), the filter screen cleaning time is 5000 hours (33), centigrade
display (60), their combination is 0130, and it will display 0130.
※ After enter to the interface for 3 seconds, it will automatically exit.
※ Under this interface, it will not respond any key operation.

31 Control System
 Control System

11) Indoor unit address setting and query

※ Long press the LOCK key for 5 seconds, enter into the indoor unit address setting interface.
※ After enter into the interface, the temperature display area will display 00, means the address which is
going to be set, then press TEMP ▲ and TEMP ▼ to select the address, and then press the FAN
SPEED key to finish indoor unit address setting.
※ After enter into the interface, press MODE key to query the address.
※ Under the address setting interface, long press LOCK key for 5 seconds again, then it will exit the indoor
unit setting interface.

2.1.4 Wired controller Installation

※ Make sure the following pasts has been prepared.

NO. Name QTY. Remarks
1 wired controller 1 With Cover
2 Wood mounting screw 3 M4×20(For mounting on the wall)
3 mounting screw 3 M4×25(For mounting on the electrical switch box)
4 Installation manual 1 /
5 Owner's manual 1 /
※ Preparation before Installation:
Prepare for the following at installation site.
QTY.
NO. Name Install into Install on Remarks
the wall the wall
0.05mm2×5 Cable no
1 5-core shield cable 1 1
more than 15m
2 Switch box 1 / /
3 Wiring tube(insulating Sleeve
1 / /
and Tightening screw)
Notes:
Do not turn screws too tightly, or else the cover would be sunk or the Liquid Crystal may be broken.

(3) Installation procedure

※ Circuit of wired controller is low voltage circuit. Never connect it with a standard 220V/380V circuit or put it
into a same wiring tube with the circuit.
※ The shield cable must be connected stable to the ground, or transmission may fail.
※ Do not attempt to extend the shield cable by cutting, if it is necessary, use terminal connection block to
connect.
※ Wired controller installation size refers to the following picture (Unit: mm):

Control System 32
Control System

Wired Controller Turn a screwdriver at the concave on bottom panel

Back Cover of the Wired Controller to remove the Back Cover

Wired Controller
Top Cover
Wired Controller LCD Holes match with the
86X86 Wiring box

Wired Controller
Board

Wired Controller
Bottom Cover Back of the rear conver

Wood Mounting When installing the Wired Controller

Screw (M4X20) Cover,be sure there is a hole in the wall
to avoid the Wired Controller Back Cover
When installing the Wired Controlle r, you should being fixed directly to the wall which is
adjust the bottom of the Wired Controller Board to not allowed for the Wire Joint extrudes
the Wired Controller Back Cover which should be out of the Wired Controller Back Cover
fixed first, then press the other end of the Wired
Controller Board.

(4) Dimensions: 120*120*15mm

44

18
120
46
17

49
60
120

(5) Wiring method

Infraed Pipe
Wire Joint, 5p
Wired Controller

+5V

5-Core Shield Cable, the length

is decided by installation RUN GND
Indoor Unit Switch Board

Indoor Unit

33 Control System
 Control System

(6) Wiring diagram of wired controller

1) Wiring diagram between wired controller and four-way cassette of indoor unit:
Indoor Unit Electric
Controlling Box
Plane of Indoor Unit

Electric Controlling Box s ’ Plug CN10

Main Board

10-core
Connecting
Wire Group

Signal Reciver

5-core Connecting Group

5-core Shield Cable

Back of wired controller A BCDE

2) Wiring diagram between wired controller and duct type of indoor unit:
Indoor Unit Electric
Controlling Box

Plane of Indoor Unit

Electric Controlling Box s ’ Plug CN10

Main Board

10-core
Connecting Signal Reciver
Wire Group

5-core Connecting Group

5-core Shield Cable

Back of wired controller A BCDE

Control System 34
Control System

3) Wiring diagram between wired controller and high static duct type of indoor unit:
Indoor Unit Electric
Controlling Box

Signal Receiving Board

Electric Controlling Box s ’ Plug CN10
10-core
Main Board Connecting
Wire Group

5-core Connecting Group

A BC D E

5-core Shield Cable

Back of wired controller

35 Control System
 Control System

2.2 Wired controlle

er KJR-12B

KJR-12
2B

Model Descriptioon
Ge
eneral functtions and integrates FOLLOW
F M E function, with
KJR
R-12B/DPBG
G(T)-E
ba
acklight, verttical and level swing fun
nction.
Ge
eneral functtions and inttegrates FO OLLOW ME function, without
KJJR-12B/DP((T)-E
ba
acklight.
he function iss generally the same as
Th s the KJR-122B/DP (T)-E
E (D),
KJR-12B/DPC
C(T)-E
bu
ut excluding the heat mo ode.

2.1 Wired controllerr specifica

2.2 ations

Mo
odel KJR-12B
Pow
wer Supply Voltage
V DC 5.00V
Amb
bient Tempeerature Rang
ge -15°C～+43°C(--5℉～109℉
℉)
Amb
bient Humidity Range RH40%~RRH90%

nce Feature
Performan es
1. Operating mode: cool,
c heat, drry, fan only a
and auto.
2. Indoor setting temp
perature ran
nge: 17°C ~3
30°C.
3. LCD (L
Liquid Crysta
al Display).
4. Follow me function
n.

Control System 36
Control System

2.2
2.2 Appea
arance

(1)) Mode buttton

Th
he mode is sselected in a sequence as
a the follow
wing figure in
ndicates
AUTO COOL DRY HEAT FAN

(HEAT is invalid for COOL

L ONLY wire
ed controller..)

(2)) Timer on button

Pre
ess this bu uto-on time. Each pres
utton to initiate the au ss will incre
ease the auuto-on time
e in 30minu
utes
inc
crements. W
When the se
etting time displays
d 10H
Hr, each pre
ess will incrrease the auuto-on time in 60 minu
utes
inc
crements. If want to can
ncel the TIME
ER ON, then
n adjust the time of TIMER ON as 00.0.

(3)) Timer off button

Pre
ess this bu uto-off time. Each pres
utton to initiate the au ss will incre
ease the auuto-off time
e in 30minu
utes
inc
crements. W
When the se
etting time displays
d 10H
Hr, each pre
ess will incrrease the auuto-off time in 60 minu
utes
inc
crements. If want to can
ncel the TIME
ER OFF, the
en adjust the
e time of TIM
MER OFF ass 0.0.

(4)) Follow me
e button
Wh
hen under ccooling, heatting and autto mode, pre
ess this buttton, follow me
m function w
will be active
e. Press aga
ain,
this function w
will be ineffecctive.

(5)) Electrical Heater buttton

If press
p this bu
utton in heatting mode, electrical
e hea
ater function
n become efffective.

37 Control Syste
em
 Control System

(6) Reset button (hidden)

Use a small stick with diameter of 1mm to press the RESET button to cancel the current settings and get into
the condition of resetting.
(7) ON/OFF button
Press the button at the condition of OFF, the OPERATION lamp lights, and the wired controller enters into ON
operation, simultaneously sends the setting operation information (e.g. temperature, fan speed, timer etc.) to
the units. Press the button at the condition of ON, the OPERATION lamp extinguishes, simultaneously enters
into OFF. If having set TIMER ON or TIMER OFF, the wired controller will cancel these settings before entering
into OFF, close the relevant indicator, and then send the OFF information.

(8) Adjust button ▲

Set indoor temperature up. If press and hold on, it will increase at 1℃ per 0.5 second.

(9) Adjust button ▼

Set indoor temperature down. If press and hold on, it will decrease at 1℃ per 0.5 second.

(10)Swing button
Press this button for the first time in running time, start the swing function. Press the button for the second time,
cancel the swing function. (Match to some model with swing function)

(11) Economical button

Press the button can set the economical operation mode. Press it again will cancel the Eco mode. The
operation mode is suitable for sleeping time.

(12) Fan speed Selection button

Select the fan speed from "AUTO", "LOW", "MED", to "HIGH". Each time press the button, the fan speed will
change in turn as follow.

(13) Lock button (hidden)

Use a small stick with the diameter of 1mm to press the LOCK button, all current settings are locked in and the
wired controller does not accept any operation except that of the LOCK button. Use the lock mode when you
want to prevent setting from being changed accidentally or play fully. Press the button again then cancel the
LOCK setting.

Control System 38
Control System

2.2.3 LCD display

1
3
4

1 2 5

1 12

2 6
7

(1) Mode display

When press "MODE" button, the following mode can be selected in circle.
AUTO COOL DRY HEAT FAN

Notes: For cooling only model, heat mode is invalid.

(2) TIMER ON/OFF display

When adjust setting on timer or only on timer is set, the "ON" is lighted. When adjust setting off timer or only off
timer is set, the "OFF" is lighted. If timer on and timer off are both set, the "ON" and "OFF" are both lighted.

(3) Follow Me function

There is a temperature sensor inside the wired controller, after setting temperature, it will compare the two
temperatures, and the temperatures at wired controller space will be the same as setting temperature. It is
available under cooling, heating, and auto mode.

(4) ON/OFF display

When it is on, the icon display, otherwise it is extinguished.

(5) Fan speed display

Press FAN SPEED can select fan speed from "AUTO", "LOW", "MED" to "HIGH".
Notes: some air conditioners without MED fan speed, and then the MED is regarded as HIGH.

(6) Lock display

Press this button will enter the LOCK mode and all the buttons are invalid except for LOCK button.

(7) Temperature display area

Display the setting temperature; it can be adjusted by press temperature button ▲ and ▼. Under FAN mode,
there is no display here.

39 Control System
 Control System

2.2.4 Wired controller installation

Preparation before Installation:

Make sure the following pasts has been prepared.
NO. Name QTY. Remarks
1 Wired Controller 1 /
2 Wood mounting screw 3 M4×20(For mounting on the wall)
3 mounting screw 3 M4×25(For mounting on the electrical switch box)
4 Installation manual 1 /
5 Owner's manual 1 /
6 5-terminal group 1 RS9005E
7 Terminal installation screw 2 ST3.9×12-F-H GB845-85

Prepare for the following at installation site.

NO. Name QTY. Type Remarks
2 2
1 5-core shield cable 1 RVVP-0.5 mm ×5 0.05mm ×5 Cable no more than 15m
2 Switch box 1 / /
Wiring tube (Insulating sleeve
3 1 / /
and tightening screw)
Notes:
Never turn screws too tightly, or else the cover would be sunk or the Liquid Crystal breaks.
Installation of wired controller KJR-12B/DP (T)-E is the same to KJR-10B/DP (T)-E.

(1) Installation procedure

※ Circuit of wired controller is low voltage circuit. Never connect it with a standard 220V/380V circuit or put it
into a same wiring tube with the circuit.
※ The shield cable must be connected stable to the ground, or transmission may fail.
※ Do not attempt to extend the shield cable by cutting, if it is necessary, use terminal connection block to
connect.
Wired Controller Turn a screwdriver at the concave on bottom panel
Back Cover of the Wired Controller to remove the Back Cover

Wired Controller
Top Cover
Wired Controller LCD Holes match with the
86X86 Wiring box

Wired Controller
Board

Wired Controller
Bottom Cover Back of the rear conver

Wood Mounting When installing the Wired Controller

Screw (M4X20) Cover,be sure there is a hole in the wall
to avoid the Wired Controller Back Cover
When installing the Wired Controlle r, you should being fixed directly to the wall which is
adjust the bottom of the Wired Controller Board to not allowed for the Wire Joint extrudes
the Wired Controller Back Cover which should be out of the Wired Controller Back Cover
fixed first, then press the other end of the Wired
Controller Board.

Control System 40
Control System

※ Wiring principle sketch

5-terminal Group
A
B
Wired Controller
C
D
E
Wires here adopts 5-core Shield
Cable, the length should be accord
with the actual conditions .

(2) Dimension: 120*120*15mm

44

18
1 20
46
17

49
60
120
(3) Wiring diagram
1) Wiring diagram between wired controller and four-way cassette of indoor unit:
Indoor Unit Electric Controlling Box
Plane of Indoor Unit

Plug 10 of Electric Controlling Box

Main Board

Wire Terminal Group A B C D E

10-core Connecting
Wire Group

Signal Receiver
Signal Receiving
Board 5-core Connecting Wire Group
A B C D E 5-core Shield Cable
Grounding

Connecting to wire controller

Wire Terminal Group

Connecting Extended Figure
Back of Wired Controller
A B C D E

41 Control System
 Control System

2) Wiring diagram between wired controller and duct type of indoor unit:

Indoor Unit Electric Controlling Box

Plane of Indoor Unit

Plug Cn10 of Electric Controlling Box

Main Board

Wire Terminal Group A B C D E

10-core Connecting Signal Receiver

Wire Group

Signal Receiving 5-core Connecting Group

Board

Grounding A B C D E 5-core Shield Cable

Connecting to wire controller

Wire Terminal Group

Connecting Extended Figure

Back of Wired Controller

A B C D E

3) Wiring diagram between wired controller and high static duct type of indoor unit:
Indoor Unit Electric Controlling Box

Plug Cn10 of Electric Controlling Box

Main Board
Signal Receiving Board
10-core Connecting Group
5-core Connecting Group
Wire Terminal Group A B C D E

A B C D E

Signal Receiving Board

Grounding A B C D E 5-core Shield Cable Back of Wired Controller

Connecting to wire controller

Wire Terminal Group

Connecting Extended Figure

Control System 42
Control System

2.3 Touch key wire

ed contro
oller: KJ R-29B

KJ
JR-29B
Wiired controlle
er specificattions
Moodel KJR-29B//BK-E
Po
ower Supply
y Voltage DC 5.0
0V
Am
mbient Tempperature Ra nge -5°C～+443°C
Am
mbient Humidity Range RH40%~RRH90%

erformance ffeatures
Pe
1. Operating m
mode: cool, heat,
h dry, fa
an and auto.
2. Set the mod
de through buttons.
b
3. Indoor settin
ng temperatture range: 17°C
1 ~30°C .
4. LCD (Liquid
d Crystal Dissplay).
5. Touch key
6. Can switch Fahrenheit degree and Centigrade
e degree.

2.3
3.1 Functiion summarize

KJ
JR-29B is the
e touch key wired contro
oller.

New fun
nction Basic
c function

Air filterr cleaning re

eminding fun
nction ON and OFF the
e air-conditiooner

Indoor unit address

s setting fun
nction Auto
o-restart function

Remote
e control rec
ceiver functio
on Time
e ON and Time OFF settting

Lock the
e wired conttroller Cloc
ck setting
Setting the Operating modee,
Silent mode
m
Tem
mperature

Follow me
m Fan speed and Swing functtions

43 Control Syste
em
 Control System

2.3.2 Wired controller appearance

Follow Me Icon Air Filter Cleaning

Remiding Icon

Operating Mode

Locking Icon
Transmitting Icon
Function Icon

Timer/Clock
Setting
Display Area
Temperature
Operating Fan
Speed
Operating Ico n
Swing Icon

MODE Button ON/OFF

Button

Left Button Right Button

FAN SPEED
Button Silent/OK
Button

Temp. Setting Button Timer/Clock Setting Button

(1) Remote signal receiving function

There is the signal receiver for wireless remote controller on the [Link] can use the wireless remote
controller to control the air-conditioner through the wired controller when the system has been powered on.
Notes: The wired controller will not receive the swing controlling instruction. For the indoor unit with swinging
function, you can directly use the remote controller to control swinging through the display panel of the indoor
unit, or use the swing button on the wired remote controller to control the indoor unit for swinging.

(2) ON/OFF button

Press the ON/OFF button to control the indoor unit on and off state. When the unit is turned off, press the
ON/OFF button, the unit will be turned on and the operating icon lights up. When the unit is turned on, press
the ON/OFF button, the unit will be turned off and the operating icon lights off.

(3) Mode button

Press the mode button to set the operating mode, after each button press the operation mode will circle as
follow:
AUTO COOL DRY HEAT FAN

When the controller has been set to cool-only, then there is no HEAT mode.

(4) Fan speed setting

Under COOL, HEAT and FAN modes, press the fan speed button can adjust the fan speed setting. After each
fan speed button press will circle as follow:
AUTO→LOW→MID→HIGH→AUTO

Control System 44
Control System

Un
nder AUTO a
and DRY mo
odes, the fan speed is n
not adjustab
ble and the default
d fan sppeed is auto
o.
(5)) Temperatu
ure setting
nder AUTO, COOL, DRY
Un Y, HEAT mo
odes, press the Temp ad
djust Up/Down buttons tto set the te
emperature, the
adjusting rang 30℃ (or 62℉~88℉). Th e setting tem
ge is 17℃~3 mperature cannot be addjusted unde
er FAN mode
e.

(6)) Timer on a
and Timer off
o setting
Pre er/clock settiing button, then enter in
ess the time nto the timerr on setting state,
s and thhe screen will display tim
mer

ico
on and
d .
Yo
ou can presss Temperatu
ure setting buttons
b to a
adjust the tim
me. When the time settting is less than 10 hou
urs,
each press the ase 0.5 hourr. When the timer settin
e Temp settting buttons will increasse or decrea ng is more th
han
10 hours, each
h press Tem
mp setting buttons will in
ncrease or decrease
d 1 hour, the maaximum timer setting is 24
hours. After fin
nish adjustin
ng the time on
o setting, p ress the Sile on or wait forr 5 seconds to confirm and
ent/OK butto a
exit the time o
on setting.
No
otes: If the w
wired contro
oller has bee OFF button tto turn on/ turn
en set timer on/ off, press the ON/O t off the unit
u
the
en the timer will be cancceled simulta
aneously.

(7)) Clock settting

Long press the timer/clocck setting bu
utton for 3 se
econds, and
d then enterr into the cloock setting state.
s The hour
position of the
e clock will fla
ash, and can press Tem
mp setting bu
uttons to adjjust the houur value.
Aftter finish the
e hour setting
g, press left button or rig
ght button to
o switch to minute
m positioon setting, then the minute
position will fla
ash, press Temp
T setting
g buttons to
o adjust the minute valu
ue. After finissh the clock
k setting, pre
ess
the
e button or w
wait for 5secconds to con
nfirm and exxit the setting
g state.

(8)) Silent/OK button

Unnder the coooling, heatin
ng and auto mode, whe
en operate the
t silent mode,
m it can reduce the
e running no
oise
thrrough setting
g the fan speed to low. This will hel p you bring a quieter en
nvironment.
nder AUTO, DRY mode, the fan spe
Un eed is auto a
and the Silent /OK butto
on doesn’t w
work.

(9)) Wired con

ntroller lock
king
Sh
hort press th
he temperatu g UP and D OWN button
ure adjusting ns simultane
eously, the w
wired contro
oller enters into
loc
cking state, and the loccking icon will
w be lighte
ed up. Unde
er the locking state, thhe wired con
ntroller will not
res
spond to butttons by pre
essing and th
he control in om the wireless remote controller. Simultaneou
nstruction fro S usly
pre
ess tempera
ature adjusting buttons again
a will ca
ancel the loc
cking state.

0) Air filter cleaning re

(10 eminding fu
unction
Th
he wired con
ntroller reco al running tiime of the indoor unit, when the aaccumulated
ords the tota d running time
rea
aches the prre-set value, air filter cle
eaning remin
nding icon will
w be lighted up, to rem
mind that the
e air filter of the
door unit needs to be cleaned.
ind c ng press leftt button for 3 seconds, and clear thhe reminding icon and the
Lon
wirred controlle
er will re-acccumulate the
e total runnin
ng time of th
he indoor un
nit.
No
otes: The default settin
ng value of reminding
r unction is 2500 hours, and it can cchange to be
fu b 1250 hou
urs,
5000 hours orr 10000 hourrs.
45 Control Syste
em
 Control System

(11) Swing function

If the indoor unit supports swing function, press the right button to adjust the air outlet direction of the indoor
unit. Long press this button for 3 seconds can turn on or turn off the auto-swing function. When the auto-swing
function is turned on, the swing icon will be lighted up.

(12) Follow me function

When the system is running and the operating mode is Cooling, Heating or Auto, press the left button will
activate the Follow Me function. Press left button again will cancel follow me function. When the operating
mode is changed, and then will cancel this function as well. When the Follow Me function is activated, the icon
will be light up, and the wired controller will display room temperature read from the local sensor, and transmit
the temperature value to the indoor unit every 3 minutes.

(13) Setting addresses

Press the Temp. UP and DOWN button simultaneously for more than 8 seconds, then the controller gets
into address setting mode.
In the address setting mode, there are 2 main functions:
Querying address: press MODE button, the corresponding indoor unit will display its address.
Setting address: use the UP and DOWN buttons to choose an address you want. Then press the FAN
button to set the indoor unit's address. The corresponding indoor unit will display the new address and
record it. After about 4 seconds, this displaying will fade out and indoor units turn to normal display mode.
After setting addresses, users can press the Silent/OK button can exit the address setting mode.
After re-power, users can query the indoor address again: long press the UP and DOWN button
simultaneously will enter the address setting page, press ON/OFF button and then press MODE button,
the indoor address will be displayed on the indoor display board.
In the address setting mode, wired controller does not respond to any command from remote controller.

2.3.3 Installations

1) Safety precaution
Stated below are important safety issues that must be obeyed. Confirm there is no abnormal phenomena
during test operation after complete.
Installation by other persons may lead to imperfect installation, electric shock or fire. Improper installation
may lead to electric shock or fire. A random disassembly may cause abnormal operation or heating, which
may result in fire.
Do not install the controller in a place vulnerable to leakage of flammable gases. Once flammable gases
are leaked and left around the wired controller, fire may occur.
The wiring should adapt to the wired controller current. Otherwise, electric leakage or heating may occur
and result in fire. The specified cables shall be applied in the wiring. No external force may be applied to
the terminal. Otherwise, wire cut and heating may occur and result in fire.

Control System 46
Control System

Don’t place the wired controller near the lamps, to avoid the remote signal of the controller to be disturbed.
Do not install the unit and controller in a place with much oil, steam, sulfide gas. Otherwise, the product
may deform and fail.
※ Preparation before Installation:
Make sure the following pasts has been prepared.
Name Qty. Remarks
Wired controller 1 \
Cross round head wood mounting screw 3 M4×20 (For mounting on the wall.)
Cross round head mounting screw 2 M4×25 (For mounting on the electrical switch box.)
Installation manual 1 \
Owner’s manual 1 \
Plastic expansion pipe 3 For mounting on the wall
Plastic screw bar 2 For fixing on the 86 electrician box.
For connecting the signal receiving board and 4-core
Switching wires for signal receiving board 1
shield wire.
(If needed) For connecting the main control panel
Switching wires for wired controller signal 1
and 4-core shielding wire.

※ Prepare for the following at installation site.

Qty.(embedded Specification remarks
Name Remarks
into wall) (only for reference)
4-core shield cable 1 RVVP-0.5 mm2×4 The longest is 15M
86 electrician box 1 / /
Wiring tube (insulating sleeve
1 / /
and tightening screw)

※ Installation procedure
Circuit of wired controller is low voltage circuit. Never connect it with a standard 220V or 380V circuit
or put it into a same wiring tube with the circuit.
The shield cable must be connected stable to the ground, or transmission may fail.
Don not attempt to extend the shield cable by cutting, if it is necessary, use terminal connection block
to connect.
After finishing connection, do not use mugger to have the insulation check to the signal wire.

※ Dimensions: 120*120*20mm

Figure A

47 Control System
 Control System

※ Wiring principle sketch

Wired Controller
+5V
C
+5V C
D D
GND
A A GND
IR+
B B
IR-
4-Core Shield Cable, the length is decided by installation Infraed Pipe
Indoor Unit Switch Board
Indoor Unit

※ Wiring figure:
1) Connect two terminals of embedded 4-core shielding wire with the switching wires of wired remote controller
and signal receiving board. Make sure the sequence of 4 terminals (A, B, C and D) should correspond to the
wire sequence of signal switching wires (A, B, C and D).

C Attached connecting wires for the signal receiving panel

C
+5V
D
GND
D C D
A A A B
IR+
Front cover B B
IR-
Screw 4-core shielding wire embedded in the wall
Signal receiving panel
Control panel Signal switching wire

2) If embedded 4-core shielding wire cannot go through the wired controller, it can use signal switching for
connection and make sure the wires are reliable and firm. The tightening torque range of the screw is
0.8~1.2N .m (8~12 [Link]).

Attached connecting wires for

the signal receiving panel
4-core shielding wire
embedded in the wall

Control System 48
Control System

※ Back cover installation

1) Use straight head screwdriver to insert into the buckling position in the bottom of a wired controller, and spin
the screwdriver to take down the back cover. (Pay attention to spinning direction, if not you maybe damage the
back cover.)
Buckling position Back cover

Straight head screwdriver Front cover

2) Use three GB950-86 M4X20 screws to directly install the back cover on the wall.

Screw hole installed on

the wall,use three
GB950-86 M4X20

3) Use two M4X25 GB823-88screws to install the back cover on the 86 electrician box, and use one GB950-86
M4X20 screw for fixing the wall.

Screw hole fixed on Screw hole installed

the wall,use one
on 86 Electrician box,
GB950-86 M4X20
use two M4X25
GB823-88

49 Control System
 Control System

4) Adjust the length of two plastic screw bars in the accessory to be the standard length from the electrical box
screw bar to the wall. Make sure when install the screw bar to the electrical box screw bar, make it as flat as
the wall.
86 Electrician box
Back cover

Signal switching wires

Notes:
1. Use cross head screws to fix the wired controller bottom cover in the electric control box through the screw
bar. Make sure the wired controller bottom cover is on the same level after installation, and then install the
wired controller back to the bottom cover.
2. Over fasten the screw will lead to deformation of the back cover.

※ Neaten the wires

1) There are three positions of signal wire outlet around the wired controller, when the wired controller directly
is installed on the flat wall.
Top side
Upper left wire outlet wire outlet

Left middle
side wire
outlet
Cutting place of top Cutting place of upper Cutting place of left
side wire outlet left wire outlet middle side
wire outlet

Control System 50
Control System

2) Shielded wiiring
Wh
hen the wire
ed controllerr is stalled with
w electricia
an box, the back cover of wired conntroller is alrready reservved
one hole for w
wire outlet. It is also available for the
e shielded wire
w passing by the wall.

3) Avoid the w
water enter into the wirred controlle
er, use trap and putty to
o seal the cconnectors of
o wires durring
wirring installattion. When under
u installation, reservve certain le
ength of the connecting w
wire for convenient to ta
ake
down the wired controller while during
g maintenan
nce.

※ Front co
over installation
1) After adjustting the frontt cover and then buckle
e the front co
over; avoid clamping
c thee communication switch
hing
wirre during insstallation.

2) Correct insttall the backk cover and firmly bucklle the front cover
c aybe make the
and back cover, iff not you ma
fro
ont cover dro
op off.

51 Control Syste
em
 Control System

※ Wired controller initial parameters setting:

1. Change the related functions of the controller through adjusting the initial parameters, details refer to table 1

2. The wired controller initial parameter includes two codes "XY", the first code "X" means functions class, and
the second code "Y" means the detailed configuration of this function.
3. Setting method:
1) Press "Mode" and "Fan" button simultaneously for 5 seconds to enter the parameter setting state;
2) The value of this first code "X" is "0"; press the temperature setting button UP and DOWN to adjust the
second code value;
3) After setting the second code value, press Silent/OK button to switch the first code to the next value;
4) When the first code value is "6", press Silent /OK button again to exit the parameters setting.
4. The parameters setting function only under the situation which needs to adjust the default functions' setting
states; otherwise do not need to be set.
Table 1
First Second code
Functions
code 0 1 2 3 4
Cool-only/ Cool-Heat Cool-Heat
0 Cool-only / /
selection (Default)
Indoor unit communication
1 Yes(Default) None / / /
address setting
2 Auto-restart Yes(Default) None / / /
Air filter cleaning reminding Cancel the 2500 hours 10000
3 1250 hours 5000hours
function reminding function (Default) hours
5 Remote receiving function Yes(Default) None / / /
Centigrade/
6 Centigrade Fahrenheit / / /
Fahrenheit display
Notes:
The second code of the filter cleaning reminding is 2500 hours, which as default.

Control System 52
Control System

2.4 Wired controlle

er: KJR-9
90D

KJR-90
0D
Wiired controlle
er specificattions
Model KJR--90D/BK-E, KJR-90D1//BK-E
Pow
wer Supply Voltage
V DC 5.0
5 V
Am
mbient Temperature Rannge -5°C~+43°C
Am
mbient Humid
dity Range RH40%~ ~RH90%

erformance ffeatures
Pe
1. Operating m
mode: cool, heat,
h dry, fa
an and auto.
2. Set the mod
de through buttons.
b
3. Indoor settin
ng temperatture range: 17°C
1 ~30°C .
4. LCD (Liquid
d Crystal Dissplay).
5. Can switch Fahrenheit degree and Centigrade
e degree.

2.4
4.1 Appea
arance

No e buttons and liquid crysstal cover to prevent ele

otes: Do nott peel off the ectric shock.

53 Control Syste
em
 Control System

(1)) Remote siignal receiv

ving functio
on
Th
here is the ssignal receivver for wirele
ess remote controller on the KJR-9
[Link] cann use the wireless
w remote
ontrol the airr-conditioner through th e wired controller when the system
controller to co m has been powered
p on.
No
otes: The wired controlller will not re
eceive the sswing contro ction. For thee indoor unit with swing
olling instruc ging
fun
nction, you ccan directly use the rem
mote controlller to contro el of the indoor
ol swinging through the ddisplay pane
unit, or use the
e swing buttton on the wired
w remote
e controller to
o control the
e indoor unitt for swinging.

(2)) ON/OFF button

ess the ON/OFF button
Pre n to control the indoor unit on and
d off state. When
W d off, press the
the unnit is turned
ON
N/OFF butto
on, the unit will
w be turne
ed on and th
he operating
g icon lights up. When thhe unit is tu
urned on, pre
ess
the
e ON/OFF b d the operating icon ligh
button, the unit will be turned off and hts off.

(3)) Mode buttton

Pre
ess the mod
de button to
o set the operating mod
de, after eac de will circle as
ch button prress the opeeration mod
follow:
AUTO COOL DRY HEAT FAN

Wh
hen the conttroller has been
b set to cool-only,
c the
en there is no
n HEAT mo
ode.

(4)) Fan speed

d setting
Un
nder COOL, HEAT and FAN modes
s, press the fan speed button
b can adjust the fann speed settting. After ea
ach
fan
n speed buttton press wiill circle as fo
ollow:
AUTO→L
LOW→MID→
→HIGH→AU
UTO
Un
nder AUTO a odes, the fan speed is n
and DRY mo not adjustab
ble and the default
d fan sppeed is auto
o.
(5))Temperatu
ure setting
nder AUTO, COOL, DRY
Un Y, HEAT mo
odes, press the Temp ad
djust Up/Down buttons tto set the te
emperature, the
adjusting rang 30℃ (or 62℉~88℉). Th e setting tem
ge is 17℃~3 mperature cannot be addjusted unde
er FAN mode
e.

(6))Timer on a
and Timer off
o setting
Pre er/clock settiing button, then enter in
ess the time nto the timerr on setting state,
s and thhe screen will display tim
mer

ico
on and
d .
Yo
ou can presss Temperatu
ure setting buttons
b to a
adjust the tim
me. When the time settting is less than 10 hou
urs,
each press the ase 0.5 hourr. When the timer settin
e Temp settting buttons will increasse or decrea ng is more th
han
10 hours, each
h press Tem
mp setting buttons will in
ncrease or decrease
d 1 hour, the maaximum timer setting is 24
hours. After fin
nish adjustin
ng the time on
o setting, p ress the Sile on or wait forr 5 seconds to confirm and
ent/OK butto a
exit the time o
on setting.
No
otes: If the w
wired contro
oller has bee OFF button tto turn on/ turn
en set timer on/ off, press the ON/O t off the unit
u
the
en the timer will be cancceled simulta
aneously.

Control System 54
Control System

(7) Clock setting

Long press the timer/clock setting button for 3 seconds, and then enter into the clock setting state. The hour
position of the clock will flash, and can press Temp setting buttons to adjust the hour value.
After finish the hour setting, press left button or right button to switch to minute position setting, then the minute
position will flash, press Temp setting buttons to adjust the minute value. After finish the clock setting, press
the button or wait for 5seconds to confirm and exit the setting state.

(8) ECO/OK button

Press the ECO/OK button to enter ECO operation when the unit is turned on and is cooling or heating. Under
ECO operation, the initial fan speed is auto, and the setpoint is 26℃ for cooling mode, and 22℃ for heating
mode.
ECO operation is available only when the IDU equipped with this function.

(9) Wired controller locking

Short press the temperature adjusting UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously, the wired controller enters into
keyboard locking state, and the locking icon will be lighted up. Under the locking state, the wired controller will
not respond to buttons by pressing and the control instruction from the wireless remote controller.
Simultaneously press temperature adjusting buttons again will cancel the locking state.

(10) Air filter cleaning reminding function

The wired controller records the total running time of the indoor unit, when the accumulated running time
reaches the pre-set value, air filter cleaning reminding icon will be lighted up, to remind that the air filter of the
indoor unit needs to be cleaned. Long press left button for 3 seconds, and clear the reminding icon and the
wired controller will re-accumulate the total running time of the indoor unit.
Notes: The default setting value of reminding function is 2500 hours, and it can change to be 1250 hours,
5000 hours or 10000 hours.

(11) Swing function

If the indoor unit supports swing function, press the right button to adjust the air outlet direction of the indoor
unit. Long press this button for 3 seconds can turn on or turn off the auto-swing function. When the auto-swing
function is turned on, the swing icon will be lighted up.

(12) Follow me function

When the system is running and the operating mode is Cooling, Heating or Auto, press the left button will
activate the Follow Me function. Press left button again will cancel follow me function. When the operating
mode is changed, and then will cancel this function as well. When the Follow Me function is activated, the icon
will be light up, and the wired controller will display room temperature read from the local sensor, and transmit
the temperature value to the indoor unit every 3 minutes.

55 Control System
 Control System

(13) Setting addresses

Press the Temp. UP and DOWN button simultaneously for more than 8 seconds, then the controller gets
into address setting mode.
In the address setting mode, there are 2 main functions:
Querying address: Press MODE button, the corresponding indoor unit will display its address.
Setting address: Use the UP and DOWN buttons to choose an address you want. Then press the FAN
button to set the indoor unit's address. The corresponding indoor unit will display the new address and
record it. After about 4 seconds, this displaying will fade out and indoor units turn to normal display mode.
After setting addresses, users can press the ECO/OK button can exit the address setting mode.
After re-power, users can query the indoor address again: long press the UP and DOWN button
simultaneously will enter the address setting page, press ON/OFF button and then press MODE button,
the indoor address will be displayed on the indoor display board.
In the address setting mode, wired controller does not respond to any command from remote controller.

2.4.2 Installations

1) Safety precaution
Please entrust the distributor or professionals to install the unit, do not install the unit by the user. Please
entrust the distributor or professionals to install the unit, do not install the unit by the user.
Do not install the unit randomly.
The wiring should adapt to the wired controller current.
The specified cables shall be applied in the wiring. No external force may be applied to the terminal.
The circuit of wire controller is a low voltage circuit, do not contact to the high voltage circuit, and cannot
be arranged in the same wiring pipe with the high circuit, the distance between the wiring pipes should be
at least more than 300~500mm.
Do not connect transition or extended connection in the middle of the wirings of the wired controller.

※ Preparation before Installation:

Make sure the following pasts has been prepared.

Name Qty. Remarks

Wired controller 1 \
This accessory is used when install the wired
M4×25 cruciform slot screw 2
controller inside the electric cabinet
Installation and operation manual 1 \
The accessory is used when install the wired
Plastic bolt 2
controller inside the electric cabinet
For connect between the signal received wire
The connective wires of signal received panel 1
and shielded 5-core cable

Control System 56
Control System

※ Prepare for the following at installation site

Name Qty. Remarks
Universal electric cabinet specification, pre-embed it
Electric box 1
into the wall.
Shielded 5-core cable 1 Pre-embed RVVP-0.5mm 2×5 into wall.
Pre-embed into wall; the longest length should not
Wire configured tube (insulated sheath) 1
exceed than 15m.
Phillips screwdriver 1 For install Cruciform slot screw.
Slotted head screwdriver 1 For unscrew the bottom cover of wired controller.

※ Installation methods
Cut off the connective wires for the signal received panel (accessory) from the middle (no protecting
sleeve part), divide into A and B part, and the A part has big 5-core connector as well as B part has small
5-core connector.
Connect the big 5-core connector of the A part signal received panel connecting wire group with 5-core
terminal of signal received panel.
Please connect the other side (cut-off side) of the A part signal received panel with the wall pre-bedded
5-core cable reliability.
Connective wires for the signal received panel (accessory)
A
B
C
D
E A part
The shielded 5-core wire pre-embedded into wall. Signal received panel

Please connect the cut-off side of B part signal received panel with the wall pre-bedded 5-core cable
reliability.
The shielded 5-core wire
A pre-embedded into wall
B
C
D
E
B part
Notes:
Connecting wires of two sides in digital display pipe must be connected one to one.
Insert to the bottom cover to the electric cabinet by the accessory slotted head screws, and take down the
bottom cover.

Adjust the length of plastic screw equal to the length from electrical box screw to the wall. Make sure the
plastic screw is parallel to the wall.
Make the connecting wires of B part signal receiving panel to go through the hole of back cover, and use
Make sure the back cover of wire controller in the same level.

57 Control System
 Control System

B part

Insert the small 5-core connector of the B part signal receiving panel connecting wire group with the
5-core terminal of wire controller PCB panel one to one, and then cover the wire controller with the back
cover.

B part
Notes:
1. If the screw too tight will cause deformation of rear cover and the LCD is broken.
2. When install the bolts, please keep the screws and wired controller in the same height level, prevent
deformed.
3. When install wired controller, please reserve a certain length and connective to maintenance.

Wiring diagram
Indoor unit electric control box

Indoor unit display panel

Indoor unit 5-core connecting wire group

electric control panel
5-core shielding wire

The back of
the wired
controller

Control System 58
Control System

2.5 V4 plus R wired contro

oller: KJR
R-120A

KJR-120A
Wiired controlle
er specificattions

Model
M KJR-120A/B-E
Po
ower Supply Voltage 5.0 V DC
Am
mbient Tempperature Ran
nge -5°C～+ +43°C
Am
mbient Humidity Range RH40%~R RH90%

erformance ffeatures
Pe
1. Operating m
mode: cool, heat,
h dry, fa
an and auto.
2. Set the mod
de through buttons.
b
3. Indoor settin
ng temperatture range: 17°C
1 ~30°C .
4. LCD (Liquid
d Crystal Dissplay).

2.5
5.1 Functiions summ
mary

Th ns as follows:
he controller has function
1) Can compa
atible with the V4 plus he
eat recycling
g 3-pipe sys
stem and V4 plus 2-pipee system.
2) Setting the mode through buttons;
3) Timer functiion;
4) Auto-restartt function;
5) Query functtion;
6) Indoor unit error displayy function

59 Control Syste
em
 Control System

2.5
5.2 Appea
arance

1 ON/OF
FF ON/OFF the air conditionerr 9 Temp ▲ Increasee the setting temperature
e
Sele
ect operation
n mode Decreasee the settingg
2 Mode 10 Temp ▼
(AUTTO/COOL/D DRY/HEAT/F FAN) temperatture
Enable/disable the
t real time
e
3 Clock 11 Swing Activate//deactivate swing
s contro
ol
clock setting mo
ode
Activate//deactivate 10℃
1 heat
4 Timer o
on Ente
er timer on setting
s mode
e 12 10℃Heat
operationn mode
Reset
5 Timer o
off Ente
er timer off setting
s mode
e 13 Reset thee wired conttroller
(hidden)
Confirm and bac ck to main Lock Lock butttton function
n of wired
6 OK buttton 14
disp
play (hidden) controlleer
Cheeck the temp perature andd Cool/Heatt
7 Check 15 Operatioon mode lock
king
operration state of indoor un
nit (hidden)
8 Fan sp
peed Sele
ect fan speed

(1)) ON/OFF b
button
Wh
hen the unitt is turned off, press ON
N/OFF butto n, the unit will
w be turned on and th e operation LED lights on.
hen the unit is turned on
Wh n, press ON/OFF button
n, the unit will be turned off and the operation LED
L lights offf.

(2)) Mode buttton

 Press the
e button to se
elect the ope
eration mod
de, each press will chang
ge as follow
wing order:
AUTO→C
COOL→DRY
Y→ HEAT→ TO
→FAN→AUT
 Cool-onlyy mode will change
c as fo
ollowing orde
er:
COOL→D
DRY→FAN→
→COOL
otes: Heat-o
No only mode ca
an only set to
t HEAT mo
ode.
 When mo
ode setting is in progres
ss, the scree
en light the mode "set" string and ddisplay the setting
s mode
e of
the wired remote con
ntroller. After the mode setting is co
ompleted, "s
set" strings extinguish and
a the scre
een
display th eration mode of the indo
he actual ope oor unit.

Control System 60
Control System

 The indoo
or unit has 3 different ac
ctual operattion modes: COOL/HEA
AT/FAN. Thee actual ope
eration mode
e of
the
e indoor uniit may be diifferent from
m the setting
g mode of th
he controller. For exam
mple: if the setting
s mode
e is
AU
UTO, the actual operatio
on mode of the indoor unit may be
e COOL or HEAT.
H ode is DRY, the
If thee setting mo
actual operatio
on mode of the indoor unit
u is COOL
LING.

(3)) Clock settting

Firrst power on
n or reset the
e wired conttroller, the cclock will display 12:30, pressing thee CLOCK bu
utton can en
nter
to the clock se
etting state. At
A this time, the minute position will be flashed, press ▲ oor ▼ button
n can adjust the
minute; press the CLOCK
K button aga
ain then the hour positio
on will be flashed, and ppress ▲ or ▼ button can
c
adjust the hour. The third time
t press th
he CLOCK b
button or pre
ess OK butto
on can exit aand finish the clock setting,
or wait for 5s tto exit the clock setting automatical ly.

(4)) Timer settting

 Press "TIMER ON" or
o "TIMER OFF"
O to ente
er the timer setting,
s n press ▲ oor ▼button can adjust the
then
en the timerr on or off se
timer, whe etting is lesss than 10 ho
ours, each press
p ▲ or ▼ button will
w increase
e or
decrease 0.5 hour. When
W the timer on or off ssetting is mo
ore than 10 hours, eachh press ▲ or
o ▼button will
increase o
or decrease
e 1 hour, the maximum ttimer on or off
o setting is 24 hours. P
Press OK bu
utton or wait for
5s will exiit the timer setting
s and back
b to norm
mal display.
 When the
e timer on/off s set the ttimer to 0.0 hour will can
ff has been set, ncel the timeer.
No
otes:
If the
t controlle
er has been
n set timer on/ OFF to turn on/ off the unit and th
o off, presss the ON/O he timer will be
canceled simu
ultaneously.

(5)) Check button

Pre
ess the CHE
ECK button to
t display ro
oom tempera
ature (Tf) an
nd evaporato
or temperatuure (T2 and T2b)
T of the unit.
u
Firrst press CH
HECK button
n, the scree
en display th
he room tem
mperature (T ECK button, the
TF). Second press CHE
roo
om temperature displayy will switch to
t middle-evvaporator tem T2), then at third press CHECK buttton
mperature (T
the
e temperature display will
w switch to evaporator--outlet temp
perature(T2B
B). Press OK
K button or wait
w 5s will exit
e
the
e query disp
play and bacck to normal display.

(6)) Fan speed

d
FAN SPEED button to se
1) Press the F et the fan sp
peed of indoor unit. The fan speed sswitch orderr as follow:

2) For no med
dium fan type
e, the wired remote con
ntroller fan sp
peed switch order is:

3) Setting the fan speed to

o AUTO then the indoorr unit will acttually run at LOW speedd.

61 Control Syste
em
 Control System

(7) Temperature setting

Press the temperature adjusting buttons ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the setting temperature. Under
AUTO/COOL/DRY/HEAT operating mode can set the temperature, the setting range: 17℃-30℃(62℉-88℉).

(8) Swing function

Press the swing button to activate the swing function when the fan of indoor unit is turned on. Press this button
again can deactivate the swing function (This function is effective when it is used with the relative indoor unit).

(9) 10℃ Heat mode

 For preventing a significant decline of the room temperature when nobody in the room and the air
conditioner is turn off in cold weather, you can set the unit to operate as 10℃Heat mode for keeping the
room warm.
 Press the 10℃ Heat button can enter the 10℃ Heat operation mode. The screen of the wired controller
will display "10℃". Press this button again or press ON/OFF button will exit 10℃ Heat mode and turn off
the unit.
 Under 10℃ Heat operating mode, when the room temperature is lower than 10℃, then the unit will start
to heat, and the wired controller operation LED will be lighted up, at the same time the "run" LED of the
display panel light up and display "17" if the digital LED is available on the panel. When the room
temperature is higher than 15℃ then it will stop heating and the operation LED lights off.
 Press the 10℃ Heat button again or ON/OFF button can exit 10℃ Heat mode.

(10) Locking (Hidden)

Use a small stick with a diameter of 1mm to press the LOCK button to lock the current setting, press the button
again to unlock

(11) Cool-only/ Heat-only/ Cool-heat switching (Hidden)

The factory default of the controller is cool-heat mode. Use a small stick with a diameter of 1mm to press the
cool/heat button, each press will change the mode locking as the following order:
Cool-heat mode→Cool-only mode→Heat only mode→Cool-heat mode
Notes:
1) Under cool-only mode, the wired remote controller can only be switched in 3 different operation modes:
COOL→ DRY →FAN.
2) Under heat-only mode, the controller can only be set to HEAT mode.

(12) Reset (hidden)

Use a small stick with a diameter of 1mm to press the reset button to reset the chip of the controller, and all the
setting state of the controller will be saved.

Control System 62
Control System

(13
3) Auto ope
eration mod
de (3-pipe system)

 ates under 3-pipe system

If the conttroller opera m auto operation mode, the screen will display " " icon
n.
 3-pipe sysstem auto op
peration mo
ode can auto
omatically sw
witch to COO
OL mode or HEAT mode
e depending
g on
the tempe
erature diffe
erence betw
ween setting ure(Ts) and indoor tem
g temperatu mperature(Tff), and the fan
speed is a
adjustable.
 d remote controller will set the unit to operate on heating mode
The wired m when Ts-Tf is gre
eater than ΔT,
Δ
and changeover to cooling
c mode when Ts--Tf is less th
hanΔT. The
e minimum operating mode
m switch
hing
interval is 15 minutess.
 ult ΔT is 3℃
The defau ℃, the value
e can be cha
anged from 1~4℃. Pres
ss ▲ and ▼ buttons simultaneou
usly
for 5 seco
onds to ente
er the ΔT se
etting, then p
press ▲ orr ▼button to
o adjust the value of ΔT.
※ The auto operation mode
m of the controller
c ca
annot be cha
anged by oth
her control tterminals, su
uch as wirele
ess
remote co
ontroller, cen
ntral remote controller, e
etc.
No
otes:
1) The wired remote conttroller can be stem; in that case the ccontroller sh
b used in a 2-pipe sys hould be sett to
2-p
pipe system mode.
2) For a 2-pipe on mode willl set the unit to operate on COOL m
e system, auto operatio mode and th
he fan speed
d is
set to auto and
d is not adju
ustable.

(14
4) Air filter c
cleaning re
emind functtion
Th
he controller records the total runnin
ng time of the
e indoor unitt, when the accumulated
a me reaches the
d running tim
e-set value, flashed "F1" flag will appear to rremind the user the airr filter of inddoor unit is needed to be
pre
eaned, the "F1" flag will auto disapp
cle pear after 8ss, and it will appear and ery time turn on
d flash for 8ss again eve
the
e unit. Presss CHECK and
a OK butttons simulttaneously will he "F1"remi nding flag, and the wired
w cancel th
rem
mote controller will re-acccumulate the total runn
ning time of the indoor unit.
u The air filter cleanin
ng pre-set tiime
can be set to
o 5 differen ods (defaultts 2500 ho
nt time perio ours). Pressing the CH
HECK and CLOCK
C buttton
sim
multaneouslyy for 5 seco Five time periods corres
onds will entter setup. F des (0,1,2,3,4),
sponding to the five cod
pre
ess the ▲ a
and ▼ keyys to adjust between
b the
e different co
odes.
0 1 2 3 4
Disable the
e
50 Hours
125 2500 Hours
s 5000 Hours
H 100000 Hours
alarm funcction

63 Control Syste
em
 Control System

2.5.3 Codes description

The wired controller KJR-120A can display the fault codes when the units malfunction or protection, the code
as follow:
Codes Description
E0 Modes confliction
E1 Communication malfunction between indoor/outdoor units
E2 T1 sensor malfunction
E3 T2 sensor malfunction
E4 T2B sensor malfunction
Ed Outdoor unit malfunction
EF Water level switch checking malfunction
F1 Air filter cleaning remind function
F2 Wired controller EEPROM malfunction
F3 Communication malfunction between wired controller and indoor unit
F4 Wired controller temperature sensor malfunction

2.5.4 Installation

※ Preparation before Installation:

Make sure the following pasts has been prepared.
NO. Name QTY. Remarks
1 Wired Controller 1 With Cover
2 Wood mounting screw 3 M4×20(For mounting on the wall)
3 mounting screw 3 M4×25(For mounting on the electrical switch box)
4 Installation manual 1 /
5 Owner's manual 1 /
6 5-way terminal 1 RS9005E
Terminal Installation
7 2 ST3.9x12-F-H
screw

※ Prepare for the following at installation site.

NO. Name QTY. Remarks

The factory default length is 6m; The
1 4-core shield cable 1
longest length should be less than 15m.
2 2-cores wire 1 1.5m length
3 Switch box 1 /
Wiring tube(insulating sleeve and
4 1 /
tightening screw)

Notes:
1. This manual contains information about the procedure of installing the controller.
2. The circuit of the wired controller is a low voltage circuit, never connect it with a 220V/380V circuit or put it

Control System 64
Control System

into a same wiring tube with the circuit, and the interval must be more than 300~500mm.
3. The shield cable must be connected stable to the ground, or transmission may fail.
4. Do not to attempt to extend the shield cable by cutting, if it is necessary, use Terminal Connection Block to
connect.
5. After finished connection, do not use Megger to do installation check to the signal wire.

1) Wiring method

GND(E)
To Display Panel
4-cores wire To indoor unit
2-cores wire X, Y Port

Wired Controller

2) Wired controller mode setting:

SW1 definition:
The controller can work on 2-pipe system mode or
heat recycling 3-pipe system mode. AUTO mode in
a 2-pipe system is cooling operation; a 3-pipe
system is real auto operation. Set the switch SW1
on the main board to select 2-pipe system mode or
3-pipe system mode. The factory default setting is
3-pipe system mode.
3) Dimension: 120*120*15mm

65 Control System
 Control System

4) Wiring principle

Controller Turn a screwdriver at the concave on bottom panel

Back Cover of the Controller to remove the Back Cover
Controller
Top Cover
Controller LCD Holes match with the
86X86 Wiring box

Controller Board

Controller
Bottom Cover

Wood Mounting When installing the controller cover,

Screw (M4X20) be sure there is a hole in the wall to avoid
the controller back cover being fixed directly
When installing the controller, you should
to the wall which is not allowed for the wire
adjust the bottom of the wired remote controller
joint extrudes out of the controller back cover.
board to the back cover which should be fixed first,
then press the other end of the controller board.

3-cores shield wire

INDOOR MAIN BOARD INDOOR UNIT

X Y (E) INDOOR UNIT CONNECTOR

RED WHITE

DISPLAY PANEL

2-cores wire

4-cores wire

BROWN
RED YELLOW

BLACK

A B C D
GND(E)
Wired controller

Notes:
1) This wired controller is compatible with the indoor unit of V4 plus heat recycling 3-pipe system and V4+
2-pipe system.
2) Please do not connect the wired controller and a CCM. to the same XYE port, otherwise it will lead to
conflict.

Control System 66
Control System

2.6 V4 Plu
us R Series: KJR--120B

KJR-12
20B
Wiired controlle
er specificattions

Model KJR-120B
B/BKP-E
Power Suppply Voltage
e DC 5..0 V
Ambient Te
emperature Range -5°C～++43°C
Ambient Humidity Rannge RH40%~RH90%

erformance ffeatures
Pe
1. Operating m
mode: cool, heat,
h dry, fa
an and auto.
2. Set the mod
de through buttons.
b
3. Indoor settin
ng temperatture range: 17°C
1 ~30°C .
4. LCD (Liquid
d Crystal Dissplay).
5. Auto mode for V4 plus R series.

2.6
6.1 Functiions summ
mary

Th ns as follows:
he controller has function
1) Can compa
atible with the V4 plus he
eat recycling
g 3-pipe sys
stem and V4 plus 2-pipee system.
2) Clock and T
Timer functio
on;
3) Auto-restartt function;
4) Query functtion;
5) Indoor unit error displayy function
6) Auto mode and air filterr cleaning re
eminding fun
nction
7) Can switch Fahrenheit degree and Centigrade
e degree.

67 Control Syste
em
 Control System

2.6.2 Appearance

Operating Mode

Locking Icon
Transmitting Icon
Function Icon

Timer/Clock
Setting
Display Area
Temperature
Operating Fan
Speed
Operating Ico n
Swing Icon

MODE Button ON/OFF

Button

Left Button Right Button

FAN SPEE D
Button Silent/OK
Button

Temp. Setting Button Timer/Clock Setting Button

(2) ON/OFF button

Press the On/Off button to control the indoor unit on and off state.
When the unit is turned off, press this button, the unit will be turned on and the operation icon lights on.
When the unit is turned on, press this button, the unit will be turned off and the operation icon lights off.

(2) Mode button

 Press the button to select the operation mode, each press will change as following order:
AUTO→COOL→DRY→ HEAT→FAN→AUTO
 Cool-only mode will change as following order:
COOL→DRY→FAN→COOL
Notes: Heat-only mode can only set to HEAT mode.
 When mode setting is in progress, the screen light the mode "set" string and display the setting mode of
the wired controller. After the mode setting is completed, "set" strings extinguish and the screen display
the actual operation mode of the indoor unit.
 The indoor unit has 3 different actual operation modes: COOL/HEAT/FAN. The actual operation mode of
the indoor unit may be different from the setting mode of the controller. For example: If the setting mode is
AUTO, the actual operation mode of the indoor unit may be COOL or HEAT. If the setting mode is DRY, the
actual operation mode of the indoor unit is COOLING.

Control System 68
Control System

(3)) Clock settting

Firrst power on
n or reset the
t wired co
ontroller, the
e clock will display 12:00. Long prressing the Timer/CLO
OCK
button for 2 se
econds can enter
e to the clock settin g state. At this time, the
e minute possition will be
e flashed; pre
ess
or b
button can adjust
a the minute.

Aftter finishing the hour setting,

s press left button
n or right butto
on to switch to minute
m posittion
setting, then th
he minute po
osition will fllash, presss and to adjust the minuute value.

Aftter finish the

e clock settting, press the
t button or wait
w for 5 seconds to coonfirm and exit
e the settting
sta
ate.

(4))Timer settiing

Pre
ess the time
er/clock settting button to
t enter the timer on se
etting state, and the scrreen will dis
splay a
and

.
Pre
ess and
d button
ns can adjus
st the timer. When the timer setting is less than 10 hours, ea
ach press
or n will increase or decrease 0.5 hou
button ur. When the
e timer settin
ng is more tthan 10 hou
urs, each pre
ess
or will increase or decrease
w e 1 hour, the
e maximum timer
t setting
g is 24 hourss.

Aftter adjusting
g the timer on
o setting, prress the button or wait for 5 seconds too confirm and exit the tim
mer
on setting.
Un
nder the time
er on setting
g state, pres
ss the timer/cclock setting
g button, the
en enter intoo the timer off
o setting sta
ate,

and the screen

n will displayy and .
Th
he setting me
ethod of timer off is the same as the
e timer on.
Un etting state, set the time
nder timer se er on and tim
mer off to be 0.0h can ca
ancel timer oon and timer off.
No
otes:
If the
t controlle
er has been
n set timer on/ OFF to turn on/ off the unit and th
o off, presss the ON/O he timer will be
canceled simu
ultaneously.

(6)) Fan speed

d
Un
nder COOL, HEAT and FAN
F modes, press the ffan speed button can ad
djust the fann speed settiing.
Un
nder AUTO a
and DRY mo
odes the fan
n speed is no e and the fan speed deffaults auto speed.
ot adjustable s
1) Press the F
FAN SPEED button to se
et the fan sp
peed of indoor unit. The fan speed sswitch orderr as follow:

2) Under AUTO
O and DRY modes the fan
f speed iss not adjusta
able and the
e fan speed ddefaults autto speed.

(6))Temperatu
ure setting
ess the temperature adjjusting butto
Pre ons or to inc
crease or decrease the ssetting temp
perature. Under
AU
UTO/COOL/DRY/HEAT operating mode
m can sett the temperrature, the setting
s rangee: 17℃-30℃
℃(62℉-88℉).
Th
he setting tem
mperature cannot
c be ad
djusted unde
er the FAN mode.
m

69 Control Syste
em
 Control System

(7) Swing function

Press the swing button to activate the swing function when the fan of indoor unit is turned on, and the
swing icon will be lighted up. Press this button again can turn off the swing function, and the swing icon
lights off. This function is effective when it is used with the relative indoor unit.

(8) Silent mode

Under the COOL, HEAT, FAN modes, press the silent button can enter the silent operation. It is used
to reduce the running noise through setting the fan speed to low.

Under the AUTO, DRY mode, the fan speed is auto and the silent button doesn’t work.

(9) Locking wired controller

Press the temperature adjusting buttons and simultaneously, the wired controller enters locking

state, and the locking icon will be lighted up.

Under the locking state, the wired controller will not respond from the buttons pressing and the command of
the remote controller.
Press the temperature adjusting buttons and simultaneously again can cancel the locking state.

(10) Query function

Long press the FAN SPEED button and Silent /OK button will display the temperature from temperature sensor.
Use and buttons can switch display of room temperature (Tf), middle evaporator temperature t2

and evaporator-outlet temperatureT2b. Press button or wait 5s will exit the query function and back to
normal display.

(11) Air filter cleaning reminding function

The wired controller records the total running time of the indoor unit, when the accumulated running time

reaches the pre-set value, the air filter cleaning reminding icon will be lighted up to remind users need to
clean the air filter of the indoor unit.

Long press button for 2 seconds, and reset the reminding icon and the wired controller will
re-accumulate the total running time of the indoor unit.
The default setting value of the reminding function is 2500 hours, and it can change to be 1250 hours, 5000
hours or 10000 hours.

(13) Auto operation mode (3-pipe system)

1) 3-pipe system auto operation mode can automatically switch to COOL mode or HEAT mode depending on
the temperature difference between setting temperature(Ts) and indoor temperature(Tf), and the fan speed is
adjustable.
2) The wired controller will set the unit to operate on heating mode when Ts minus the Tf difference value is
over than ∆T, and changeover to cooling mode when Ts minus the Tf difference value is less than -∆T. The

Control System 70
Control System

minimum operating mode switching interval is 15 minutes.

3) Under 3-pipe system auto operation mode, the auto mode icon " " flashes, and the COOL or HEAT icon
will be lighted up depending on the actual operation mode.
4) The default ∆T is 2°C, the value can be changed from 1~4°C. Please refer to WIRED REMOTE
CONTROLLER INITIAL PARAMETER SETTING for detailed setting methods.
5) The auto operation mode of the controller cannot be changed by other control terminals, such as wireless
remote controller, central remote controller, etc.
Notes:
1) The wired controller can be used in a 2-pipe system; in that case the controller should be set to 2-pipe
system mode.
2) For a 2-pipe system, auto operation mode will set the unit to operate on COOL mode and the fan speed is
set to auto and is not adjustable.

2.6.3 Codes description

The wired controller KJR-120A can display the fault codes when the units malfunction or protection, the code
as follow:
Codes Description
E0 Modes confliction of the indoor unit
E1 Communication malfunction between indoor/outdoor units
E2 T1 sensor malfunction
E3 T2 sensor malfunction
E4 T2B sensor malfunction
Ed Outdoor unit malfunction
EE Water level switch checking malfunction
F2 Wired controller EEPROM malfunction
F3 Communication malfunction between wired controller and indoor unit
F4 Wired controller temperature sensor malfunction
Notes:
1. The wired controller cannot display the EEPROM malfunction of the indoor unit
2. Under a state of fault display, wired controller does not respond to any button operation.

2.6.4 Wired controller initial parameters setting

1. Change the related functions of the controller through adjusting the initial parameters, details refer to table 1.
[Link] wired remote controller initial parameter include two codes "XY", the first code "X" means function class,
the second code "Y" means the detailed configuration of this function.
[Link] method:
① Simultaneously long press "Mode" and "Fan" button of the wired remote controller for 5 seconds to enter
the parameter setting state;

71 Control System
 Control System

② The value of this first code "X" is "0", press the temperature setting button and to adjust the
second code value;

③ After setting the second code value, press Silent/Ok button to switch the first code to the next
value;

④ When the first code value is "6", press Silent/Ok button again will exit the parameters setting.
3. The parameters setting function only under the situation which needs to adjust the default functions'
setting states; otherwise there is no need to do the setting.
Table 1
First Second code
Function
code 0 1 2 3 4
Cool-only/Cool-Heat Cool-Heat / /
0 Cool-only /
selection (Default)
2 Power-off memory Yes(Default) None / / /
Filter cleaning reminding Cancel the 2500 hours
3 1250 hours 5000 hours 10000 hours
reminding icon (Default)
Centigrade/ Fahrenheit Centigrade / /
6 Fahrenheit /
display (Default)
3-pipe system/ 2-pipe 3-pipe system 2-pipe / /
7 /
system (Default) system
2°C
8 Setting ∆T value / 1°C 3°C 4°C
(Default)

2.6.5 Installation

1) Safety precaution
Stated below are important safety issues that must be obeyed. Confirm there is no abnormal phenomena
during test operation after complete.
Installation by other persons may lead to imperfect installation, electric shock or fire. Improper installation
may lead to electric shock or fire. A random disassembly may cause abnormal operation or heating, which
may result in fire.
Do not install the controller in a place vulnerable to leakage of flammable gases. Once flammable gases
are leaked and left around the wired controller, fire may occur.
The wiring should adapt to the wired controller current. Otherwise, electric leakage or heating may occur
and result in fire. The specified cables shall be applied in the wiring. No external force may be applied to
the terminal. Otherwise, wire cut and heating may occur and result in fire.
Don’t place the wired controller near the lamps, to avoid the remote signal of the controller to be disturbed.
Do not install the unit and controller in a place with much oil, steam, sulfide gas. Otherwise, the product
may deform and fail.

※ Preparation before Installation:

Make sure the following pasts has been prepared.

Control System 72
Control System

NO. Name QTY. Remarks

1 Wired Controller 1 /
2 Wood mounting screw 3 M4×20(For mounting on the wall)
3 mounting screw 3 M4×25(For mounting on the electrical switch box)
4 Installation manual 1 /
5 Owner's manual 1 /
6 Plastic screw bar 2 For fixing on the 86 electrician box
Switching wires for For connecting the signal receiving board and
7 1
signal receiving board 4-core shielding wire
Switching wires for wire For connecting the main control panel and 4-core
8 1
controller signal shielding wire

※ Prepare for the following at installation site.

NO. Name QTY. Remarks

1 4-core shielded cable 1 The longest length should be less than 15m.
2 86 Electrician box 1 /
Wiring tube(insulating sleeve
3 1 /
and tightening screw)

2) Dimension: 120*120*20mm
Unit: mm

Figure A

Figure A Fig.1
3) Wiring Principle Sketch:
3-cores shield wire

Indoor Main Board INDOOR UNIT

X Y (E) INDOOR UNI T CONNEC TOR

RED WHITE

Display Panel

2-cores wire

4-cores wire
BROWN
YELLOW
BLACK
RED

A B C D
GND(E)

Wired controller
Notes:
1) This wired controller is compatible with the indoor unit of V4 plus heat recycling 3-pipe system and V4+

73 Control System
 Control System

2-pipe system.
2) Please do not connect the wired controller and a CCM. to the same X, Y ,E port, otherwise it will lead to
conflict.

4) Back cover installation

 Use straight head screwdriver to insert into the buckling position in the bottom of the wired controller,
and spin the screwdriver to take down the back cover. (Pay attention to spinning direction, otherwise
will damage the back cover!) (Fig.2)
 Use three GB950-86 M4X20 screws to directly install the back cover on the wall. (Fig.3)
 Use two M4X25 GB823-88screws to install the back cover on the 86 electrician box, and use one
GB950-86 M4X20 screw for fixing on the wall. (Fig.4.1)
 Adjust the length of two plastic screw bars in the accessory to be standard length from the electrical
box screw bar to the wall. Make sure when install the screw bar to the electrical box screw bar, make
it as flat as the wall. (Fig.4.2)
 Use cross head screws to fix the wired controller bottom cover in the electric control box through the
screw bar. Make sure the wired controller bottom cover is on the same level after installation, and
then install the wired controller back to the bottom covers.
 Over fasten the screw will lead to deformation of the back cover.
Buckling position Back cover

Screw hole installed on

the wall,use three
GB950-86 M4X20

Straight head screwdriver Front cover

Fig.2 Fig.3

86 Electrician box
Back cover

Signal switching wires

Screw hole fixed on Screw hole installed

the wall,use one
on 86 Electrician box,
GB950-86 M4X20
use two M4X25
GB823-88

Fig.4.1 Fig.4.2

5) Wiring figure
A. Wiring, three outlet positions

Control System 74
Control System

p side
Top
Up
pper left wire outlet
o wire
e outlet

Lefft middle
side wire
outtlet
Cutting place
p of top Cuttinng place of up
pper Cuttin
ng place of le
eft
side wire outlet left wiire outlet middle side
wire outlet
o
Fig.5
B. Shielded w
wiring

Puutty
Trapp Puttty
Puutty

Trapp
Traap

Figg.7

6)..Front cove
er installatio
on

Fig.9 F
Fig.10
No
otes:
1. After adjusting the frontt cover and then buckle
e the front co
over; avoid clamping
c thee communication switch
hing
wirre during insstallation. (F
Fig.9)
2. Correct insttall the back cover and firmly
f buckle
e the front co
over and back cover, othherwise will make the frront
cover drop off.. (Fig. 10)

75 Control Syste
em
 Control System

2.7 Wired controlle

er KJR-9
90A

KJR-90A

Model Des scription

KJR-9
90A-E Ge
eneral contrrol function.
o avoid mode
To e confliction running mo
ode is fixed tto cool
KJR-90A1-E
moode, other fu
unctions aree the same as
a KJR-90A--E.

Wiired controlle
er specificattions

Model
M KJ
JR-90A-E/ KJR-90A1-E
K E
Po
ower Supply
y Voltage DC 5.0 V
Am
mbient Temperature Ra
ange -5°C～++43°C
Am
mbient Hum
midity Range
e RH40%~RH90%

erformance F
Pe Features
1. Operating m
mode: cool, heat,
h dry, fa
an and auto.
2. Set the mod
de through buttons.
b
3. Indoor settin
ng temperatture range: 17°C
1 ~30°C .
4. LCD (Liquid
d Crystal Dissplay).

Control System 76
Control System

2.7
7.1 Appea
arance

(1)) Mode Sele

ection butto
on
Th
he mode is sselected in a sequence as
a the follow
wing figure in
ndicates
AUTO COOL DRY HEAT FAN

(HEAT is invalid for COOL

L ONLY wire
ed controller..)

(2)) ON/OFF b
button
Pre
ess the buttton at the co
ondition of OFF,
O the OPE
ERATION la a the wiredd controller enters into ON
amp lights, and
operation, and
d sends the setting ope
eration inform mer etc.) to the
mation (e.g. mode, temperature, faan speed, tim
units. Press th
he button at the conditio e OPERATION lamp ex
on of ON, the usly enters into
xtinguishes, simultaneou
OF
FF. If having set TIMER ON or TIME ncel these seettings before entering into
ER OFF, the wired contrroller will can
OF e relevant indicator, and then send tthe OFF info
FF, close the ormation.

(3)) Adjust bu
utton ▲
Se
et indoor tem
mperature up nd hold on, it will increase at 1℃ pe
p. If press an er 0.5 seconnd.

(4)) Adjust bu
utton ▼:
Se
et indoor tem
mperature do
own. If press
s and hold o
on, it will dec
crease at 1℃
℃ per 0.5 seecond.

(5)) CLOCK button:

Pre
ess this keyy lasting for 4 seconds, the
t clock wiill flashing at the frequency of 0.5 S
Sec. by using
g and to adjjust
the
e time, 1 minute to be increased/de
i ecreased fo
or every onc
ce press the ▲/▼. Longg pressing the ▲/▼, it will
inc
crease/decre
ease 4 timess/sec and10 me. Release the key whe
0 minutes/tim ng, the time will
en finish thee clock settin
sto
op flashing a
automaticallyy.

77 Control Syste
em
 Control System

(6) Fan speed selection button

Select the fan speed from "AUTO", "LOW", "MED" to "HIGH". Each time press the button, the fan speed will
change in turn as follow. (This button is unavailable in AUTO or DRY mode)
SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED
→ → →

(7) Timer button

Press this button, the Timing will turn on. Set Timing ON time by ▲ and ▼. The clock will increase and
decrease once every 10 minutes; long pressing the keys it will increase/decrease once 10 minutes/0.2
seconds.

(8) Swing button

Press this button for the first time in running time, start the swing function. Press the button for the second time,
cancel the swing function. (Match to some model with swing function).
(9) Cancel button
Press this button to cancel the TIMER settings.

2.7.2 General function

 Low cost and low price, exquisite appearance and LCD display.
 To realize the control common indoor units
The wired controller is designed to suit for indoor units that need wired controller in standard, such as low
pressure duct series. And it also suits for other kind of indoor units.
 Easy Installation
The KJR-90A-E is designed at the base of KJR-10B and it suit for electric cabinet, so it can be installed in
the electric cabinet.
 More functions to choose
The KJR-90A-E has the same functions with KJR-10B. And the KJR-90AI-E cannot select running mode.
There are nine function buttons.

Control System 78
Control System

2.7.3 LCD display

AUTO COOL DRY HEAT FAN

TEMP SET TIME ON
③
TIME OFF
④
② ⑤
SPEED
⑥

(1) Mode display; (2) Temperature display; (3) Time on display; (4) Time display; (5) Time off display; (6) Fan
speed display

2.7.4 Wired controller installation

※ Preparation before Installation:

Make sure the following pasts has been prepared.
NO. Name QTY. Remarks
1 Wired Controller 1 /
2 Cruciform slot screw M4×25 2 This accessory is used when install the
3 Plastic bolt 2 wired controller inside the electric cabinet
4 Installation and owner’s manual 1 /
The connective wires of display For connect between the display panel
5 1
panel (on some models) wire and shield 5-cor cable
※ Prepare for the following at installation site.

NO. Name QTY. Remarks

Universal electric cabinet’s specification
1 Electric cabinet 1
Pre-embed it into the wall.
2 Shielded 5-cores cable 1 Pre-embed RVVP-0.5 mm2×5 into the wall
Pre-embed into the wall; the longest length
3 Wire configured tube(insulated sheath) 1
should not more than 15m.
4 Phillips screwdriver 1 For install cruciform slot screw
For unscrew the bottom cover of the wired
5 Slotted head screwdriver 1
controller

79 Control System
 Control System

※ Simplifiied schema
atic of wired
d controllerr

T
Transmitting tuube

R
RUN
E E
wired controller B B
A A
D D
C C
ND
GN
+5V
Indoor unit siggnal
received paneel
Inddoor unit

※ Installattion diagram
m
Connectivee wires for the display panel (accessory)
(

The shielded 5-core

5 wire
pre-embeddedd into wall. Display panel

I there is no terminal,the 5-core wire shou

If uld be connected directly.

The shielded 5-core

T 5 wire
p
pre-embedded d into wall.

otes:
No
1) Over tighten
n the screw would cause the rear co
overs deform
med and LC
CD damage.
2) When installation, pleasse maintain the screws and wired controller
c at the same heeight level without
w
deformed.
3) When installation, pleasse reserve a certain len
ngth of wired
d controller connectivity
c cable for futture
ma
aintenance tto take off th
he wired con
ntroller.
Control System 80
Control System

※ Dimens
sion: 90*86**13mm

※ Wiring
g diagram fo
or wiring wiired contro ller with airr conditione
er

Indoor unnit The rear side of

ellectric cabinet wired conntroller

Insert of the electric

c
control
A B C D E

Electric control
c of
indoor unnit

10-cored
connective wires
c w Shield
ded 5-core cable
c (See Innstallation
prepa
aration sheett 1 for the sp
pecification.)

Displlay panel Conneective wires

group
p of display panel

81 Control Syste
em
 Control System

2.8 Mode-button hidden

h wired con
ntroller: KJR-86C
K

KJR-86C
Wiired controlle
er specificattions

Model KJR-86
6C-E
Power Su
upply Voltag
ge DC 5.0
0V
Ambient Temperatur
T re Range -5°C～+43°C
Ambient Humidity Ra
ange RH40%~RRH90%
Pe
erformance F
Features
1. Operating m
mode: cool and
a heat.
2. Set the mod
de through combination
c buttons.
3. Indoor settin
ng temperatture range: 17°C
1 ~30°C .
4. LCD (Liquid
d Crystal Dissplay).

2.8
8.1 Appea
arance

JR-86C is a mode-button hidden wirred controlle

KJ er. Designed
d with succin
nct appearannce can be apply for ho
otel,
hospital and school etc.

(1)) ON/OFF button

Press
P the ON
N/OFF button can turn on
o or turn offf air conditio
oner.

(2)) Selecting mode

Wh
hen the unit is turned on
n, press the temperature
e adjusting buttons
b ▲ and
a ▼ simul taneously fo
or 3 secondss
can select the operation mode,
m each press will sw
witch the operation mod
de as the folllowing orderr:
CO
OOL→ HEAT→COOL

Control System 82
Control System

(3) Fan speed button

1) When the unit is turned on, press the FAN SPEED key to set the fan speed of the indoor unit. The fan speed
switching order is:
AUTO→LOW →MID →HIGH→ AUTO
2) Setting the fan speed to AUTO when the indoor unit will actually run at LOW speed.
(4) Setting temperature
When the unit is turned on, press the temperature adjusting buttons ▲ or ▼ button can increase or decrease
the setting temperature, the setting range is 17°C-30°C.

(5) 26℃ setting button

When the unit is turned on, you can press the 26°C shortcut key to quickly set the operation temperature to
26°C.

2.8.2 Installation

[Link] Installation methods

※ Principle diagram of wired controller

Wired Remote
Controller
A A +5V
B B
C C
D D
4-Core Shield Cable, the GND
length is decided by
Indoor Unit display pane
installation
Indoor Unit

※ Installation instruction figure

Attached connecting wires for

the display panel

4-core shielding wire

embedded in the wall

4-core shielding wire

embedded in the wall Display panel

83 Control System
 Control System

No
otes:
1) Over tighten
n the screw would cause the rear co
overs deform
med and LC
CD damage.
2) When installation, pleasse maintain the screws and wired controller
c at the same heeight level without
w
deformed.
3) When installation, pleasse reserve a certain len
ngth of wired
d controller connectivity
c cable for futture
ma
aintenance tto take off th
he wired con
ntroller.

2.8
8.2.2 Wiring
g figure
1) Wiring figurre of the wire
ed controllerr connect wiith the four-w
way cassette
e type indooor unit.
oor unit electrric
Indo P
Plane of indoo
or unit
conttrolling box
Electriic controlling
boxs’ plug CN10

M
Main board
10--core
con
nnecting
wire
e group

Displa
ay panel

4--core shield cable

Back of the wired remote

e Controller
A B C D

2) Wiring figurre of the wire

ed controllerr connect wiith the courty
yard-style duct type indooor unit.

Indoor unit elecctric controlling

g box
Plane
e of indoor unit
Electric controlling
E
b
boxs’ plug CN1 10

Main boarrd
10-core
conneecting
wire group
g
Dissplay panel

4-core shie
eld cable

Back of the
e wired remote controller
A B C D

Control System 84
Control System

3) Wiring figure of the wired controller connect with the high-static pressure duct type indoor unit.

Indoor unit electric controlling box

Electric controlling
boxs’ plug CN10

Main board
Display panel

A BC D

Back of the wired

remote controller

4-core shield cable

4) Wiring figure of the wired controller connect with the wall hanging type indoor unit.
Indoor unit electric controlling box
Plane of indoor unit
Electric controlling
boxs’ plug CN10

Main board 10-core

connecting
wire group

Display panel

4-core shield cable

Back of the wired remote controller

A B C D

5) Wiring figure of the wired controller connect with the stand-hanging type indoor unit.
Indoor unit electric controlling box Plane of indoor unit

Electric controlling
boxs’ plug CN10

Main board

10-core connecting
wire group

Display panel

4-core shield cable

Back of the wired remote controller

A B C D

85 Control System
 Control System

Preparation before Installation:

Make sure the following pasts has been prepared.
NO. Name Qty. Remark
1 Wired controller 1 —
2 Installation & owner’s manual 2 —

3 For installing the wired controller on the

M4×25 Cross head screwdriver 2
electrical box.
4 For installing the wired controller on the
Installation and owner's manual 1
electrical box.
5 For connecting the signal receiving panel
Connective wires to the signal receive panel. 1
with the 4-core shielding wire.

Prepare for the following at installation site.

NO. Name Qty. Remark
1 1 General electrical box size, embedded in the wall in
Electric cabinet
advance.
2 4-core shielding wire 1 PVVR-0.5 mm2x4, embedded in the wall in advance.
3 1 Pre-embedded in to the wall and the length should be
Wiring tube(insulation casing)
less than 15m.
4 Cross head screwdriver 1 For installing the cross head screw.
5 Small cross head screwdriver 1 For taking down the bottom cover of wired controller.

Control System 86
Control System

2.9 Weekly
y schedu
ule wired
d controlller: MD-CCM04

MD-CCM04
4
Wiired controlle
er specificattions
Model
M MD-CCMM04/E
Po
ower Supply
y Voltage DC 5.0 V
Am
mbient Temperature Ra
ange -15°C~ +43°C(-5°F+109°F
F)
Am
mbient Hum
midity Range
e RH40%~RRH90%

Pe
erformance F
Features
1. Operating m
mode: cool, heat,
h dry, fa
an and auto.
2. The weekly schedule wired
w controller.
3. With the delay shutdow
wn function and
a backligh
ht function.
4. Indoor settin
ng temperatture range: 17°C
1 ~30°C .

2.9
9.1 Appea
arance

ON/OFFF
OPERATTION LAMP

DEELAY

DELAY

WEEEKLY TIMER

87 Control Syste
em
 Control System

(1) Mode button

Press this button to select the operation mode; it will change in turn as follows:
COOL→HEAT→FAN→OFF
Notes: For the cooling only model, the heating mode should be skipped.

(2) Fan speed button

Press this button and the operation fan will change in turn as follows:
Auto→Low→Middle→High

(3) Edit button

Press this button and you can setup Weekly time function. (Details refer to SET PLAN_①)

(4) Date button

Press the button can enter the date of calibration, and the calibration display sequence is
year--month--day--week. It will jump to the next set parameters when press the Confirm button every time. The
date setting range is 1 to 31 and it will not checkout if without date here.
If you press Cancel button, it will return to the previous parameter changes.

(5) Weekly Timer button

Press this button can turn off the weekly timer function.

(6) Reset button

When press this button, the system will clear the information of weekly timer and delay function to come into
normal display state and need to set some initial parameters (Details refer to SET PLAN_②).

(7) Lock button

Press this button will enter the button lock and any buttons will not work except LOCK button. Press LOCK
button again can unlock the button lock. Lock mode state cannot be canceled when wired controller after
interruption of power supply.

(8) Cancel button

It is for not saving and retreating, or to cancel the temporary setting.

(9) Query button

Press "Query" button, it will display present indoor temperature value:
1) Press "Cancel" button will return to the main page;
2) Press "Add" or "Reduce" button can select the day which you want to query from the "Sun" to "Sat", press
"Confirm" button will enter the time period. Then press "Add" or "Reduce" to select the period you want to
query from "1" to "4" period. Press the Confirm button will enter the selected parameter query time period. It
can be display mode, fan speed, temperature, and set start and end time of the weekly schedule. Then press

Control System 88
Control System

Confirm button will return to normal display page. Press “Cancel” button will return to the main page or to
select other periods.

(10) Reduce button

It is for reducing to numbers and moving left or up to the other.

(11) Add button

It is used for adding to numbers, and moving right or down to the other.

(12) Confirm button

It is used for confirm selection.

(13)Time button
Press this button, and then press "Add" or "Reduce" button can adjust the hour’s value. Press "Confirm" button
enter the next step to adjust minutes, and then press "Add" or "Reduce" button to adjust the minute’s value,
press the "Confirm" button to save and return to the normal display page.

(14) Delay button

Press this button once, it will display " " and if there is not any operation it will confirm automatically within 3
seconds. It means the unit will override 1 hour.

Double press this button, it will display " " and if there is not any operation it will confirm automatically within
3 seconds. It means the unit will override 2 hours.

Press this button three times, it will display " " and if there is not any operation it will confirm automatically
within 3 seconds. It means to cancel the delay setting. The cycling display as follows: 1h-2h-0h-1h.
When the delay function does not go into effect, the delay time can be changed through the setting. But if the
function has gone into effect, any operation for the delay button is not effective and the delay button is only for
querying the delay time you set.
Notes: If the weekly schedule timer function is turn off, delay button is ineffective.

(15) ON/OFF button

If the A/C was turned off, press this button, the wire controller enters into ON operation simultaneously and
sends the information of operation mode, fan speed, temperature etc. to the unit.
If the A/C was turned off, press this button will turn off the A/C and the OPERATION lamp extinguishes
simultaneously. If having set DELAY, the wired controller will cancel this setting before entering into OFF,
close the concern indicator, and then send the OFF information.

89 Control System
 Control System

2.9.2 Description of LCD screen

① Operation mode indication

When press "MODE" button, the following mode can be selected in circle as following: Cool→Heat→Fan→Off.
For cooling only model, heat mode should be skipped.
② Fan speed indication
There are four fan speeds: auto, low, middle, high. For some air conditioners no middle fan, then the middle
fan is seen as high speed.
③ Fault indication
When the unit malfunctions, it will display the "Error" icon.
④ Temperature or error code indication.
It will display the setting temperature under the normal operation. When the unit malfunctions, it will display the
fault code.
⑤Weekly Schedule Controller switch indication.
⑥Date indication.
⑦Time indication.
⑧Period indication.
⑨Lock indication.
⑩Week indication.

2.9.3 Using methods

1) Time setting
Under the normal display page

TIME

ADD or REDUCE setting hour

CONFIRM ADD or REDUCE

setting minute

CONFIRM

setting done

Control System 90
Control System

Notes: During operating, press the "CANCEL" button will return to the previous step or the normal display
page.
2) Date setting
Under the normal display page

DATE

ADD or REDUCE setting year

CONFIRM

ADD or REDUCE setting month

CONFIRM

ADD or REDUCE setting date

CONFIRM

ADD or REDUCE setting week

CONFIRM setting done

3) Query operation
Under the normal display page

QUERY

ADD or REDUCE select week

CONFIRM

ADD or REDUCE select period

CONFIRM display various parameters

of the selected period

CONFIRM back to the normal

CANCEL
display page

Notes: During operating, press "CANCEL" button can return to the previous step or the normal display page.

91 Control System
 Control System

4) Setting plan
① ②
Under the normal display page RESET

CONFIRM ADD
EDIT
select °C or °F

ADD or REDUCE select week

CONFIRM

select the start

* ADD or REDUCE hour of the first

period

CONFIRM

select the start

ADD or REDUCE minute of the first
period

CONFIRM

select the end

ADD or REDUCE hour of the first
period

CONFIRM

select the end

ADD or REDUCE minute of the first
period

CONFIRM

CONFIRM Setting of the first period is done

Long press the button

"CONFIRM" button will return to
the "select week" page directly

* ADD or REDUCE

Set various parameters of the next period from the place " * ", until the setting of parameters of all the four
period is done, turn back to the "select week" interface, as this time, you can also press the key "CANCEL"
back to the normal display page.
Notes: During operating, press "CANCEL" button will return to the previous step or the normal display page.

Control System 92
Control System

5) How to change the Centigrade " " to the Fahrenheit " ", or Fahrenheit " " chance to
Centigrade " "?
There are two methods:
(1) Method 1:

ADD CONFIRM
Reset
select °C or °F

Notes: Pressing the "RESET" button will clear the information of weekly timer.
(2) Method 2:

EDIT + QUERY

Always press select °C or °F

The example of DELAY:

The plan setting as follows:
Period
Period 1 Period 2 Period 3 Period 4
Time
Start time 09:00 14:30 19:00 00:00
End time 13:30 17:30 21:30 00:00
If you want to turn off the unit delay 1 or 2 hours after period 1, then just press "Delay" button once during
09:00 to 11:30. But if you set the delay time (1 or 2 hours) out of the period you set (like during 11:31 to 14:30),
the unit will override 1/2 hour at once.
Notes: When finishing the function, the unit will operate following the plan you set.

6) How to set mode/fan/temperature under the OFF state?

Firstly, press the Mode button to enter the setting. Then it will display the mode/ fan/temperature before OFF.
At this time, you could set the mode/ fan/ temperature you want. And When you finish the setting, press the
Confirm button to send. The air conditioner will start with the information you set.

7) What is the temporary setting?

① Weekly timer is operating:
When the unit operated with the weekly timer, any operations of mode/ fan speed/temperature are called
temporary setting.
When wired controller displays currently icon, temporary setting has been effective.
Under the main interface, pressing "cancel" button will cancel the temporary setting. "Currently" icon will
disappear and the mode/ fan speed/ temperature parameters of temporary setting will be saved. Then the unit
operated with the weekly timer.
② Weekly timer is off Temporary setting is always effective.

93 Control System
 Control System

8) Malfunction & protection codes

Codes Description
E0 Phases sequence error malfunction
E1 Communication malfunction
E2 T1 Sensor malfunction
E3 T2A Sensor malfunction
E4 T2B Sensor malfunction
E5 Outdoor unit malfunction
E6 Zero-crossing detection error
E7 EEPROM error
E8 Air speed detection out of control
EA Compressor overcurrent（4 times）
ED Outdoor malfunction protection
EE Water level detection malfunction
EF Other malfunctions
F1 Temperature sensor malfunction of Weekly schedule
wired controller
P0 Evaporator temperature protection
P1 Anti-cool air or defrost protection
P2 Condensate high temperature protection
P3 Compressor temperature protection
P4 Discharge pipe temperature protection
P5 Discharge high pressure protection
P6 Discharge low pressure protection
P7 Power supply over-under voltage protection
P8 Compressor overcurrent
PF Other protection

Notes:
When the unit appears error, the corresponding error code will be displayed with the flashing OPERATION
LAMP.

Control System 94
Control System

2.9.4 Installation methods

1) Safety precaution
Stated below are important safety issues that must be obeyed. Confirm there is no abnormal phenomena
during test operation after complete.
Installation by other persons may lead to imperfect installation, electric shock or fire. Improper installation
may lead to electric shock or fire. A random disassembly may cause abnormal operation or heating, which
may result in fire.
Do not install the controller in a place vulnerable to leakage of flammable gases. Once flammable gases
are leaked and left around the wired controller, fire may occur.
The wiring should adapt to the wired controller current. Otherwise, electric leakage or heating may occur
and result in fire. The specified cables shall be applied in the wiring. No external force may be applied to
the terminal. Otherwise, wire cut and heating may occur and result in fire.
Don’t place the wired controller near the lamps, to avoid the remote signal of the controller to be disturbed.
Do not install the unit and controller in a place with much oil, steam, sulfide gas. Otherwise, the product
may deform and fail.

Preparation before Installation:

Make sure the following pasts has been prepared.
NO. Name QTY. Remarks
1 Wired Controller 1 /
2 Wood mounting screw 3 M4×20(For mounting on the wall)
3 mounting screw 3 M4×25(For mounting on the electrical switch box)
4 Installation manual 1 /
5 Owner's manual 1 /
6 5-terminal Group - /

Prepare for the following at installation site.

No. Name QTY. Type Remarks
1 3-core shielded cable 1 RVVP-0.5mm2x3 The factory scheme wire is 10m, and the longest
2
2 2-core shielded cable 1 RVVP-0.5mm x2 length should be less than 20m.

2) Dimension: 120*120*15mm
44
18
120
46
17

49
60
120

95 Control System
 Control System

3) Wiring of MD-CCM04
When a weekly schedule controller is needed, a small 2-cores wire and 3-cores wire should be added.
Connect like the following figure.
Weekly Schedule
Controller 2-cores wire

Yellow +5V To display board +5V

Brown GND GND INDOOR UNIT
Black E E
To main board
Red Y Y
White X X

3-cores wire

Wired Controller Turn a screwdriver at the concave on bottom panel

Back Cover of the Wired Controller to remove the Back Cover

Wired Controller
Top Cover
Wired Controller LCD Holes match with the
86X86 Wiring box

Wired Controller
Board

Wired Controller
Bottom Cover Back of the rear conver

Wood Mounting When installing the Wired Controller

Screw (M4X20) Cover,be sure there is a hole in the wall
to avoid the Wired Controller Back Cover
When installing the Wired Controlle r, you should being fixed directly to the wall which is
adjust the bottom of the Wired Controller Board to not allowed for the Wire Joint extrudes
the Wired Controller Back Cover which should be out of the Wired Controller Back Cover
fixed first, then press the other end of the Wired
Controller Board.

Notes:
The connecting wire should be a little longer as to take away the switch board easily for maintenance.
The connecting wire should be a little longer as to take away the controller easily for maintenance.

Control System 96
Control System

4) Wiring Diagram
A. Main board with External Network Module:

INDOOR UNIT
INDOOR MAIN BOARD
NETWORK MODULE
X Y E

WHITE BLACK
RED

DISPLAY BOARD
2-cores wire

3-cores wire

BROWN
YELLOW

WHITE
BLACK

RED
(GND)

WEEKLY SCHEDULE CONTROLLER

B. Main Board Integrated Network Module:

INDOOR UNIT
XYE
INDOOR MAIN BOARD

X Y (E) INDOOR UNIT CONNECTOR

WHITE BLACK
RED

DISPLAY BOARD
2-cores wire

3-cores wire
BROWN
YELLOW

WHITE
BLACK

RED

(GND)

WEEKLY SCHEDULE CONTROLLER

97 Control System
 Control System

2.10 Week
kly sched
dule wire
ed contro
oller: KJR-120C

K
KJR-120C
C
Wiired controlle
er specificattions

Model
M KJR-120
0C/BW-E
Pow
wer Supply Voltage
V 12V
V DC
Am
mbient Tempeerature Ran
nge -5°C～+43°C
- C(23~110℉ )
Am
mbient Humid
dity Range RH40%~~RH90%
Pe
erformance F
Features
1. Operating m
mode: cool, heat,
h dry, fa
an and auto mode.
2. The weekly schedule wired
w controller.
3. With the delay shutdow
wn function, auto
a restart and backlig
ght function.
4. Indoor settin
ng temperatture range: 17°C
1 ~30°C .
5. Can switch Fahrenheit degree and Centigrade
e degree.
6. Button lock

2.1
10.1 Parts
s name

 Buttons iintroduction
1
POWER

3
2 4
MODE FAN SPEED
5 6
8 7
TIMER SWING SWING FOL LOW ME

9 12
DEL AY/DAY OFF ONFIRM
CO BACK COPY

10 11

Control System 98
Control System

1. Power button 7. Follow me button (reserved)

2. Mode button 8. Timer button
3. Adjust button 9. Delay/day off button
4. Fan speed button 10. Confirm button
5. Up-down swing button (reserved) [Link] button
6. left-right swing button [Link] button

 LCD display
1 2 3 4 5 6

10

11

13 12

1. Operation mode indication 8. Temperature display

2. Fan speed indication 9. Lock indication
3. Left-right swing indication (reserved) 10. Room temperature indication (reserved)
4. Up-down swing indication 11. Clock display
5. Faceplate function indication (reserved) 12. Timer on/off
6. Follow me function indication (reserved) 13. Weekly display
7. C° / F° indication

2.10.2 Operation introduction

 Start/stop operation
Short press the POWER button
Press the POWER button.
POWER
Operation lamp
Air conditioner ON : lights up
Air conditioner OFF: lights off

 Mode button
Press mode button can set the operation mode and the heat function is invalid for cool only type unit.
The mode is selected in a sequence as the following figure indicates:

99 Control System
 Control System

MODE

Notes:
1. When selecting the "Auto" or "Dry" mode, the fan speed is fixed and the fan speed button doesn't work and
the setting temperature is adjustable.
2. When selecting "Cool" or "Heat" mode, the fan speed and temperature can be adjustable.
3. When selecting "Fan" mode, the temperature display area doesn't display the set temperature.

 Temperature adjust button

Press "-" or "+" button can decrease or increase the set temperature and the temperature setting range is 17
~ 30℃(62~86℉/62~88℉).

 Fan speed setting

Press the FAN SPEED button can set the fan speed and the button is unavailable under the Auto or Dry mode.
The fan speed is selected in a sequence as the following figure indicates: auto →low → middle → high →auto

FAN SPEED

 Keyboard lock function

Press the adjust button "-" and "+" simultaneously for 3 seconds can lock the keyboard and the other buttons

are invalid. The lock icon will display. When press the adjust button "-" and "+" simultaneously again for 3
seconds can unlock the keyboard and the lock icon will disappear.

 Left-right airflow direction and swing (for some models)

SWING SWING

Press the button can turn on left-right swing, press it again will stop. When the left-right swing function is

activated, the icon will appear.

 Button tone setting

Press "BACK" and "COPY" buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds can open or close the button tone.

BACK COPY

 ℉ & ℃ scale selection (on some models)

Press and buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds can switch the temperature display between
Fahrenheit degree (℉)and Centigrade degree (℃).

Control System 100

Control System

SWING SWING

 left-right airflow direction and swing (on some models)

Press the button to turn on up-down swing, press it again will stop.

When the left-right swing function is activated, the mark appears.

SWING SWING

 Timer function
Weekly timer : Use this timer function to set operating times for each day of the week.

: Use timer function to start air conditioner operation. The timer operates and air conditioner operation
starts after the time has passed.

: Use this timer function to stop air conditioner operation. The timer operates and air conditioner
operation stops after the time has passed.
: Use this timer function to start and stop air conditioner operation. The timer operates and air
conditioner operation starts and stops after the time has passed.

1) Timer on and timer off

Press the TIMER button to select the icon, and then press the CONFIRM button and the clock icon
display is fishing. Press "+" or "-" button to set the timer on, and then press the CONFIRM button to confirm the
setting. Press the button "+" or " - " to set the timer off, and press the CONFIRM button to finish the settings.

TIMER
CONFIRM

CONFIRM CONFIRM

2) Timer on or Timer off

Press the TIMER button to select the timer icon or can set timer on or timer off function.

No display

Press the CONFIRM button and the Clock display is flashing.

Press "+" or "-" button to set the time. After setting the time, the timer will start or stop automatically.

[Link] timer set at PM 6:00

Press the CONFIRM button again will finish the settings.

 Weekly timer setting

1) Press the TIMER button to select the icon and then press the CONFIRM button.

101 Control System

 Control System

TIMER CONFIRM

2) Press "+" or " - " button to select the day of the week, and the LCD will display the days of the effective
period of time. If a digital can display, it means that the period of time effective. After setting and press the
CONFIRM button again will enter the daily period setting.

CONFIRM

3) Press "+" or "- " button to set the time of weekly timer on and then press the CONFIRM button.

CONFIRM

[Link] time scale 1

Up to 4 periods timer settings can be saved for each day of the [Link] is
conventent if the WEEKLY TIMER is set according to the user’s life style.

Notes: It can set up to 4 periods schedule per day and each period can be set up two timers: timer on and
timer off.
4) After setting the time of weekly timer on, press the CONFIRM button to confirm the time, it will enter the time
of weekly timer off.
Press "+" or "-" button to set the time of weekly timer off, and then press the CONFIRM button.

CONFIRM

[Link] time scale 1

5) Different timer settings can be set by repeating step 3 to 4.

6) Other days in one week can be set by repeating step 2 to 5.
Notes:
The weekly timer setting can be returned to the previous step by pressing BACK button.
The time of timer setting can be deleted by pressing DAY OFF button
The current setting will be restored and withdrawn the weekly timer setting automatically when there is not
operation for 30 seconds.

 Weekly timer operation

To activate WEEKLY TIMER operation
Press the TIMER button when the icon is displayed on the LCD.

Control System 102

Control System

TIMER

ex.

To deactivate WEEKLY TIMER operation

Under the running state, if short press the POWER button, the air conditioner will turn off temporarily. And the
air conditioner will turn on automatically until the time of the weekly timer on.
ON OFF ON OFF

8:00 10:00 12:00 14:00 17:00

E.g. Under the running mode and weekly timer state, if short press the POWER button at 10:00; it will turn off
the air conditioner and turn on the air conditioner again at 14:00.
When long press the POWER button for 2 seconds, it will turn off the air conditioner and clear weekly timer
parameter settings.
To set the DAY OFF (for a holiday)

1. During the weekly timer, press the CONFIRM button. CONFIRM

2. Press "+" or "- " button to select the day in this week.
3. Press the DAY OFF button to set the DAY OFF.

The ma rk is hidden

DELAY/DAY OFF

[Link] DAY OFF is set for Wednesday

4. The DAY OFF can be set for other days by repeating the steps 2 and 3.

5. Press the BACK button to back to the weekly timer. BACK

6. To cancel: follow the same procedures as those for setup

Notes: The DAY OFF setting is cancelled automatically after the set day has passed.

 DELAY function
During the weekly timer, pressing the DELAY button, it will display " "
Press this button twice, it will display " " and wait 3 seconds to confirm. It means the unit will override 1 hour.
Press this button three times, display " " and wait 3 seconds to confirm, it means the unit will override 2h.

For example, if press the "Delay" button to select "2h" at 18:05, then it will turn off the air conditioner at 20:05.

103 Control System

 Control System

 Copy out the setting in one day into the other day
Under the weekly timer setting, a reservation made once can be copied to another day of the week.
The whole reservation of the selected day of the week will be copied. The effective use of the copy mode
ensures ease of making reservations.
1) During the weekly timer, press the CONFIRM button.
2) Press "+" or "-" button to select the day to copy from.
3) Press the COPY button and the letter "CY" will display on the LCD.
4) Press "+" or "-" button to select the day and copy it.
5) Press COPY button to confirm.

COPY

The mark flashes quickly

ex. Copy the setting of Monday to Wednesday

6) Other days can be copied by repeating step 4 and 5.
7) Press CONFIRM button to confirm the settings.
8) Press Back button will return to the weekly timer.

 Preparatory operation
Set the current day and time
 Press the TIMER button for 3 seconds or more. The timer display will flash.
 Press "+" or "-" button to set the date. The selected date will flash.

 The date setting is complete and the time setting is prepared after pressing TIMER button or no button is
pressed for 10 seconds.
 Press"+" or "-" button to set the current time.
Press repeatedly to adjust the current time in 1-minute increments.
Press and hold in adjust the current time continuous.

[Link] AM 11:20
 After setting and pressing TIMER button or no button is pressed in 10 seconds will exit the settings.

Control System 104

Control System

 Fault codes
If the system does not properly operate except the above mentioned cases or the above mentioned
malfunctions are evident, investigate the system according to the following procedures.
Code Error description
F0 Communication malfunctions between wired controller and indoor unit.
E1 Communication malfunctions between indoor and outdoor unit.
E2 T1 sensor malfunction
E3 T2 sensor malfunction.
E4 T2B sensor malfunction.
E7 Indoor unit EEPROM malfunction.
Ed Outdoor unit malfunction.
EE Water level switch detection malfunction.

2.10.3 Installation introduction

1) Safety precaution
Don't install at the place where cover with heavy oil, vapor or sulfureted gas, otherwise, this product would be
deformed that would lead to system malfunction.
Preparation before Installation:
Make sure the following pasts has been prepared.
NO. Name QTY. Remarks
1 Wired Controller 1 /
2 Lithium battery 1 /
3 Cruciform slot screw M4×25 2 This accessory is used when install the wired
4 Plastic bolt 2 controller inside the electric cabinet
5 Installation and owner’s manual 1 /
The connective wires group(on
6 1 /
some models)

Prepare for the following at installation site.

No. Name QTY. Type Remarks
Universal electric cabinet’s specification.
1 Electric cabinet 1 RVVP-0.5mm2x3
Pre-embed it into wall.
Wire configured tube Pre-embed into the wall and the longest
2 1 RVVP-0.5mm2x2
(insulated sheath) length should not exceeding than15m.
3 Phillips screwdriver 1 / For install Cruciform slot screw.
For unscrew the bottom cover of wired
4 Slotted head screwdriver 1 /
controller.

105 Control System

 Control System

Precaution of install the wire controller

1. The manual provides the installation method of wired controller. Please refer to the wiring diagram of the
wired controller with indoor unit.
2. The wired controller is working in a low voltage loop circuit. Forbid to directly contact the cable of 220V
commercial electricity or of 380V high voltage, and don’t wire this kind of wire in the said loop; wiring clearance
between configured tubes should at the range of 300~500 or above.
3. The shielded wire of the wire controller must be grounded reliable.
4. Upon finishing connection, do not employed tramegger to detect the insulation.
5. The connective cable of wired controller should not be longer than 20 meters.

2) Installation methods
Connect wired controller to main control board of indoor unit through 4-core shield cable and 3-terminal
short wires in accessories.

4-core shield cable (accessory) Main board

3-terminal short wires (accessory)

There are 2 types of short wires in 3-terminal, please install according to actual model. For indoor units of
duct type, four-way cassette type, two-way cassette type, one-way cassette type and ceiling and floor type,
employ the short wire as following:

Connect to CN12 port

of main board.
Main board of indoor unit
CN9

CN12

Connect to CN9 port

Connect to wired controller. of main board.
Type 1 of 3-terminal short wire.

Control System 106

Control System

For indoor units of wall mounted type employs the short wire as following:
Connect to CN13
of main board.
Main board of indoor unit
Connect to wired controller.

CN13

Connect to CN17 CN17

of main board.
Type 2 of 3-terminal short wire.

Take off the cover of wired controller at the bottom with the screwdriver.

Put the battery into the installation site and make sure the positive side of the battery is in accordance with
the positive side of installation site.

Adjust the length of two plastic bolts base on the length of throughout from standard electric cabinet to the
wall. Confirm the two bolts fixing in the cabinet are in the same length and vertical to the wall surface.

107 Control System

 Control System

Fix the bottom cover to the electric cabinet by the accessory slotted head screws. Confirm the bottom
cover is parallel to the wall surface. And then reinstall the bottom cover to centralized controller.

Notes:
Over tighten the screw would cause rear cover deformed and LCD damage.
When installation, please maintain the screws and wired controller at the same height level without deformed.
When installation, please reserve a certain length of wired controller connective cable for future maintenance
to take off the wired controller.

3) Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram of wired controller connects with indoor unit.

Indoor unit
electric cabinet

Main board
Shielded 4-core cable

The rear side of

wired controller

Control System 108

Control System

2.11 HRV w
wired co
ontroller: KJR-27B
B

KJR-27B

KJ
JR-27B is ind
dividually de
esigned for HRV—Heat
H Recovery Ventilator.
V
Wiired controlle
er specificattions

Model
M KJR-27B/BGE(A)
Po
ower Supply
y Voltage 5.0 V DC
Am
mbient Temperature Ra
ange -15°C～+ +43°C
Am
mbient Hum
midity Range
e RH40%~R RH90%
Pe
erformance F
Features
1. Operating m
mode: exhau
ust, air supply, bypass, h
heat exchan
nge and auto
o.
2. Set the mod
de through buttons.
b
3. Indoor settin
ng temperatture range: 17°C
1 ~30°C .
4. LCD (Liquid
d Crystal Dissplay).

109
9 Control Systtem
 Control System

2.11.1 Parts name

1 8

2 9
TIME ON CLOCK

3 M
TIME OFF OK MODE FAN SPEED 10
4

5 RESE LOCK

11

(1) Mode selection button

It is used to select mode, press this button one time, then the operation modes will change in turn as follows:
AUTO→HEAT RECOVERY→EXHAUST→BYPASS→SUPPLY

(2) Timer on button

Press this button can set TIMER ON, each time press this button, the time moves forward by o.5 hours. When
the set time is over 10 hours, each time press the button to the time moves forward by 1 hour. If want to cancel
the TIMER ON, then adjust the time of TIMER ON as 0.0.

(3) Timer off button

Press this button can set TIMER OFF, each time press the button, the time moves forward by o.5 hours. When
the set time is over 10 hours, each time you push the button the time moves forward by 1 hour. If want to
cancel the TIMER OFF, then adjust the time of TIMER OFF as 0.0.

(4) CLOCK button

Normally display the clock set currently (display 12:00 for the first electrifying or resetting). When press the
button for 4 seconds, the hour part on the clock display flashes every 0.5 seconds, then press button ▲ and
▼ button to adjust hour; Press the button CLOCK again, the minute part flashes every 0.5 seconds, then
press ▲ and ▼ button to adjust minute. When set clock or alter clock setting, must press the confirm button
to complete the setting.

(5) Confirm button

The button is used at the state of CLOCK adjustment. After select the time, push the button to confirm then exit,
the current clock will display

Control System 110

Control System

(6) RESET button (hidden)

Use a small stick with a diameter of 1mm to press the RESET button will cancel the current settings and get
into the condition of resetting.

(7) ON/OFF button

Press this button at the condition of OFF, the OPERATION lamp lights, and the wired controller enters into ON
operation, simultaneously sends the information of operation mode set currently, temperature, fan speed, timer
etc. Press the button at the condition of ON, the OPERATION lamp extinguishes simultaneously sends the
OFF. If having set TIMER ON or TIMER OFF, the wired controller will cancel these settings before entering into
OFF, close the concern indicator, and then send the OFF information.

(8) Fan speed selection button

Can select anyone fan speed from " ", "LOW", "MED" and "HIGH". Each time press the button, the fan speed
will change in turn as follow.

(9) Adjustment button

The button only for time adjustment, and press the ▲ button, time increases.

(10) Adjustment button

The button only for time adjustment, press the ▼ button, time decreases.

(11) LOCK button (hidden)

Use a small stick with the diameter of 1mm to press the LOCK button can lock the current setting, press the
button again then cancel the setting.

2.11.2 Using the wired controller

(1) Automatic operation

Insert the power supply, operation lamp of HRV flashes.
1. Press MODE to select AUTO
2. Press ON/OFF button, the operation lamp of HRV unit lights, the HRV start operating at the auto mode, the
fan speed is controlled automatically, wired controller display screen display "AUTO" the fan speed is
un-adjustable. Press the button ON/OFF again, and then the HRV stops operating.

(2) The operation of heat recovery/bypass/supply

1. Press the MODE button to select any one of "HEAT RECOVERY", "BYPASS", or "SUPPLY" mode.

2. Press the button FAN SPEED to select any one of " ", "LOW", "MED" or "HIGH" fan speed modes.
3. Press the button ON/OFF, the operation lamp on HRV lights, the HRV operates according to the mode
selected. Press the button ON/OFF again, stop the HRV.

111 Control System

 Control System

(3) Exhaust operation

1. Press MODE to select EXHAUST mode.
2. Press the ON/OFF button, the operation lamp of indoor unit lights, and the air conditioner will start to
EXHAUST mode. Press the button ON/OFF again, stop the unit.
3. The button FAN SPEED is invalid in the mode EXHAUST.

(4)Timer setting
TIMER ON button can set the starting time. TIMER OFF button can set the stopping time.

(5)Only setting timer on

1. Press TIMER ON button, the wired controller displays SETTING, the icons of HOUR and ON display on the
timer setting area. The wired controller enters into the setting of the timer on.
2. Press the TIMER ON button again, and then adjust the time of the timer on as you desired.
3. Continuously press adjusts up button. The time of the timer will increase 0.5 hours per time. After the time of
timer reaches to 10 hours, the time will increase 1hour each time.
4. 0.5 seconds later, after finishing the adjustment, the wired conditioner sends the information of time on, the
timer on the setting is completed.

(6) Only setting timer off

1. Press the TIMER OFF button, the wired controller display SETTING, the icons of HOUR and OFF display on
the timer setting area. The wired controller enters into the setting of the timer off.
2. Press the TIMER OFF button again, and then adjust the time of time off as you desired.
3. Continuously presses adjust up button. The time of the timer will increase 0.5 hours per time. After the time
of timer reaches to 10 hours, the time will increase 1hour each time.
4. 0.5 seconds later, after finishing the adjustment, the wired conditioner sends the information of time off. The
timer off setting is completed.

(7) Setting time on and time off simultaneously

1. Refer to step 1 and step 2 of TIMER ON to set the TIMER ON.
2. Refer to step 1 and step 2 of TIMER OFF to set the TIMER OFF.
3. When set the TIMER ON and TIMER OFF simultaneously, if the set times of TIMER ON and TIMER OFF
are all over 10 hours, then TIMER OFF is always later 1 hour than TIMER ON.
4. 0.5 seconds later, after finishing the adjustment, the wired conditioner sends the information of time on/off,
the timer off and timer on setting are completed.
Alter the timer, to alter the time of TIMER ON of 1. Refer to step 1 and step 2 of TIMER ON to set the TIMER
ON.
Remark:
Time of TIMER ON is the relative time; it is relative to standard time of operating wired controller. If having
setting the TIMER ON or TIMER OFF, then the clock cannot be adjusted.

Control System 112

Control System

2.11.3 Installation

1) Safety precaution
Stated below are important safety issues that must be obeyed. Confirm there is no abnormal phenomena
during test operation after complete.
Installation by other persons may lead to imperfect installation, electric shock or fire. Improper installation
may lead to electric shock or fire. A random disassembly may cause abnormal operation or heating, which
may result in fire.
Do not install the controller in a place vulnerable to leakage of flammable gases. Once flammable gases
are leaked and left around the wired controller, fire may occur.
The wiring should adapt to the wired controller current. Otherwise, electric leakage or heating may occur
and result in fire. The specified cables shall be applied in the wiring. No external force may be applied to
the terminal. Otherwise, wire cut and heating may occur and result in fire.
Don’t place the wired controller near the lamps, to avoid the remote signal of the controller to be disturbed.
Do not install the unit and controller in a place with much oil, steam, sulfide gas. Otherwise, the product
may deform and fail.
2) Dimensions: 120*120*15mm
44
18
120
46
17

49
60
120

113 Control System

 Control System

3) Wiring principle sketch

HRV El ectri c
C ontrol l i ng Box Si gnal
R ecei vi ng
Board
El ectri c C ontrol l i ng
Boxs’ Pl u g C N 10 10-cor e
Mai n Board C onnecti n g
Wi re Grou p

Wi re Termi na l 5-core Connecting

Grou p Grou p

Si gnal A B C D E
R ecei vi n g
Boar d 5-cor e Shi eld
Groundi n g
C able
Back of w i re
control l e r
C onnecti n g
to w i re control l e r
Wire Terminal Grou p
C onnecti n g Extende d
Fi gure

4) Wiring principle
Wired Controller Turn a screwdriver at the concave on bottom panel
Back Cover of the Wired Controller to remove the Back Cover

Wired Controller
Top Cover
Wired Controller LCD Holes match with the
86X86 Wiring box

Wired Controller
Board

Wired Controller
Bottom Cover Back of the rear conver

Wood Mounting When installing the Wired Controller

Screw (M4X20) Cover,be sure there is a hole in the wall
to avoid the Wired Controller Back Cover
When installing the Wired Controlle r, you should being fixed directly to the wall which is
adjust the bottom of the Wired Controller Board to not allowed for the Wire Joint extrudes
the Wired Controller Back Cover which should be out of the Wired Controller Back Cover
fixed first, then press the other end of the Wired
Controller Board.

Control System 114

Control System

3.. Centralized controller

MD-CCM03 (A) MD-CCM09 (A))

CCM30
0 KJR-90B
K

3.1 MD-CC
CM03

MD
D-CCM03 iss a multifuncctional device
e which is a ble to contro
ol up to 64 in
ndoor units. And the con
nnection length
can be up to 1200m. The following wiring mode ccentralized controller
c and indoor uniits are applic
cable.

3.1
1.1 General function descripttion

1) Power on o
or reset
Wh
hen the cen
ntralized con
ntroller is po or reset, all display segments of thhe LCD are luminous fo
owered on o or 2
ond later, th e system enters
seconds and then goes off. 1 seco e the normal
n displlay state. The
T centralizzed
controller is in
n the main page display state an
nd displays the first pa
age, and seearches the
e in-service air
conditioners in
n the network. If the sea hed, the cen
arch is finish ntralized controller enteers the mode
e setting pa
age,
and sets the first in-servicce air conditioner by defa
ault.

2) Network arrea address

s of centraliized contro
oller
Th
he local com
mputer or gatteway can be
b up to con
nnect with 16
6 centralized
d controllerss for commu
unication. Ea
ach
centralized co
ontroller serrves as an area of th work. The ccentralized controllers are
he air conditioner netw
diff
fferentiated b
by bit selecttion address
s. The config
gurable rang
ge is 0~15.
115
5 Control Systtem
 Control System

3) State indications
If any local keypad operation is setting the operation state of the air conditioner, the indicator is on when the
signals are sent. Upon completion of the setting process, the indicator goes off. If an in-service air conditioner
in the network is faulty, or the centralized controller network itself is faulty, the indicator will blink at 2Hz.
If one or more in-service air conditioners in the network are running, including under setting of timing
start/shutdown, the indicator will be luminous. Otherwise, the indicator is off.

4) Locking of centralized controller

After receiving the centralized controller locking command sent from the computer, the centralized controller
disables the startup/shutdown and setting of the air conditioner, and sends commands to lock remote
controllers of all air conditioners in the network of the centralized controller. After receiving the unlocking
command, the centralized controller enables the startup/shutdown operation, and sends commands to unlock
the remote controller of all air conditioners.
The locking state of the remote controller can be locked or unlocked by the computer or centralized controller
separately. The locking state of the centralized controller is memorized after power failure of the centralized
controller, and will not vanish after the power supply is restored, unless the command of unlocking is received.

5) Mode locking function

After the mode locking command is received, the command is forwarded to the air conditioner, and the
centralized controller displays the mode locking flag. After the command of unlocking is received, the
non-conflict mode can be selected freely. The centralized controller can also lock modes of all indoor units.

6) Emergent shutdown and compulsory startup

When the emergent shutdown switch of the centralized controller is shorted, all air conditioners in the network
of the centralized controller will shut down compulsorily. The centralized controller and computer and all
functional modules are disabled from startup and shutdown until the foregoing switch is open. When the
compulsory startup switch of the centralized controller is shorted, all air conditioners in the network of the
centralized controller will start up compulsorily. In default conditions, they will run in the cooling mode. The
startup and shut down operations of the centralized controller and the computer and all functional modules will
be disabled (only the command of startup is sent to the air conditioner, without affecting operation of the
remote controller after startup) until the foregoing switch is opened.
If the foregoing two switches are shorted in the same time, the emergent shutdown switch shall have
preference.

Control System 116

Control System

3.1
1.2 Button
ns and Functions

1) Query buttton
An
ny time when
n you press the button, the selected
d operation mode
m is to query
q the opperation state of the air
conditioner. Byy default, the
e first in-serrvice air cond
ditioner will be queried. Through thee Increase and
a Decreasse
keys, you can change the parameter page to be q
queried; thro p, Down, Lefft and Right keys, you can
ough the Up
change to que
ery state of other
o in-serv
vice air cond
ditioners.

2) Set button
In other displa
ay mode, pre
ess the butto
on can enterr the setting mode. By default,
d it is ssingle setting, and the fiirst
in--service air cconditioner is displayed.. In setting o
operation mo
ode, press th e operation will
he button aggain, and the
be performed for all air co
onditioners in
n the networrk. Press the n single setting
e button repeatedly to s hift between
and global settting.
→ Single → Global →

3) Mode settin
ng
In setting operration mode, press this button to se
et the operattion
→cooling → he
eating → supp
ply air only → off →

In other displa
ay mode, pre
ess the key can enter t he setting mode.
m By de
efault, it is siingle-machin
ne setting, and
a
the ditioner is displayed.
e first in-servvice air cond

117
7 Control Systtem
 Control System

4) Fan speed
In setting operation mode
e, press this
s button can
n set the fan
n of the indo
oor unit to rrun in the automatic, high,
me
edium or low
w level of airr:

5) Time on
In setting operration mode, press this button
b can sset the timing startup of air conditionner; press th
he button ag
gain
willl exit the tim
ming setting, and restore
e the normall temperaturre regulation
n operation m
mode.
→ time on → set tempera
ature regulatio
on →

6) Time off
In setting operation mode
e, press this
s button can
n set the tim
ming shutdow
wn of air connditioner; prress the buttton
again will exit the timing setting, and restore
r the n
normal temp
perature regulation operration mode.
→ time off → set temperatu
ure regulation
n →

7) Swing
In setting operration mode, press this button to en
nable or disa
able the swing function. If all curren
ntly selected air
conditioners w
without swing n effect will result after pressing the
g function, no e button.

8) Leftward button
In the query mode, everry time whe on, the operation statee data of th
en you presss the butto he previous air
conditioner will be displayyed. If it is currently on tthe first mac s the button again, and the data of the
chine, press
las
st machine w
will be displa t address will decreasse one by on
ayed. If you hold down tthis button, the ne.
In the setting m mode, the airr conditioner of
mode, everyy time when you press tthe key, if it is in single operation m
the
e previous in
n-service address numb elected. If it is in the glob
ber will be se bal operationn mode, no effect
e will ressult
aftter the button is pressed
d.
In the main pa
age, press th
he button to enter the qu
uery mode. By default, it is the first air condition
ner in-servicce.

9) Rightward button
In the query m
mode, every time
t when you
y press the
e button, the
e operation state
s data off the last air conditioner will
be displayed. If it is curre
ently on the last machin
ne, press the
e button, and the data oof the first machine
m will be
dis
splayed. If yo
ou hold dow
wn this key, the
t address will increase
e one by one.
In the setting mode, eve on, if it is in the singlee operation mode, the air
ery time when you presss the butto
conditioner of the next in
n-service add
dress numb
ber will be selected.
s ation mode, no
If iti is in the gglobal opera
efffect will resu
ult after the key
k is presse
ed.
In the main pa he button can enter the q
age, press th e. By default, it is the firsst in-service air condition
query mode ner.

Control System 118

8
Control System

10) Downward button

In the query mode, every time when you press the button, the operation state data of the air conditioner
corresponding to the next row of the matrix will be displayed. If it is currently in the last row, press the key, and
the data of the air conditioner corresponding to the first row will be displayed. If you hold down this key, the row
will increase one by one.
In the setting mode, every time when you press the key, if it is in the single operation mode, the air conditioner
corresponding to the last row will be selected. If it is in the global operation mode, no effect will result after the
key is pressed.
In the main page, press the button can enter the query mode. By default, it is the first in-service air conditioner.

11) Upward button

In the query mode, every time when you press the button, the operation state data of the air conditioner
corresponding to the previous row of the matrix will be displayed. If it is currently in the first row, press the
button, and the data of the air conditioner corresponding to the last row will be displayed. If you hold down this
button, the row will decrease one by one. In the setting mode, every time when you press the button, if it is in
the single operation mode, the air conditioner corresponding to the previous row will be selected. If it is in the
global operation mode, no effect will result after the button is pressed.
In the main page, press the button can enter the query mode. By default, it is the first in-service air conditioner.

12) Add button

In the main page or the query mode, every time when you press the button, the data of the last page will be
displayed. If it is now in the last page, press the key again, and the first page will be displayed.
In the setting mode, every time when you press the key, if it is in the temperature regulation mode, the set
temperature will decrease by 1°C until the highest allowed set temperature; if it is in the timing
startup/shutdown time setting mode, select the upper-level set time, if no time is set, 0.0 will be displayed, if
you hold down the button, the upper-level data will be selected consecutively.
The specific change mode is as follows:
0.0→0.5→1.0→1.5→2.0→2.5→3.0→3.5→4.0→4.5→5.0→5.5→6.0→6.5→7.0→7.5→
8.0→8.5→9.0→9.5→10→11→12→13→14→15→16→17→18→19→20→21→22→23→24

13) Reduce button

In the main page or the query mode, every time when you press this button, the data of the previous page will
be displayed. If it is now in the first page, press the button again, and the last page will be displayed.
In the setting mode, every time when you press the button, if it is in the temperature regulation mode, the set
temperature will decrease by 1℃ until the lowest allowed set temperature; if it is in the timing
startup/shutdown time setting mode, select the upper-level set time, if no time is set, 0.0 will be displayed, if
you hold down the button, the upper-level data will be selected consecutively.
The specific change mode is as follows:
0.0← .5←1.0←1.5←2.0←2.5←3.0←3.5←4.0←4.5←5.0←5.5←6.0←6.5←7.0←7.5←8.0←8.5
←9.0←9.5←10←11←12←13←14←15←16←17←18←19←20←21←22←23←24

119 Control System

 Control System

14) ON/OFF button

Any time when you press the button, the centralized startup/shutdown operation is performed for all current
in-service air conditioners in the centralized controller network. If all in-service air conditioners in the network
are in the power-off state, press the button to perform the startup operation.
If it is in the mode setting page currently, and the parameters such as startup mode, temperature and air speed
are selected, the air conditioner will be started according to the selected parameters.
If no mode is selected currently, and the air conditioner is powered off or it is in other display page currently,
and the default startup mode is: Cooling, strong air, set temperature 24°C, swing function enabled. The default
startup mode is locked according to the system mode or judged according to other constraint conditions. If any
conflict exists, the next conflict-free mode will apply automatically. If conflict exists for all modes, startup will be
impossible. If one or more in-service air conditioners in the network (including in the timing process of timing
startup/shutdown), pressing this button will shut down all air conditioners. When performing the shutdown
operation, the shutdown command is issued to the air conditioners in the startup state only, and is not issued to
those in the shutdown state.

15) Lock button

In the mode setting mode, press the Lock button, and the remote controller of the currently selected air
conditioner will be locked/unlocked. The operation mode is: If you select single-machine setting, the operation
is performed for the air conditioner of the current address only. If the remote controller of the air conditioner is
locked currently, issue the lock command; otherwise, send the lock command. If you does not select the
single-machine mode, and the remote controller of one or more currently selected air conditioners is locked,
issue the unlock command; if the remote controllers of all currently selected air conditioners are in the
non-locked state, issue the remote controller lock command. When the remote controller of the air conditioner
is locked, the air conditioner does not receive remote control signals from the remote controller or wired
controller until the remote controller is unlocked. Press the Query button and then press the Lock button, and
the buttons of the centralized controller will be locked or unlocked. If the buttons are currently locked, press the
Query and Up button concurrently again, and the buttons will be unlocked; if the buttons are currently unlocked,
press the Query and Up button concurrently, and the buttons will be locked. If the buttons are locked, pressing
any button will be ineffective, except unlock operation.
In the unified setting page, press the Up button and the Lock button concurrently to lock all air conditioner
modes in the network. The mode locking is cancelled when the button is pressed again.
Notes: When locking or cancelling lock, the corresponding icon indication appears or disappears only after all
the attached air conditioners are set completely, so it takes a time period. When there are many attached air
conditioners, please wait patiently.

16) OK button
In the setting mode, press the button to send the currently selected mode state and the auxiliary function state
to the selected air conditioner, and display the mode setting operation results.
After you select the operation mode and auxiliary function state information of the air conditioner, if you do not
press the confirmation button, the selected information will not be sent to the air conditioner, and will not affect
the current operation of the air conditioner.

Control System 120

Control System

Th
he operation
ns of remote
e controller locking and
d unlocking need no pre
essing of thhe OK key. The comma
and
OCK key is pressed.
infformation is sent directlyy after the LO

17) Reset buttton

An
nytime when
n the reset button
b is pre
essed, the ccentralized controller
c willl reset. Thee result is th
he same as the
res
sult of restorring power-o
on after pow
wer failure.

3.1
1.3 LCD display

*: The
T matrix iss composed
d of 4×16 griids and each
h grid is com
mposed of tw
wo blocks off different siz
zes. The ma
atrix
inc
clude horizo
ontal coordin
nates 00-15
5 and verticcal coordina
ates 00+, 16 ch indicate the
6+, 32+ andd 48+, whic
address of the
e indoor un m of the horrizontal coorrdinate and vertical cooordinate of the grid is the
nit. The sum
address of the
e grid. Each grid corresp
ponds to an indoor unit of
o this addre
ess.
121
1 Control Systtem
 Control System

3.1
1.4 General display
y data entrries

1) General dis
splay data is
i displayed
d in all disp
play pages.
 Under the
e interconne
ected contro
ol of the co
omputer or gateway, th
he data is ddisplayed in
n graphic ( ).
Otherwise
e, no data iss displayed.
 If the cen
ntralized co
ontroller is connected
c w
with the fun
nctional module for coommunicatio
on, the data
a is
displayed in graphics ( ). Oth
herwise, no d
data is displayed.
 If the centtralized conttroller is con
nnected with
h the SMS re
emote contro cation, the data
ol module foor communic
is displaye
ed in graphics ( ). Otherwise,
O no
o data is dis
splayed.
 If the centtralized conttroller is con
nnected with
h the telepho
one remote control
c munication, the
moduule for comm
data is dissplayed in graphics ( ). Otherwiise, no data is displayed
d.
 In normal operation of the centtralized con
ntroller, the periodical cycle
c modulle communicates with the
network in d cyclically: (blank)
nterface module, and the data is dissplayed dynamically and .
 In the cen
ntralized con
ntrol locked state
s or the keypad lock
ked state, the locking icoon ( ) is displayed.
d After
unlocking, it is not displayed. In the centrallized contro cked state, the
oller locked state or thee keypad loc
locking fla
ag is displayyed constan of them are locked conc
ntly. If both o currently, thhe locking fla
ag is displayyed
constantlyy.
 In the setting page, if the selec nditioner is in the remote controlle r locked sta
cted air con ate (in case
e of
non-single a long as one machin
e machine operation, as ne is in the
e remote coontroller lock
ked state, itt is
deemed the locked sttate), the ico
on ( ) is displayed co
onstantly.
 If all indoo
or units lockk the cooling mode, this icon ( ) will display, and if all inddoor units lo
ock the heatting
mode, the
e icon ( ) will display
y.

2) Data displa
ay handling
g
 Indoor unit code (add
dress) displa
ay: display ra
ange: 00~63
3, and with # being lumi nous concurrently.
 Indoor tem
mperature display:
d display range: 0
00~99°C. Th mperature iss displayed concurrentlyy. If
he indoor tem
the tempe
erature is hig
gher than 99
9°C, 99°C w
will be displa valid, ‘--‘ will be
ayed. If the temperaturee value is inv
displayed.
 If timing sstartup or shutdown is se
et, the flag ( ) is displayed.
 T3, T2A a
and T2B display: in the single-mach
hine query page,
p y can shift bbetween T3, T2A and T2
display 2B;
by the wa
ay, the tempe
erature value is displaye
ed concurrently, with the ng luminous.
e correspondding °C bein
 oner fault or protection, tthe correspo
In case off air conditio onding fault code or prootection, the correspond
ding
fault code
e or protectio
on code can be displaye
ed.
 Liquid cryystal matrix display
d desc
cription:

Control System 122

2
Control System

Th
he liquid crysstal matrix iss composed of 4×16 grid
ds, and each
h grid is com
mposed of tw
wo blocks of different sizzes.
Th
he matrix inccludes horizzontal coordinates 00~1
15 on the up
pper side an
nd vertical ccoordinates 00+, 16+, 32+
3
he left side, which indica
and 48+ on th ate the addrress of the indoor unit. The sum off the horizontal coordinate
and the vertica
al coordinate
e of the grid is the addre
ess of the grrid. Each grid corresponnds to an ind
door unit of this
t
address. One grid is comp
posed of two
o blocks of d
different size
es. The state
e indication table is as follows;
Connstantly on Slow blink Fast blink
k
Big ervice
In-se Selected Out of service
black block
Small wer on
Pow Fault of
o indoor Power offf
black block or outd
door unit

3) LCD displa
ay descriptiion
 Descriptio
on of the sta
andby page
Th
he LCD displlays the stan
ndby page, 60 air condi tioners are in
i service, of
o which 28 aare powered
d on and 32 off.

In the matrix, the bid dotss from (16+, 00) to (32 +, 15) are luminous, an
nd the smalll dots are not
n luminouss. It
ind
dicates the 3
32 air condittioners with the
t addressses from 16 to 47 are po
owered off.
In the matrix, the big and
d small dots 8+, 12) are not luminouus. It indicattes the four air
s from (48+ , 09) to (48
conditioners w
with the addrress from 57
7 to 60 are o
outside the network.
n
All other big and small dots in the ma
atrix are lum inous. It indicates all other air condditioners are in the netw
work
and powered o
on.
Th
he address of the air conditioner
c is sum of tthe coordinates. For example, thee address of
o (48+, 09)) is
09+48=57.
Th
he centralize
ed controllerr keypad is locked, and
d the centra
alized contro
oller commu nicates with
h the compu
uter
normally.

 Descriptio
on of the que
ery page

he LCD displlays the que

Th ery page, an
nd the air con
nditioner witth the addre ed. Mode of the
ess of 01 is bbeing querie
airr conditionerr with the address
a 01 is cooling, h
high speed fan, swing on, indoor ttemperature
e 22°C, settting
tem
mperature 20°C and coo
oling mode locked.
l

123
3 Control Systtem
 Control System

In the matrix, only the big and small black dotts at (00+, 00)
0 and (00
0+, 01) are luminous. It indicates the
in--service and power-on state
s a condition ers with the addresses of 00 and 0 1.
of the air
Th
he centralize
ed controller communica
ates with the
e computer normally.
n

 Descriptio
on of the settting page

Th t address of 08. The mode

he LCD displlays the settting page, and queries tthe air condiitioner with the m of the
e air
conditioner witth the addre
ess 08 is: co
ooling, high speed air su
upply, swing
g on, indoor temperature
e 28°C, settting
tem
mperature 22°C and coo
oling.
only the big black dots from (00+, 0
In the matrix, o 08) to (00+, 15) are lum a conditioners
minous. It inddicates the air
witth the addre
esses from 08
0 to 15 are in service.
Th ed controller communica
he centralize ates with the
e computer normally.
n

 Fault page display de

escription

uery the air cconditioner with

Qu w the add
dress of 08 in
n the query page. The air
a conditioneer with the address
a of 08
8 is
ulty, and the fault code is E2. The big black dot below (00+, 08) blinks.
fau
In the matrix, o
only the big and small black
b dots fro
om (00+, 00
0) to (16+, 15
5) illuminatee. It indicates
s the in-servvice
sta
ate of the airr conditionerrs with the addresses
a fro
rom 00 to 31.
Th
he centralize
ed controller communica
ates with the
e computer normally.
n

Control System 124

4
Control System

3.1
1.5 Query and Errorr code

Th
he CCM03 centralized controller offe
ers the functtion of query
y of indoor units’
u runningg state and displays the
e
errror code whe
en some of the indoor units
u fail dow
wn.

1. Press the qu
uery button to activate the
t query fun
nction. Firstly the display panel will display the 1st units’ sta
ate.
2. Use the UP,
P, DOWN, LE
EFT and RIG he unit we want to queryy.
GHT buttonss to select th

Th
he indication of error cod
des are as th
he 2 tables b
below:
Table 1: Fault code
Faullt code Content
E
EF Other faultts
E
EE Water leve
el detection m
malfunction
E
ED Outdoor un
nit malfunctiion
E
EC Cleaning malfunction
m
E
EB Inverter module protecction
E
EA Current of compresso r is too large
e (4 Times)
E9 Communic
cation malfu nction between main bo
oard and dissplay board
E8 Wind blow
wing speed iss out of conttrol
E7 EEPROM error
E6 Detection of current diirection alterrnating is ab
bnormal
E5 T3 or T4 senor of disccharge of compressor fa
ails down
E4 T2B senso
or malfunctio
on
E3 T2A senso
or malfunctio
on

125
5 Control Systtem
 Control System

E2 T1 sensor malfunction
E1 Communication malfunction
E0 Phase sequence disorder or loss of power phase
07# /
06# /
05# /
04# /
03# Communication malfunction between centralized controller and PC(gateway)
Communication malfunction between centralized controller and functional
02#
module
Communication malfunction between centralized controller and network
01#
interface module
Communication malfunction between network interface module and main
00#
control board

Table 2: Protection code

Protection code Content
PF Other protection
PE Reserved
PD Reserved
PC Reserved
PB Reserved
PA Reserved
P9 Reserved
P8 Compressor’s current is too large
P7 Voltage of power supply is too high or too low
P6 Pressure of discharge is too low
P5 Pressure of discharge is too high
P4 Temp. of discharge pipe is abnormal
P3 Temp. of compressor is abnormal
P2 Condenser high-temperature protection
P1 Anti-cool air or defrost protection
P0 Evaporator temperature protection

Control System 126

Control System

3.1.6 Installation

System composition:
The centralized controller is used to perform centralized control and data query for the network air
conditioner. Each centralized controller can communicate with a maximum of 64 air conditioners to make
up an air conditioner LAN, and implement centralized monitoring for the air conditioners in the network.
The centralized controller can be interfaced with computer or gateway to implement centralized control
and state query for all air conditioners in the network. It can be connected with WAN via computer or
gateway to implement remote computerized control (with support of computer software). Each local
computer or gateway can be connected to 16 centralized controllers as a maximum.
The master or slave answer mode is implemented for communication between the centralized controller
and the air conditioner, between the computer and the centralized controller. In the LAN composed of
centralized controller and air conditioner, the centralized controller is a master, and the air conditioner is a
slave. In the LAN composed of computer and centralized controller, the computer or gateway is a master,
and the centralized controller is a slave.
The schematic diagram of network control system composition of air conditioner:

air conditioner

Centralized controller Local computer

Network interface

The network interface

may be intergrated
into the indoor unit or
main control board.

A maximum of 64 pieces Internet

A maximum of 16 pieces

Notes: Before starting the network, please confirm that every CCM03’s address is different with each other.

127 Control System

 Control System

Open the front panel of the centralized contro

roller by scre
ewdriver as the
t followingg picture: (U
Unit: mm)

74
6
65

110
104

119
g to size of the hole in controller bod
According dy, fix the co
ontroller on the
t place ass needed. (U
Unit: mm)

Control System 128

8
Control System

RS232 Pin hole

e: for connection to
computer COM port

RS485 Con
nverted
RS232 mod
dule
Emergency OpenO Switch,use
ed to
star up all air conditioners

Emergency Stop
S Switch,usedd to
shut down all air conditioners
s

Communication interrface
Power cable interface to the
e indoor unit

129
9 Control Systtem
 Control System

Installation dimensions:
As shown in the figure
on the right side.

136
92
Installation screw
holes (4 holes)

70.5 48.5
83.5

Rotate the flathead screwdriver slightly

to open the upper cover (at points).

Screws for fixing the centralized

controller (GB845/ST3.9*25)
Holder
Address X Y E F1 F2 E FORCED ON ENG. S TOP L N
bits Bit location Address range
Power cable interface
~ 00 ~ 15 of centralized controller
198V~242V (50 / 60HZ)
Upper
Emergent stop switch
cover
Emergent start switch
Communication interface with computer
Communication interface with indoor interface

Control System 130

131
RS232 Pin hole: for connection to
computer COM port

Notes:
RS485 Converted
RS232 module
Control System

The shielded wire must

Matching resistance of be reliable grounded
communication end is 120Ω

Junction Box Junction Box Junction Box

Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
OtherCentr alized
contr oller
Matching resistance of One centralized controller can be
communication end is 120Ω
connected to 64 indoor units as a maximum

POWER

Junction Box Junction Box

Indoor unit Indoor unit

it will be effective after about 6 minutes.

indoor units, not just for new indoor units.

The shielded wire must
Matching resistance of be reliable grounded
Centr alized contr oller
communication end is 120Ω

Junction Box

you set the address of every indoor unit manually.

Junction Box Junction Box
Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
Matching resistance of
communication end is 120Ω
One centralized controller can be
connected to 64 indoor units as a maximum

POWER

Junction Box Junction Box

Indoor unit Indoor unit

One centralized controller can be

connected to 64 indoor units as a maximum

master outdoor unit, the CCM controller cannot control old indoor units.
Centr alized contr oller
The shielded wire must
Matching resistance of be reliable grounded
communication end is 120Ω

Junction Box Junction Box Junction Box

Matching resistance of Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
communication end is 120Ω
One centralized controller can be
connected to 64 indoor units as a maximum

POWER

Junction Box Junction Box

Indoor unit Indoor unit

Note:
The module, which is RS485 shift to RS232 in the diagram and the connective cable are only
Centr alized contr oller used when the net system connect with compute r. One computer can connect with 16
centralize controllers, namely 16X64=1024 indoor units could be controlled at mostly . The
centralize controller to be distinguished by dial code address, the address setting range is
from 0 to 15, thus in a network system without two centralize controller could be set in a

2. To connect indoor CCM controller via XYE ports of indoor unit, this wiring method is suitable for all type of
same address.

indoor CCM controller via XYE ports of indoor units. If we connect the indoor CCM controller via XYE ports of
3. When new indoor units and old indoor units mix connect to one refrigerant system, we can just connect the

Control System
1. For the new series product, we can connect the indoor CCM controller via XYE ports of master outdoor unit
of every refrigerant system. Notice that in this case, the outdoor unit must be set to auto addressing mode. And

4. If one system that connect to indoor CCM controller include 10 HP or above duct indoor unit, we recommend
 Control System

3.2 Touch key centralized controlle

er: CCM3
30

CC
CM30 is new
w designed and
a it is a to
ouch key cen
ntralized con
ntroller. It ca
an be conneected up to 64
6 indoor un
nits,
and the conne
ection length
h can be up
p to 1200m. The CCM3
30 centralize
ed controllerr has the airr filter clean
ning
rem
minding funcction and it is convenien
nt to remind users to cle
ean the air filter. Both of tthe following
g wiring mod
des
centralized controller and indoor units
s are applica
able.

Indoo
or unit Ind
door unit Indoor un
nit Indoor unit Indo
oor unit Indoor unit

Cen
ntralized controller

In
ndoor unit Indoor unitt Indoo
or unit Ind
door unit Indoor unit Indoor unit

Centtralized conttroller

Control System 132

2
Control System

3.2
2.1 General functions and de
escription

(1)) Query key

y
An
ny time when
n you press the key, the
e selected op
peration mode is to query the operaational state of the air
conditioner.
By
y default, the
e first in-servvice air cond
ditioner will b
be queried.

(3)) Setting ke
ey
In other displa
ay modes, prress this key
y can enter tthe setting mode.
m
By
y default, it iss a single se
etting, and th
he first in-se
ervice air con
nditioner is displayed.
d Inn setting the
e operation
mo
ode, press th
his key again, and the operation
o med for all aiir conditioneers in the network. Presss
willl be perform
the
e key repeattedly to shiftt between a single settin
ng and globa
al setting.
→ Sing
gle → G
Global →

(4)) Mode key

y
Un
nder the settting operatio
on mode, pre
ess this key to set the operation.
o
→coo
oling → heatiing → Fan only
o → offf →

(5)) Fan key

Un
nder the settting operatio
on mode, pre
ess this key to set the fa
an of the ind
door unit to rrun in the au
utomatic, hig
gh,
me
edium or low
w level of airr.
→ auto → low
w → medium → high →

133
3 Control Systtem
 Control System

(6)) Time on k
key
Un
nder the settting operatio
on mode, pre
ess this key can set the timing to turrn on the air conditioner; press this key
k
again can exit the timing setting,
s and restore the normal temp gulation ope ration mode
perature reg e

(7)) Time off k

key
Un
nder the settting operatio
on mode, pre
ess this key can set the timing shutdown of air conditioner, press this key
k
again will exit the timing setting, and restore
r the n
normal temp
perature regulation operration mode.

(8)) Swing key

y
Un
nder the settting operatio ess this key can enable or disable the
on mode, pre t swing fu nction. If all currently
selected air co
onditioners have
h ng function, no effect will result afte
no swin er pressing tthe key.

(9)) Leftward key

In the query m
mode, if this key
k is press
sed, the ope ration state data of the previous airr conditionerr will be
dis
splayed. If it is currently on the first machine, th hen the key is
he data of the last machine will be ddisplayed, wh
pre
essed. If you
u hold down
n this key, the
e address w
will decrease e. In the settting mode, iff it is in single
e one by one
operation mod
de, the air co
onditioner off the previou
us in-service address number will bee selected, when
w this keyy is
essed, if it iss in the global operation mode, no e
pre effect will res
sult when this key is preessed. In the
e main page
e,
ess the key to enter the query mode
pre e. By defaul t, it is the firrst in-service
e air conditiooner.

(10
0) Rightwarrd key
In the query m vice air conditioner is se lected, and its operation
mode, when the key is prressed, the next in-serv nal
sta
ate data will be displaye
ed. If it is currrently on the
e last air con
nditioner, the
e first one iss selected and its data
dis
splays, when
n the key is pressed. If this
t key is lo
ong pressed, the addres
ss will increaase one by one.
o
mode, if it is in the single operation mode, when
In the setting m n the key is pressed, thee next in-service air
conditioner willl be selecte
ed. If it is in the
t global op
peration mode, no effec
ct will result w
when the ke
ey is pressed
d.
In the main pa
age, press th
he key to enter the querry mode. By default, it is
s the first in-sservice air conditioner.
c

(11
1) Downwarrd key
In the main pa
age, press th
his key can enter
e the que
ery mode. By
B default, it is the first inn-service airr conditionerr. In

any other time

e, press this key will select the next row corresponding
g position airr conditionerr.
In the setting m
mode, if the global opera
ation mode is selected, this key is in
nvalid. If it iss on the last row, press this
t
key again to shift to the firrst row air co will increase one by one.
onditioner. Iff this key is long pressed, the row w

(12
2) Upward k
key
In the main pa
age, press th
his key can enter
e ery mode. By
the que B default, it is the first inn-service airr conditionerr. In
any other time
e, press this key will sele
ect the previious corresp
ponding position air condditioner.
In the setting m
mode, if sele
ected all the oners to operate, this key is invalid.
e air conditio
If it is on the first row, presss this key again,
a and s hift to the last row corre
esponding aiir conditione
er.

Control System 134

4
Control System

If you
y hold dow
wn this key, the row will decrease o
one by one.

(13
3) Add key
1) Query mode
e:
Pre
ess this keyy, display the
e data of the
e last page. IIf it is now in
n the last page, press thhis key again
n and the firsst
page will be diisplayed.
2) Setting ope
eration mode
e
Temperature
①T e adjusting method
m

Pre
ess this keyy; the setting
g temperaturre will increa
ase 1℃. If yo
ou hold dow
wn the key " ", the settting
tem
mperature w
will increase one by one.
Wh d the highesst allowed to set tempera
hen reached ature, it cannot increase
e.
② Timing on o
or timing offf setting metthod

ess this keyy "

Pre ", it will select the next
n setting time. If you hold down this
t key, the next data will
w be selectted
one by one. W
When reache
ed the max. allowed settting time, it cannot
c incre
ease.

(14
4) Reduce k
key
1) Query mode
e

Pre
ess this keyy " ", displa
ay the data of the previo
ous page. If it is now in the first pagge, press is key
k again an
nd
the
e last page w
will be displa
ayed.
2) Setting ope
eration mode
e
① Temperature adjusting
g method

ess this keyy "

Pre ", the setting tempe
erature will d
decrease 1℃
℃. If you hold down thiss key, the setting
tem
mperature w
will decrease
e one by one
e. When rea ched the low
west allowed
d set temperrature, it can
nnot decrease.
② Timing on o
or timing offf setting metthod

Pre
ess this keyy " ", it will select the next
n setting ttime. If you hold down the key " "", the next data will be
selected one b
by one. Whe
en reached the wed setting time, it cann
t min allow not decreasee.

(15
5) ON/OFF k
key
An
ny time when
n you press the key, the
e centralized
d startup/shu
utdown operration is perfformed for all
a current
in--service air cconditioners in the centrralized contrroller networrk.

6) Confirma
(16 ation key
In the setting m
mode, presss this key ca
an send the ccurrently selected mode
e state and tthe auxiliary
y function sta
ate
to the selected
d air conditio
oner.

(17
7) Reset key
y
An
ny time when
n the reset key
k is presse
ed, the centrralized contrroller will reset. The resuult is the sam
me as the ressult
135
5 Control Systtem
 F u ll d i s p l a y o f L C D

Control System
(18) Lock key

Telephone module Swing function

SMS modeule communication
mommunication
Display operation
3.2.2 LCD display
Dewetting function Electric auxiliary
Function module status:Query, setting,
heating function
communication grouping, operation.
Fault and
Computer protection code Communication status
Ventilation
communication
of restoring power-on after power failure.

(1.6)

Te m p erature K e y lo c k in g s e tt in g m o d e
p a ra m e t e r
Indoor temperature
R e m o te c o n t r o lle r
H ou r Ti m i n g O N / O F F
lo c k in g 1 . Th e m atrix is com p o se d of 4 *16 g rid s an d e ach
m ark
g r i d i s c o m p o s e d o f t w o b l o o k s o f d i ff e r e n t s i z e s .
H e a tin g m o d e
Any time when this key is pressed, the selected air conditioner can be locked or unlocked.

2 . T h e m a t r ix in c lu d e h o r iz o n ta l c o o r d in a te s 0 0 - 1 5
M o d e s e l e c tio n : lo c k in g
a n d v e r ti c a l c o o r d in a te s 0 0 + ,1 6 + ,3 2 + a n d 4 8 + ,
A uto, coo lin g ,heating
w h ic h i n d ic a t e th e a d d r e s s o f t h e i n d o o r u n it . T h e
Fan speed C o o lin g m o d e
s u m o f th e h o r iz o n ta l c o o r d in a te a n d th e v e r tic a l
lo c k in g
c o o r d in a te o f t h e g r id i s t h e a d d r e s s o f th e g r id .
E a c h g r id c o r r e s p o n d s to a n in d o o r u n it o f th is
a d dres s.

136
Control System
Control System

3.2.3 Other operations

※ Various locking functions

1. Centralized controller locking
The centralized controller locking state will be recorded when powered off. It won't dismiss when re-power on
until receiving the unlocking order.
1) Effect
① When the centralized controller is under locking state, it cannot change the air conditioner's operating state
through the centralized controller (such as ON/OFF the unit, setting mode, change the setting temperature,
change the fan speed, unlock the exiting locking state etc.), but it can do the query operation, until unlocking
and then recover to normal.
② When the centralized controller is under the locking state, all the air conditioners in the centralized
controller network will be remote controller locked.

2) Operation
① Locking
The centralized controller can be locked by the computer only.
② Unlocking
a) When the centralized controller and computer communicate normally
The centralized controller can be unlocked by the computer only. When the centralized controller is unlocked,
the controller will send the order to unlock the remote controller locking of all the air conditioners.
b) When the centralized controller and computer communication abnormally
When the centralized controller is locking, the centralized controller can be unlocked by the way that the press
QUERY key and holds on, then press MODE key (it should operate within one minute after centralized
controller is re-powered on or the RESET key is pressed).
The remote controller locking of the air conditioner is remained.

2. Remote controller locking

1) Effect
① When the air conditioner is under remote controller locking state, it will not receive the remote signals from
remote controller or wired controller, until unlocking.
② The air conditioner can be operated by the centralized controller.
2) Operation
① Can lock or unlock through the computer.
② Can operate by a centralized controller.
In the centralized controller setting interface, press LOCK key to lock or unlock.
If the current state is remote controller locking, press the key to unlock.
If there's no remote controller locking, press the key to lock.

137 Control System

 Control System

3. Mode locking
1) Effect
Under the mode locking state, only can choose the mode which hasn't conflict with locking mode through
centralized controller to operate the air conditioner,

2) Operation
Can set the heat and cool mode lock or not
Under mode locking state, if set the new mode locking, it must be unlocking first, then can operate the new
mode locking.
① Can lock or unlock through the computer.
② Can operate by a centralized controller.
In the centralized controller setting interface, choose all the air conditioners of the centralized controller
network as the object, press Upward key and hold on, then press LOCK key to do the mode locking or
unlocking.
If the current state is mode locking, press the key to unlock.
If there isn't a mode of locking, press the key to lock.

※ Power on or reset
When the centralized controller is powered on or resets by the RESET key:
The buzzer long buzz for 2 seconds: all display segments of the LCD are luminous for 2 seconds and then
goes off;
1 second later, the system enters normal display state. The centralized controller is in the main page display
state and displays the first page, and searches the in-service air conditioners in the network.
Once the search is finished, the centralized controller enters the mode setting page, and sets the first
in-service air conditioner by default.

※ Emergency stop and forced on

When the emergent stop switch of the centralized controller is connected, all the air conditioners in the
centralized controller network will be shut down compulsorily, and the LED flashes as [Link] centralized
controller and computer and all functional modules are disabled from startup and shutdown until the emergent
stop switch is broken. When the forced on the switch of the centralized controller is connected, all air
conditioners in the network of the centralized controller will start up compulsorily. By default, they will run
before the power failure mode.
The startup and shut down operations of the centralized controller and computer and all functional modules will
be disabled (only the command of a startup is sent to the air conditioner, without affecting operation of the
remote controller after startup) until the forced on the switch is broken.
If the foregoing two switches are connected concurrently, the emergent stop switch shall have preference.

Control System 138

Control System

※ ON and OFF opera

ation

Us
se the " " kkey or " " key can turn
n on and turrn off the air conditioners in the centtralized controller netwo
ork.
Th
he ON mode
e will accord to the syste er limit conditions for juddging, if therre is conflict, it
em mode loccking or othe
willl auto adjusst to the nextt mode witho
out conflict; iif all the mod
des have a conflict,
c thenn it cannot operate the unit.
u

※ Use " " key to TUR

RN ON and TURN OFF the unit
ess this keyy can operate
Pre e a single aiir conditione
er or all the air
a conditioners in the ceentralized co
ontroller
network.
1) Choose the
e object. Press SET key to choose a single air conditioner
c o all air connditioners in the centralizzed
or

controller netw
work. If choo
ose a single air condition
ner, then use
e the keys , , and

can choosse the air co

onditioner.
2) Use "MODE
E", "FAN", "A
ADD" and "R
Reduce" keyy to set the operating
o mo
ode and opeerating parameters, succh
as fan speed, setting temp
perature etc
c.

3) Use " " kkey, centralizzed controlle

er sends the
e relative ord
der to the op
perating objeect.

Aftter setting th
he operating
g parameter for the air cconditioner, if not press the
t key " ng paramete
", the settin er
willl not be sen
nt to the air conditioner,
c and the currrent operatio
on of the air conditionerr is not affec
cted (except
loc
cking operattion).

※ Use " " key to TUR

RN ON and TURN OFF the unit
nly can operrate all air co
On onditioners, not for singlle in the cen
ntralized con
ntroller netwoork:

Long press " " key: presss this key fo

or over 2 se
econds then loose.

Sh
hort press " " key: press this key and
a then loo
ose within 2 seconds.
Ac different stattes and operration ways of air condittioners in the
ccording to d e current ceentralized, th
here are
following situa
ations:
1) If there are one or more
e air conditio
oners is und
der ON state
e (include tim
ming processs of timing ON
O and OFF
F), "

" key only sshort press effective.

e
On e shutdown order to the air conditio ner which under the ON
nly sends the N state, and if the unit is under the OFF
O
sta
ate, the conttroller will no
ot send OFF
F order to it.
Th
he memory ffunction is acctivated; the
e current sta
ate of all air conditioners
c s is memorizzed.
2) All the air co
onditioners in
i the centra
alized contro
oller network
k are OFF sttates.

① Short presss " " key

Th
he centralize
ed controller reads the memory
m conttents, and sends relative
e order to alll air conditio
oners.

② Long presss " " key

a) If current pa
age is setting parameterrs, and the ssetting mode
e is not OFF
F, the centra lized controller will send
d
ders to all aiir conditione
ord ers according
g to parame
eters, such as
a setting mo
ode, fan speeed, setting temperature
e,
etc
c.

139
9 Control Systtem
 Control System

b) If the curren
nt is under setting
s interfa
ace but the setting mod
de is OFF sta
ate or underr other interffaces, the
centralized controller will send
s the deffault ON ord
der to all air conditioners
s. The defauult ON orderr is: cooling
mo
ode, high fan
n speed, settting temperrature is 24℃
℃ or 76℉, operates
o the
e swinging fuunction.

※ Air filterr cleaning remind

r disp
play descrip
ption
1) The centralized controller records the
t total run ning time off the indoor unit.
Wh
hen the accu
umulated ru
unning time reaches
r ue, the reminding dual ""88" (as show in c part of
the pre-set valu o
the L" to remind users that th
e Fig. A) will display "FL he air filter of
o the indoorr unit need to be cleane
ed.
Wh
hen the centtralized conttroller displa
ays FL, it ne eds to manu
ual operation to clear thhe icon. Pres
ss SWING key
k
and hold on then presss QUERY ke
ey " ", can
n clear FL reminding.
At the same tim
me, the accumulated tim
me of centra
alized contro
oller powered
d on will be cleared.

00 01 02 03 04
4 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
3 14 15
00+

16+

32+

48+

a. Function se
election b. Paramete
er selection c. Reminding d. “Set successfully” reminding
Fig
g. A
2) Function se
etting
① Dial the dia
al code 3 to "ON" ( referr to table 2.3
3 ), and whe
en controller power on w
within 1 minu
ute, press
UERY key and FAN keyy together wiill enter the o
QU optional function setting
g page. The icon (a
as show in b
part of the Fig. A) will be flashed
f with 1Hz frequen
ncy (default display 00), and users can choose
e the function
n
fro
om table 2.2.

Pre
ess " " an
nd " " keyss can select function, an
nd then pres
ss " " key to
t enter paraameter selection.
② After enterring parame
eter selection, the functiion selection
n icon (a
as show in a part of the
e Fig. A) will be
lighted on; the param
meter selection icon (as show in b part of the Fig. A)) will be flashed with 1Hz
1

frequency and displayy optional parameter

p ccode. Through pressing
g " " and " " keys can select the
detailed pa
arameter.

③ Press " " to confirm parameter selection

s (de
etails param er to table 2.3).
meter codes' correspondding time refe

ng successffully, the fun

④ After settin nction selecttion icon meter selecti on icon will be lighted on,
and param
the screen ” (as show in b part of the Fig. A)). After 3 se
n will display “Setting successfully”
s econds will exit
e

Control System 140

0
Control System

optional function setting automatically, and the screen will be back to normal display. After entering optional
function setting, no operations in 5 seconds will exit function selection automatically, the setting parameter

will not change. Only press “ ” key to confirm the parameter then the setting parameter will save.

Table 2.1: The code of selecting the Table 2.2: The code of different times
clear filter function of reminding clear filter

Function code Function setting

Parameter code Time (hour)
00 Only display, no function
00 0
Cleaning filter screen
01 01 1250
reminding
02 2500
03 5000
04 10000

※ Dial code operation specification

Dial code 1
Dial code 2
Dial code 3
ON

1 2 3

Table 2.3
ON OFF
Dial code 1 CCM30 for 3-pige CCM30 for 2-pige
Dial code 2 Fahrenheit Centigrade
Dial code 3 With the optional function No the optional function

Notes:
1. For the new series product, we can connect the indoor CCM controller via XYE port of master outdoor unit of
every refrigerant system. Notice that in this case, the outdoor unit must be set to auto addressing mode. And it
will be effective after about 6 minutes.
2. To connect indoor CCM controller via XYE port of indoor unit, this wiring method is suitable for all type of
indoor units, not just for new indoor units.
3. When new indoor units and old indoor units mix connect to one refrigerant system, we can just connect the
indoor CCM controller via XYE port of indoor units. If we connect the indoor CCM controller via XYE port of
master outdoor unit, the CCM controller cannot control old indoor units.
4. If one system that connect to indoor CCM controller include 10 HP or above duct indoor unit, we recommend
you set the address of every indoor unit manually.

141 Control System

 Control System

3.2.4 Fault and protection codes

Fault code Content

EF Other faults
EE Water level detection malfunction
ED Reserved
EC Cleaning malfunction
EB Inverter module protection
EA Current of compressor is too large (4 Times)
E9 Communication malfunction between main board and display board
E8 Wind blowing speed is out of control
E7 EEPROM error
E6 Detection of current direction alternating is abnormal
E5 T3 or T4 senor of discharge of compressor fails down
E4 T2B sensor malfunction
E3 T2A sensor malfunction
E2 T1 sensor malfunction
E1 Communication malfunction
E0 Phase sequence disorder or loss of power phase
07# /
06# /
05# /
04# /
03# Communication malfunction between centralized controller and PC(gateway)
02# Communication malfunction between centralized controller and functional module
Communication malfunction between centralized controller and network interface
01#
module
00# Communication malfunction between network interface module and main control board

Protection code Content

PF Other protection
PE Reserved
PD Reserved
PC Reserved
PB Reserved
PA Reserved
P9 Reserved
P8 Compressor’s current is too large
P7 Voltage of power supply is too high or too low

Control System 142

Control System

P6 Pre
essure of dis
scharge is to
oo low
P5 Pre
essure of dis
scharge is to
oo high
P4 Tem
mp. of discharge pipe iss abnormal
P3 Tem
mp. of comp
pressor is ab
bnormal
P2 Condenser high-temperatu
ure protectio
on
P1 Antti-cool air or defrost prottection
P0 Eva
aporator tem
mperature prrotection

2.5 General display

3.2 y data entrries

1) General dis
splay data is
i displayed
d in all disp
play pages.
 Under the
e interconne
ected contro
ol of the co mputer or gateway,
g the
e data is dissplayed in graphic
g ( ).
Otherwise
e, no data iss displayed.
 If the cen
ntralized co
ontroller is connected
c w
with the fun
nctional module for coommunicatio
on, the data
a is
displayed in graphics ( ). Oth
herwise, no d
data is displayed.
 If the centtralized conttroller is con
nnected with
h the SMS re
emote contro cation, the data
ol module foor communic
is displaye
ed in graphics ( ). Otherwise,
O no
o data is dis
splayed.
 If the centtralized conttroller is con
nnected with
h the telepho
one remote control
c munication, the
moduule for comm
data is dissplayed in graphics ( ). Otherwiise, no data is displayed
d.
 In normal operation of the centtralized con
ntroller, the periodical cycle
c modulle communicates with the
network in d cyclically: (blank),
nterface module, and the data is dissplayed dynamically and , , .
 In the cen
ntralized con
ntrol locked state
s or the keypad lock
ked state, the locking flaag ( ) is displayed.
d A
After
unlocking, it is not displayed. In the centrallized contro cked state, the
oller locked state or thee keypad loc
locking fla
ag is displayyed constan of them are locked conc
ntly. If both o currently, thhe locking fla
ag is displayyed
constantlyy.
 In the setting page, if the selec nditioner is in the remote controlle r locked sta
cted air con ate (in case
e of
non-single
e unit opera
ation, as lon
ng as one u
unit is in the
e remote con
ntroller lockeed state, it is deemed the
locked sta
ate), the flag
g( ) is diisplayed con
nstantly.
 If all indoo g mode, this flag (
or units lockk the cooling ) will display, and if all inddoor units lo
ock the heatting
mode, the
e flag ( ) will display
y.

2) Data displa
ay handling
g
 Indoor unit code (add
dress) displa
ay: display ra
ange: 00~63
3, and with # being lumi nous concurrently.
 mperature display: display range: 00
Indoor tem 0~99°C (or 99℉). The indoor tempperature is displayed
concurren
ntly. If the temperature is
s higher tha n 99°C (or 99℉),
9 99°C (or 99℉) wiill be display
yed. If the
temperatu
ure value is invalid, ‘--‘w
will be displayyed.
 If timing sstartup or shutdown is se
et, the flag ( ) is disp
played.

143
3 Control Systtem
 Control System

 T3, T2A a
and T2B display: in the single-mach
hine query page,
p display
y can shift bbetween T3, T2A and T2
2B;
by the wa
ay, the tempe
erature value is displaye
ed concurrently, with the ng luminous.
e correspondding °C bein
 oner fault or protection, tthe correspo
In case off air conditio onding fault or protectioon code, the correspond
ding
fault or prrotection cod
de can be displayed.
 Liquid cryystal matrix display
d desc
cription:

Th
he liquid crysstal matrix iss composed of 4×16 grid
ds, and each
h grid is com
mposed of tw
wo blocks of different sizzes.
Th
he matrix inccludes horizzontal coordinates 00~1
15 on the up
pper side an
nd vertical ccoordinates 00+, 16+, 32+
3
he left side, which indica
and 48+ on th ate the addrress of the indoor unit. The sum off the horizontal coordinate
and the vertica
al coordinate
e of the grid is the addre
ess of the grrid. Each grid corresponnds to an ind
door unit of this
t
address. One grid is comp
posed of two
o blocks of d
different size
es. The state
e indication table is as follows;
Con
nstantly on Slow blink Fast blink
k
Biig black blocck In
n-service Selecteed Out of seervice
Faultt of indoor
Sm
mall black blo
ock Power
P on Power off
or ou
utdoor unit

3) LCD displa
ay descriptiion
 Descriptiion of the main
m page
Th
he LCD displlays the maiin page, 60 air condition
ners are in service,
s of which
w 28 are powered on
n and 32 off..

In the matrix, the bid dotss from (16+, 00) to (32 +, 15) are luminous, an
nd the smalll dots are not
n luminouss. It
ind
dicates the 3
32 air condittioners with the
t addressses from 16 to 47 are po
owered off.
In the matrix, the big and
d small dots 8+, 12) are not luminouus. It indicattes the four air
s from (48+ , 09) to (48
conditioners w
with the addrress from 57
7 to 60 are o
outside the network.
n
All other big and small dots in the ma
atrix are lum inous. It indicates all other air condditioners are in the netw
work
and powered o
on.
Th
he address of the air conditioner
c is sum of tthe coordinates. For example, thee address of
o (48+, 09)) is
09+48=57.
Th
he centralize
ed controllerr keypad is locked, and
d the centra
alized contro
oller commu nicates with
h the compu
uter
normally.

Control System 144

4
Control System

 Description of the query page

The LCD displays the query page, and the air conditioner with the address of 01 is being queried. Mode of the
air conditioner with the address 01 is cooling, high speed air supply, swing on, indoor temperature 22°C,
setting temperature 20°C and cooling mode locked.
In the matrix, only the big and small black dots at (00+, 00) and (00+, 01) are luminous. It indicates the
in-service and power-on state of the air conditioners with the addresses of 00 and 01.
The centralized controller communicates with the computer normally.

 Description of the setting page

The LCD display displays the setting page, and queries the air conditioner with the address of 01.
The mode of the air conditioner with the address 01 is: Cooling, high fan speed, swing on, setting temperature
22°C and cooling.
In the matrix, only the big black dots at (00+, 01) to (00+, 15) are luminous. It indicates the air conditioners with
the addresses 01 and 15 are in service.
The centralized controller communicates with the computer normally.

145 Control System

 Control System

 Fault pag
ge display description
d

Qu
uery the air cconditioner with
w the add
dress of 08 i n the query page.
he air condittioner with the address of 08 is fau
Th ulty, and fau
ult code is 08.
0 The big black dot below (00+, 08)
blinks.
only the big and small black
In the matrix, o b dots att (00+, 00) and
a (16+, 15
5) illuminatee. It indicates
s the in-servvice
sta
ate of the airr conditionerr power on, with the add
dresses 00 and
a 31.
Th ed controller communica
he centralize ates with the
e computer normally.
n

3.2
2.6 Centra
alized controller ins
stallation

※ Dimens
sions (Unit: mm)
Th
here are two kinds of appearance fo n difference is the controoller cover and
or your choicce. The main a you can
choose you likke.
(1)) The structu
ure A must be
b embedded into the w
wall of the ins ode, taken frrom the walls of the interior
stallation mo
wirring way wo
ould be more
e appropriate
e; and you m
must reserve
e a chisel ins
stallation onn the wall be
efore
ins
stallation.
(2)) The structu
ure B does not
n need to be
b embedde
ed into the wall,
w playing four mountiing screw mounting
m and
d
shape is a reg
gular cuboid,, can also lik bedded in the wall mounnted, connec
ke the old sttructure emb cting line fro
om
the
e set controll above and below, and a rear leadi ng-out.

C
CCM30/BKE
E-A CCM30
0/BKE-B

Control System 146

6
Control System

180

137
92

70 48.5

85 68
122

CCM30/BKE-A
3 /

CCM30/BKE-B

147 Control System

 Control System

※ Installation diagram

Insert the flathead screwdriver into the

concave on the upper side of the box,
and rotate slightly to open the upper cover(3 places).

Fix the screws of the centralized controller

（GB845/ST3.9*25）
3 2 1

Base
Dial code
ON

Address dial code

Front cover

Dial code position Address range

~ 00 ~ 15

※ Terminal instruction

X Y E F1 F2 E FORCED ON ENG. S TOP L N

L and N port
198V~242V (50 / 60HZ)

Emergent stop switch

Emergent start switch
Communication port with computer
Communication port with indoor unit

Control System 148

Control System

3.3 Weekly
y schedu
ule timerr centraliized controller: MD-CCM0
M 09

MD
D-CCM09 iss designed base
b on the
e CCM03, m
max. 64 indo
oor units control, weeklly schedule timer function.
Wiith the function above, CCM09/E
C ca
an’t be conn
nected to the
e network co
ontrol system ually it does not
m. And actu
have the port F1, F2, E, which
w are needed if conn
nects to the computer.

 7 -d
days Weekly
y schedule ssetting (Max
ximum 128
weekly & daily scheduless)
 Max. 64 indoorr units groupp control or individual se
etting
 Cle ht screen witth LCD back
ear and brigh klight
 Tem
mperature se
etting
 Wirreless remotte control reestriction
 Mode lock
 Perrmanent sch
hedule settinng storage

3.3
3.1 System
m configure

MD
D-CCM09 iss only an ind
door unit cen
ntralized con
ntroller, but with
w this dev
vice we couldd set the ind
door unit’s
fun
nctions compactly and conveniently
c y.
1. All the indoo
or units and outdoor uniits are V4 pllus series, th
he topology of the netwoork can be as
a follows.
oreover the 2nd way of connecting
Mo c s also adapttable in this condition.
is
X
X,Y,E P,Q,E P,Q,E P,Q,E

2. The indoor units contain eries, wiring connection method is as follows.

n any V4 se
X,Y,E X,Y,E X,Y,E X,Y,E
E

MD
D-CCM09 co eds connecting it with otther indoor units
ontroller nee u in a ha
and-in-hand way, which is the same
e
connecting wa CCM03. Forr the 2nd type
ay with MD-C e of topology
y, either of th
he connectinng ways belo
ow is availab
ble.
Ind
door unit Indo
oor unit Indoo
or unit Indoor unit Indoor un
nit Indoor unit

Centralized con
ntroller

Indoor unit Indoor unit I

Indoor unit Ind
door unit Indoo
or unit Indoorr unit

Centra
alized controller

149
9 Control Systtem
 Control System

Notes:
1. For the new series product, we can connect the indoor CCM controller via XYE port of master outdoor unit of
every refrigerant system. Notice that in this case, the outdoor unit must be set to auto addressing mode. And it
will be effective after about 6 minutes.
2. To connect indoor CCM controller via XYE port of indoor unit, this wiring method is suitable for all type of
indoor units, not just for new indoor units.
3. When new indoor units and old indoor units mix connect to one refrigerant system, we can just connect the
indoor CCM controller via XYE port of indoor units. If we connect the indoor CCM controller via XYE port of
master outdoor unit, the CCM controller cannot control old indoor units.
4. If one system that connect to indoor CCM controller include 10 HP or above duct indoor unit, we recommend
you set the address of every indoor unit manually.

3.3.2 LCD display

1 2 3 4

or display “ ” with model MD-CCM09/E(H)-A

MD-CCM09/E(H)

5 6 7 8 9 10 15 11 12 13 14

1 On-line conditioner
8 Economy run
matrix table of A/C 0-63
2 Query 9 Swing
3 Set 10 Electric auxiliary heater
4 Operate result 11 Locking keyboard
5 Remote controller locking: does not respond signal
Date time 12
from remote controller.
6 Run mode 13 Heating mode locking: only heating mode is effective.
7 Weekly-timer off 14 Cooling mode locking: only cooling mode is effective
15 Indoor unit malfunction

Control System 150

Control System

3.3
3.3 LCD ic
con description

Icon Meaning
M Icon Meaning

Auto mod
de Fan only mode

Cooling mode
m Dry modee

Heating mode
m Fan speeed

Electric auxiliary
a hea
ating Lock heaat mode

Lock cool mode Wireless controller lo

ock

Lock keyboard Set modee

Query mo
ode Operatingg result

Weekly timer off All units aare selected

d

Online state Protectioon code follo

ows

Error cod
de follows Set tempperature

Correspo
onding period
d Room tem
mperature

Temp. of the middle o

of Temp. off the outlet of
o the
evaporato
or condenseer

Temp. Off outdoor pip

pe Monday

Tuesday Wednesdday

Thursday
y Friday

Saturday
y Sunday

151
1 Control Systtem
 Control System

 The main interface off the weekly--timer centra

al controller (user interfa
ace)
1) Under the o
other pages,, press to return tto the main interface.
i
2) Under the o
other pages,, automatica
ally return to the main interface when no operattion for a perriod of time.
3) The main in
nterface disp
plays the on--line conditio
on of the ind
door unit.

Sixty
y-one indoor uniits
are on-line.
o

Date
Th
he on-line cond
dition of the in door unit

 Setting intterface of single weekly

y-timer centrral controllerr
1) Under the m
main interfacce, press to select to the
e single settting interface
e.
2) Automaticallly return to the main intterface when
n no operation for a period of time.
3) Set the runn
ning state off single air conditioner
c u
under this pa
age.
Set tempratture
Setting Set Suc
ccessfully
Indoor Nett-address 20 degree Coo
ol

Room Temprature
T
28 deg
gree High Spee
ed

Control System 152

2
Control System

 Setting interface of weekly timer parameters of single weekly-timer central controller

1) Under the main interface, press to display the parameter setting interface of single weekly timer.
2) Automatically return to the main interface if no operation is performed for a period of time.
3) Under this page, set the weekly timer parameters of single air conditioner, including startup time, shutdown
time, the running mode of this period, temperature and wind speed.
4) One air conditioner can be at most set with four periods in one day from Monday to Sunday.

Period1

Monday

Time on, Time off

 Unified setting interface of the weekly-timer central controller

1) Under the main interface, press to display the unified setting interface.
2) Automatically return to the main interface if no operation is performed for a period of time.
3) Set the running mode of all air conditioners under this page, including mode, temperature and Fan speed.

Set unsuccessfully
All indoor

Weekly-timer off Lock Lock

remoter Cool

153 Control System

 Control System

3.3.4 Button names

Set Time

On/Off Weekly-timer Query Airconditiner Set Airconditioner

Confirm to save Enter the setting page Used to select the air Set Set Set Swing
of the weekly timer conditioner to be set Run Mode Fan Speed
or queried

Reset Set Lock

1) On/Off button
Press the ON/OFF button. All air conditioners will be shut down if they are running; on the contrary, they will be
started up. If you press the button for less than 5 seconds, the startup mode is the last running mode of the air
conditioner. If you press the button for more than 5 seconds, the startup mode is cooling, fan runs at high
speed, and the set temp. is 24 degrees.

2) SET button
Press the SET button, and then select set single or set all. Set single indicates to set the parameter (such as
mode/ temperature/fan speed/ weekly timer) of a single selected air conditioner. Set all indicates to set the
parameter of all air conditioners controlled by the central controller.

3) Query button
Press the Query button can query the running condition of the unit, such as on or off, temperature setting,
indoor temperature, fan speed and running mode. Press direction buttons (Up, Down, Left and Right button)
can select the unit which you want to query.

4) Up, Down, Left, Right buttons (Direction buttons)

When querying or setting the indoor units, press these four buttons to select the indoor units that we need to
set or queried. When setting the weekly timer, it is used for selecting the day of the week and the time of
startup and shutdown.

5) Add button
When querying the indoor unit, press the Add button can query more parameter of the indoor unit. When
setting the indoor unit, it is for adjust the setting temperature. When setting the weekly timer, it is for adjust the
time of startup and shutdown.

Control System 154

Control System

6) Reduce button
When querying the indoor unit, press the “Reduce” button to query more parameter of the indoor unit. When
setting the indoor unit, it is for modifying the setting temperature. When setting the weekly timer, it is for
modifying the time of startup and shutdown.

7) Mode button
When setting the indoor unit, it is used for setting the running mode of the indoor unit which includes auto,
cooling, heating, fan mode, dry and shutting down.

8) Fan button
When setting the indoor unit, it is for setting the wind speed of the indoor unit which includes high speed,
middle speed, low speed and automatic speed.

9) Swing button
In setting the indoor unit, it is for setting the swing function of the indoor unit.

10) Lock button

When setting, press the Lock button to lock the remote controller of all or single indoor unit. Press the Query
button and hold under the main page, then repress the Lock button again to lock the keyboard of the central
controller; press the Mode button and then press the Lock button again will lock the running mode.

11) Reset button

The central controller re-scans the indoor unit in the network as recharging after power off.

12) Program button

Under the main page, press the Program button can set the weekly timer of single or all indoor units. Press the
Query button and hold, and then press the Program button to query the weekly timer parameters.

13) Weekly button

Under the main page, press the Weekly button can start up or shut down the weekly timer function.

14) Time button

Under the main page, press the Time button for 5 seconds can enter the time-modifying state, and then press
Add or Reduce button will change the setting time. Press Left or Right can select minute/ hour/ day/ month/
year. Finally, press the Confirm button to save the modification.

15) Confirm button

Save data and send the command required to the indoor unit, such as setting the mode of the air conditioner.

16) Cancel button

Cancel the last operation and return to the last interface.

155 Control System

 Control System

3.3
3.5 Operatting the ce
entralized
d controlle
er

(1)) How to se
et the runnin
ng state of the air cond
ditioner?

Under t he main inte

erface

1. Press Set to enter the e setting status interfacce of single air

conditioner. Presss the button repeatedlly to select Single
S and All
nately, display “Set”.
altern
If you
u select Singgle, press to sele
ect one.

2. Selecting “All” indicates too set the runnning status

s of all air
conditioners, and “All” is disp
played. Seleecting “Singlle”displays
the adddress of the
e air conditio
oner; for example, if thee air conditiioner
whose address is 12 is selected,“12#” is s displayed.

3. Pres
ss to select runn ning mode: automatic, cooling,
c hea
ating, air
supply, dehumidifiication, or shutdown.
s Iff you select “Shutdown”
mode, press to send shutdown
s c
command, finishing shu
utdown
setting.

4. If you
y select thhe cooling orr heating moode,
presss Add Reeduce to adjust a the tem
mperature (tthe scope is
withinn 17-30 degree). No tem
mperature addjustment forr other modees.

5. Press Fan to regulate winnd speed, whhich can be selected am

mong
automaatic speed, low speed, middle
m speedd and high speed.
s

6. Press Swinng to open or close swing。

7. Press Conffirm to save thhe above settting and sendd to the

coorresponding air conditioneer, finally finissh setting.

Control System 156

6
Control System

(2) How to query the running state of the air conditioner?

Under the main interface

[Link] to enter the query status of single air conditioner, display "Query";
Press to select one air conditioner.

2. Press Add Reduce to view more parameters of the air conditioner.

(3) How to lock and unlock the remote controller of the air conditioner?

Under the main interface

1. Press Set to enter the setting status interface of single air condit ioner,
press the button repeatedly to select “Single” and “All” alt ernately,
displaying “Set”. If you select “Single”, press to select one.

2. Selecting “All” indicates to set the running status of all air conditioners,
and “All” is displayed. Selecting “Single” displays the address of the air
conditioner; for example, if the air conditioner whose address is 12 is selected,
“12# ” is displayed.

3. P ress to send the lock or unlock com m and of the rem ote controller to the
corresponding air conditioner and finish setting.

(4) How to lock and unlock the mode of the air conditioner?

Under the main interface

1. Press and hold , then press , enter the setting

interface of the mode-locking.

2. press to select cooling-locking or heating-locking,press

to send mode-locking command.

3. If the air conditioner is in the mode of locking, press to

select cooling-locking and heating-locking indicating,press to
send the selected unlock command to all air conditioners

157 Control System

 Control System

(5) How to lock and unlock the key board of the weekly-timer central controller?

Under the main interface

1. Press and hold , and then press .

2. The keyboard will be locked if it is unlocked.

If it is locked, it will be unlocked.

(6) How to set the function and relevant parameters of the weekly timer of the air conditioner?

Under the main interface

1. P ress to enter the setting status interface of single air conditioner,

press the button repeatedly to select “S ingle” and “A ll” alternately, displaying
“Set”;if select “sigle” ，press to select one.

Press to select air conditioner to Press to cancel the selection and

the next step return to the last step.

2. Selecting “All” indicates to set the weekly timer parameters of all air conditioners,
and “All” is displayed. Selecting “Single” displays the address of the air conditioner;
for example, if the air conditioner whose address is 12 is selected, “12 # ” is displayed.

3. Press to select the day of the week

Press to select the day of the week Press to cancel the selection and
to the next step return to the last step.

4. Set the parameter of period 1, including shutdown time, startup time, running mode, Fan speed
and temperature. First of all, set the startup and shutdown time. Press to select the
startup time and shutdown time. Press to modify the startup and shutdown time.

Press to save the parameter of the Press to cancel the set of period 1 and
period 1 to the next step return to the last step.

Control System 158

Control System

5. Press to select running mode: automatic, cool, heat, Fan-only , Dry, or Off. If you select the cool ,
automatic or heat mode, press to adjust the temperature (the scope is within 17 - 30 degree).
Press to regulate Fan speed, which can be selected among automatic speed,low Speed,middle speed
and high speed

Press to save the parameter of the Press to cancel the set of period 1 and
period 1 to the next step return to the last step.

6. Finish the weekly timer parameter setting of the air conditioner within period 1 of the day of the week.

7. Continually set periods 2, 3, 4 according to the above operation.

8. After finishing the setting of the periods, continually select the day of the week needed to be set,
to set the weekly timer parameter from Monday to Sunday, seven days in total.

Finish setting

(7) How to turn off the weekly timer setting of a period of an air conditioner?

Under the main interface

1. P ress to ente r the se tting status interfa ce of sing le air co nditio ner,
pre ss the bu tton repe ated ly to select “S ing le” an d “A ll” alternately, displa ying
“S e t”;if sele ct “sigle” ，p ress to se lect on e.

Press to select air conditioner to Press to cancel the selection and

the next step return to the last step.

2. Selecting “All” indicates to set the weekly timer parameters of all air conditioners,
and “All” is displayed. Selecting “Single” displays the address of the air conditioner;
for example, if the air conditioner whose address is 12 is selected, “12 # ” is displayed.

3. Press to select the day of the week

Press to select the day of the week Press to cancel the selection and
to the next step return to the last step.

159 Control System

 Control System

4. Set the parameter of period 1, including shutdown time, startup time, running mode, Fan speed
and temperature. First of all, set the startup and shutdown time. Press to select the
startup time and shutdown time. Press to modify the startup and shutdown time.

Press to save the parameter of the Press to cancel the set of period 1 and
period 1 to the next step return to the last step.

5. Press to select running mode: automatic, cool, heat, Fan-only , Dry, or Off. select“Off” mode.

Press to save the parameter of the Press to cancel the set of period 1 and
period 1 to the next step return to the last step.

6. Finish shutting down the weekly timer function of the air conditioner within period 1 of the day of the week.

7. Continually shut down the timer during periods 2, 3, 4 according to the above operation.

Finish setting

（8）How to query the weekly timer setting parameter of the air conditioner?

Under the main interface

1. Press and hold , then press in two second to enter the query
status of single air conditioner, Press to select the air conditioner that
needs to be queried.

Press t o select air conditioner to Press Cancel t o cancel the selection and
the next step return to the last step.

2. Press to select the day of the week

Press t o select the day of the week Press Cancel t o cancel the selection and
to the next step return to the last step.

3. Press to select the weekly timer setting parameter of the queried periods 1, 2, 3, 4.

Query the weekly timer parameters of any indoor unit within any time according to the above operation.

Control System 160

Control System

（9）How to start up or shut down the weekly timer function of all air conditioners?

Under the main interface

1. Press Weekly

2. If the weekly timer function is shut down, then start up it;

if the weekly timer function is started up, and then shut down it.

3. If the weekly timer function is shut down, idsplay “Weekly Timer Off”

（10）How to modify the system time?

Under the main interface

1. Press for 5 seconds, enter the time-setting interface.

2. Press for a long time to select the minute/ hour/ day/

month/ year that need to be modified.

3. First, press to select the Year that needs to be modified.

4. Press modify “Year”

5. then Press to select the “Month” that needs to be modified.

6. Press modify “Month”

161 Control System

 Control System

7. Press again to select the “Day” that needs to be modified

8. Press modify “Day”

9. Press to select the “Hour” that needs to be modified.

10. Press to modify “Hour”

11. Press again to select the “Minute” that need to be modified.

12. Press to modify “Minute”

[Link] to save the modification

Notes:
There is always a time interval between 2 periods. This means the period’s off time should not be the same as the
stating time of nest work period. The least time interval should be 10 minutes, or else the units cannot work as our
interval.

(11) Fault and protection codes

Fault code Content
EF Other faults
EE Water level detection malfunction
ED Reserved
EC Cleaning malfunction
EB Inverter module protection
EA Current of compressor is too large (4 Times)
E9 Communication malfunction between main board and display board
E8 Wind blowing speed is out of control
E7 EEPROM error
E6 Detection of current direction alternating is abnormal
E5 T3 or T4 senor of discharge of compressor fails down
E4 T2B sensor malfunction
E3 T2A sensor malfunction
E2 T1 sensor malfunction
E1 Communication malfunction

Control System 162

Control System

E0 Phase sequence disorder or loss of power phase

07# /
06# /
05# /
04# /
03# Communication malfunction between centralized controller and PC(gateway)
02# Communication malfunction between centralized controller and functional module
Communication malfunction between centralized controller and network interface
01#
module
00# Communication malfunction between network interface module and main control board

Protection code Content

PF Other protection
PE Reserved
PD Reserved
PC Reserved
PB Reserved
PA Reserved
P9 Reserved
P8 Compressor’s current is too large
P7 Voltage of power supply is too high or too low
P6 Pressure of discharge is too low
P5 Pressure of discharge is too high
P4 Temp. of discharge pipe is abnormal
P3 Temp. of compressor is abnormal
P2 Condenser high-temperature protection
P1 Anti-cool air or defrost protection
P0 Evaporator temperature protection

163 Control System

 Control System

3.3
3.6 Installation

Th
he thicknesss of the centtral controlle
er cable sha
all be adjusted according to the lenngth of the cable.
c A proper
cable tube sha
all be used to
t install the cable of the
e central con
ntroller.
Ins
sert the flat ttip screwdrivver into the recess
r he top panel of the case and slightlyy turn to open the top co
on th over
of the central ccontroller.

74
65

11 0
10 4

119
F
Fig.2
179
Plastic expansion
e tube Φ6X30 15 3
153
1 48

78
CCM09
OFFF COMON
GB845/
ST3.9X25--C-H(S)
78
78

4XØ6

4XR2.5

148

Figg.3 Fig.4

Control System 164

4
Control System

Emergency Open Swich,used to Emergency Stop Swich,used to

start up all air conditioners shut down all air conditioners
Communication interface
Power AC 220V to the indoor unit

Fig.5

Installation dimensions:
As shown in the figure
on the right side.
136
92

Installation screw
holes (4 holes)

70.5 48.5
83.5 Fig.6

165 Control System

 Control System

Rotatetheflatheadscrewdriver slightly
toopentheupper cover (at points).

Screws for fixing the centralized

controller (GB845/ST3.9*25)
Holder
Address X YE L N
bits Bit location Address range
(Fig.8)
~ 00 ~ 15 Power connector of the
OFF ON central controller 220V/AC
Upper
COM ON—COM:Emergency open switch,
cover
used to start up all air conditioners.
OFF—COM:Emergent stop switch,
Fig.7 used to shut down all air conditioners.
Communication interface with indoor interface
Connecting diagram of network-based air conditioning system
(There are two types of indoor units, namely indoor unit with external network interface module on the main
control board or built-in network interface module in the main control board.)

The shielded wire must

Matching resistance of be reliable grounded
communication end is 120Ω

Junction Box Junction Box Junction Box

Matching resistance of Indoor unit (MAX) Indoor unit (32) Indoor unit (10)
communication end is 120Ω
One centralized controller can be
connected to 64 indoor units as a maximum

POWER AC220V

Junction Box Junction Box

Indoor unit (0) Indoor unit (1)

Centralized controller

Control System 166

Control System

3.4 Unified
d ON/OFF contro
oller: KJR
R-90B

KJ
JR-90B is a unified centralized co
ontroller, wh
hich allows us to contrrol up to 166 indoor un
nits simply and
a
compactly. It commandss the indoor unit to w
work at only
y 2 modes, cooling aand heating. Besides this
t
commanding, users could
d also modiffy the indoo
or units work
king mode by
b the remotte wireless controller. This
T
controller offerrs the contro
oller function o bridge the units to the PC.
ns only and is disable to

3.4
4.1 Button
n name  Centralized Con
ntrol
Short press:
On
nly turn ON/O
OFF the lastt time
 Ope
erated indoor units.
ng press (3 seconds):
Lon
Can Turn ON/O
OFF all indooor units.
Ope
eration Mode
e Selection S
Switch (Coo
oling, Heating)
 Ove
erall/mono-co
ontrol the inddoor units
 Slee
ep and memory functionn
If no
o operation to
o be conduccted at the controller
c after 25
secon
nds, system would enteer to sleep mode,
m all indicators
are fa e displaying.
aded. Press any key to rrecovery the
 Com
mpatible with
h central conntrol.

(1)) Correspon
nding indoo
or unit tag
Up
p to 16 indoo
or units are controlled
c by
y one centra
alized contro
oller. If more
e than 16 inddoor units, th
he operation
n
wo
ould failure. Please set the
t indoor unit network a
address cod
des properly
y before use this controller. The
following table
e shows the relation betw
ween the tag
g and the co
orresponding
g network:
Airr condition la
abel A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4
B
Ne
etwork addre
ess 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Arii condition la
abel C1 C2 C3 C4 D1 D2 D3 D4
D
Ne
etwork addre
ess 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1
Th
he correspon
nding indicattion of the air conditione
er reflects th
he working mode
m of its inndoor unit, blue
b means
cooling or air ssupply mode
e, red means heating m
mode.

(2)) Single ind

door unit On
n/Off key
sers could prress this keyy to turn on or turn off th
Us he correspon
nding indoor unit. If the indoor units
s original mo
ode
o press this would turn it off. The interval for m
is on, modes shift--over is 6 se
econds, if intterval less th
han 6 secon
nds,
the would invalid.
e operation w
No
otes:
1. If the red lig
ght flashes quickly,
q it me
eans the corrresponding indoor unit malfunctionss.

167
7 Control Systtem
 Control System

2. If no one presses the keys of the controller, the controller would turn itself into power saving mode, in which
all the lights fade out. Press any key to stop this mode.
(3) Unified mode setting key
Press this key to set all the units’ mode. Only two modes can be set by this key. They are the cooling mode and
the heating mode. The details of the two modes are as follows:
Mode Temperature Fan speed Key light
Cooling 20℃ Hi speed Blue
Heating 28℃ Hi speed Red
Notes: The interval for modes shift-over is 6 seconds, if interval less than 6 seconds, the operation would
invalid. When the indoor unit’s working mode is changed by other device, such as remote controller, this
centralized controller could detect, and change the corresponding units tag to show the actual running mode.

(4) Unified On/Off key

This key has 2 ways to send commands:
Press for 3 seconds or more: To turn on or turn off all the indoor units those are connected to this controller.
Press for less than 3 seconds: to turn on or turn off the single unit that we ever controlled most latterly.
Notes: If this key’s light flash quickly, it means that the EEPROM malfunctions.

(5) Mode select

The system consists with heating and cooling modes; shift the modes by Mode button. The fluorescent light
indicating the current mode: Red is heating mode, which mode corresponding parameter have already set
unallowable to modify, if necessary, the parameter could modified by remote controller.
Notes:
1. The interval for modes shift-over is 6 seconds, if interval less than 6 seconds, the operation would be invalid.
[Link] starting temperature: Cooling 20℃, High fan speed, the corresponding
LED in the indoor unit will light(Blue); Heating 28℃,high fan speed, the corresponding LED in the indoor unit
will light(red). Red light flash rapidly means indoor unit malfunction.

Control System 168

Control System

3.4
4.2 Installation

※ Dimens
sions: 90*86
6*8mm

1) Please corrrect to conne

ect the 2-corre and 3-corre shielded wire
w to imbe
ed the wall.
2) When no le
ess than 3 pieces of KJR
R-90B installl nearly, plea
ase keep ov
ver 2m distannce each other to avoid
d
interfere.

※ KJR-90B
B should be connected in a hand-in
n-hand way to
t the indoor units. It dooes not conta
ains power
transform
ming functio
on, so this co
ontroller sho
ould obtain 5V
5 power fro
om the indooor units disp
play panel. In
n
fact, the
e display pan
nel usually has
h a port in which two of
o pins are th
he 5V and G
GND. These
e two pins ca
an
be connected to the
e KJR-90B/M
M.

(X/Y
Y/E) (X
X/Y/E) (X/Y/E) (X/Y/E)) (
(X/Y/E)

C /H

(+5V GND)
Indo
oor unit 1 In
ndoor unit 2 Indoor un
nit N Indoor unit 16
Ce
entralized co
ontroller

otes:
No
1) KJR-90B co
onnects maxx. 16 indoor units; otherrwise the operation is inv
valid.
2) Please corrrectly set network addre
ess of indoorr unit, and re
efer to the ad
ddress tablee above.
3) Any 2 indoo
or units’ netw
work address cannot be
e same; othe
erwise system will detecct only one of
o them.
4) Centralized controller could
c controll and gets po
ower from th
he displaying control caabinet in one
e of the sixte
een
ind
door units. Iff necessary to get powe
er from four-w
way cassettte, the transfformer has tto be changed, please see
s
the
e label in the
e back of the
e centralized
d controller.

169
9 Control Systtem
 Control System

※ Lights displays and error code

e
Lig
ght Blue Red Flassh
Sin
ngle On/Off key Cooling/Fa
an Heating
g IDU Error
Unnified On/Offf key EEPPROM Errorr
※ Installatio on step

ote: use scre

No ew to unpacck the bottom
m cover of K
KJR-90B/M.

Control System 170

0
Control System

Indoor unit
electric cabinet
The display
control board
component in
Indoor unit The butted joint the indoor unit
connected which is educed accessory
terminal from indoor unit
(Blow up)

Connective
X Y E
wires for the
Pre-embed a display control
shielded 3-core 5V board (accessory)
GND
wire in wall 5V The two wires’ color
as followings:

GN
D
GND: White
5V: Red

Pre-embed a
shielded 2-core
wire in wall
Blow up
X
Y E
5V The colors of the 5 wires
5
E V which educing from the
GN

X Y
D

centralized controller as
X
GN

EY followings:
D

GN D
5V
X: yellow GND:white
Y:orange　 5V:red
E:black

Notes:
1. KJR-90B/M uses a DC 5V power. Remember do not connect strong electricity power to KJR-90B/M, or the
controller may blow.
2. Please base on the arrow direction in above to install the bottom cover.

171 Control System

 Control System

3.5 Outdoor centra

alized monitor: M
MD-CCM0
02

 RS
S485 communication prrotocol
 Up ms, max.32 outdoor uniits can be
p to 8 system
onnected to the Networkk monitoring
co g and BMS.
 It can display the operatinng paramete
er of outdoorr
un
nits
 Ca
an display th
he error or pprotection co
ode of
ou
utdoor units.

3.5
5.1 Summ
marize of outdoor
o CC
CM

Th
he functionall only can be
e realized when the sysstem is in normal operation.

1) CCM02 can realize th

he central co
ontrol and da o outdoor units. One outtdoor CCM can
ata query to c connectt up
to 8 systtems and up
u to 32 ou
utdoor unitss by communication ports in outddoor PCB. And it ado
opts
wire-conn
necting meth
hod commun
nication to re
ealize centra t outdoor units in the same netwo
al control to the ork.

2) CCM can communica

ate with PC through RS
S485/RS232 converter. One p to 16 outdoor
O PC cann connect up
CCM and
d 16 indoor CCM. And one n be centralized control, managemeent and state query in the
o PC can
same mon
nitoring netw
work of all outdoor CCM CM and indoor /outdoor units.
M, indoor CC

3) The CCM
M and outdoo C and CCM adopt main-auxiliary co
or units, PC ommunicatioon. In the ne
etwork of CC
CM
and outdo
oor units, CC ain unit and outdoor uniits are the auxiliary unitss.
CM is the ma

3.5
5.2 Operattion

1) Description
n of Names
s and Functtions

◆ Power on o
or reset

Aftter the CCM

M is powered
d on or rese
et, all the se
egments of the
t LCD willl be displayeed and last for 3 secon
nds.
An
nd then disa
appear for 2 seconds. After
A this, the
e controller's
s system runs the norm
mal display mode,
m in wh
hich
CM would display the main page.
CC

◆ Network Arrea Addresss Setting

p to 16 CCM
Up M02 can be connected
c to
o the gatewa
ay or the PC
C. Each CCM
M02 can be viewed as a secondaryy or
sub-net of the network and distinguish
h themselve
es by their unique addre
ess. The adddress can be
e set in the key
k
panel and it ra
anges from 16-31.
1

Ad
ddress settin
ng method:

Control System 172

2
Control System

To differentiate the CCM02 and CCM03, the addresses of CCM02 range from 16-31. Every time we press the
address button of a CCM02, the corresponding CCM02's address increase by 1. When the address come to
the end 31, press the key again could make the address back to the starting address 16.

◆ Indicator Display

Indicator lamp will be on when the CCM is power on.

◆ CCM02 Locked

All the other buttons will not be on controlled anytime when pressing the CCM is locked. And unlock happens
when receiving the lock.

◆ Electric energy consumption query

CCM02 allows user check each outdoor units’ electricity consumption. To realize this function, each outdoor
unit should be installed with an ammeter. The ammeter DTS634/DTS636 can be purchased from Midea
Company.

2) Buttons and Functions

(1) Query button

Press it to enter into the query state.

(2) Previous button

On the query state, press it to query in default the running states of other online air-conditioners.

(3) Next button

On the query state, press it to query in default the running states of other online air-conditioners.

(4) Page up button

Pressing the Page Up button when choosing an online air-conditioner on the query state can display the
parameters in the previous page and this can be cycled.

173 Control System

 Control System

(5)) Page down button

Pre
ess the Pag
ge Down bu
utton when choosing a
an online air-conditioner on the quuery state can
c display the
parameters in the next page and this can be cycle
ed.

(6)) Set button

n

Pre
ess Set buttton enters th
he Set Page
e.

(7)) Mode buttton

Pre
ess the OK button to en
nter the Mod
de setting, an
nd select cirrcularly betw
ween Forcedd Cooling an
nd OFF state
e.

(8)) OK button
n

Pre
ess the OK button to co
onfirm all settting and sen
nd the corre
esponding aiir-conditioneers.

(9)) Lock butto

on

All the other button will no

ot be controlled anytime when press
sing the button, and unloock happens
s when presss it
again.

(10
0) Address Set button

In Set page, p
press the Set button repe
eatedly, the address willl be increas
sed one by oone. When the address is
equal 31 and yyou press on
nce more, th
he address w
will restart frrom 16.

3.5
5.3 Descriiption of LCD
L Scree
en

Control System 174

4
Control System
 Common
n Display Da
ata:

Display me
eans CCM is sending q uery order.

Display me
eans CCM is in commu
unication witth a PC, and
d it will be ooff in 20 sec
conds with no
n
communiccation.

Display eans CCM is in commu nication con

me nnection with
h the outdooor unit, and iti will be off in
20 second
ds with no communicati
c on.

e OK button in setting page

Press the p and wa
aiting for 4 seconds,
s uccess" or ""fail" will be shown in th
"su he
operation state area.

 Stand-by
y Page Disp
play:

Display means the total numb

ber of online
e modules

Display means the total nu

umber of online units

Stand-by Page can display

d the address of C
CCM with the
e address fo
ormat of "Adddr XX", here
e "XX" equa
als
the real address of CCM plus 16, and the ran
nge of "XX" is 16-31.

 Query Pa
age Display
y:

1) Query Page
e Display the
e query icon
n.

2) Displaying tthe address of selected outdoor uniit with and

a

3) Mode display: m
means cooling mode, means heating mode,
m means shut off, mean
ns

locking
g cool mode,, means
m lockin g heat mode
e.

otes: Lockin
No e and locking heating m
ng cool mode mode are res
served.

4) Fan speed Display: means low spe

eed, means middle
m speeed, and mean
ns
hig
gh speed.

5) Compresso
or State Disp
play: COMP. 1 2 3 4 5 6

6) Electromagnetism Valvve Display: EMV.

E 123456

7) Four-Way V
Valve Displayy.
8) Defrost Disp
play: Defrosst.
Return will display: OIL RETURN.
9) When Oil R R
10) Page 0 willl display the
e consumption of electriic energy ico
on "ELECTR
RIC ENERG d the number.
GY Kwh" and
11) Page 1 willl display the
e input powe uency Hz" and the numbber.
er frequencyy with "Frequ
12) Page 2 willl display the
e total numb
ber of indoorr units.

175
5 Control
C System
m
 Control System
13) Page 3 will display the icon "TEMP.℃", "T3" and the number.
14) Page 4 will display the icon "TEMP.℃", "T4" and the number.
15) Page 5 will display the icon "TEMP.℃", "T6" and the number.
16) Page 6 will display the discharge temperature of compressor 1 icon "TEMP.℃", "C1" and the number.
17) Page 7 will display the discharge temperature of compressor 2 icon "TEMP.℃", "C2" and the number.
18) Page 8 will display the discharge temperature of compressor symbol C3 with "TEMP.℃", "C3" and the
number.
19) Page 9 will display the compressor current value 1 icon "CURRENT A","1" and the number.
20) Page 10 will display the compressor current value 2 icon "CURRENT A", "2” and the number.
21) Page 11 will display the compressor current value 3 icon “CURRENT A", "3" and the number.
22) Page 12 will display the digital capacity icon "DIGITAL CAPACITY" and the number.
23) Page 13 will display the openness of electromagnetism valve 1 icon with "VALVE OPENNESS”,”1” and
the number.
24) Page 14 will display the openness of electromagnetism valve 2 icon "VALVE OPENNESS", "2" and the
number.
25) Page 15 displays the most advanced malfunction icon "MALFUNCTION" and the code.
26) Page 16 will display the most advanced protection icon "PROTECTION" and the code.
Notes:
The page will increase or decrease by 1 every time you press "PAGE UP" or "PAGE DOWN"..
Select the online outdoor unit by Press the "previous" or "next" freely.

 SET PAGE DISPLAY:

1) Set Page Displays "Set”

2) Mode display: Pressing MODE button to enter into MODE set, and select circularly between Forced

Cooling and state.

3) Set page displays the address of selected outdoor units and module.

4) Press the OK button to confirm all setting and send the corresponding air conditioners.

5) "Successful" or "Unsuccessful" shown in the operation state area indicates whether the transmission is
confirmed or not.

Control System 176

Control System
 Malfunctiion and Pro
otection Co
ode Table

Error Cod
de Error Conte
ents Error Code Errorr Contents
Outdoor Adding Malffunction
H3 Pd Oil Return
R
(Valid Fo
or Host Unit))
Outdoor Decreasing Malfunction
n
H2 PA Defrrost Protectiion
(Valid Fo
or Host Unit))
H1 Net Com
mmunication Malfunction
n P8 Com
mpressor Cuurrent 3rd Prrotection
EF Other Ma
alfunction P7 Com
mpressor Cuurrent 2rd Prrotection
E4 T4 Temp
p Sensor Ma
alfunction P5 Con
ndenser Highh Temp Prottection
E3 T3 Temp
p Sensor Ma
alfunction P4 Disc
charge Pipe Temp Prote
ection
Commun
nication Malffunction
E2 P3 Com
mpressor Cuurrent 1st Prrotection
between indoor and outdoor uniit
E1 Phase Sequence Ma
alfunction P2 Disc
charge Low--Pressure Protection
Outdoor unit commu
unication
E0 P1 Disc
charge High--Pressure Protection
P
Malfuncttion
PF Other Prrotection P0 Com
mpressor Higgh Temp Pro
otection
PE Oil Balan
nce

3.5
5.4 Installation

1. Basic Requ
uirements

1) Applicable
e Power Volltage Range
e: Input Volta
age 220~240
0V/AC.

2) AC Input Power Frequency: 50Hz

z/60Hz.

3) Working A
Ambient Tem
mp.:-15°C -+
+43°C

4) Working A
Ambient Hum
midity: RH40
0%~RH90%
%.

2. Dimensions: 120*120**15mm

177
7 Control
C System
m
 Control System
3. Wiring sketch map of MD-CCM02 and outdoor units
These 2 ways are both available and the total number of outdoor unit must be≤32 in one controller.
1st way:

Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit

Central controller
nd
2 way

Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit

Central controller

The MD-CCM02 wiring ports are as follows. F1, F2, E joints are used for PC connection. K1, K2, E joints are
used for outdoor unit connections. E joint is the common terminal.
Outdoor central controller
joint sample

F1 F2 E K1 K2
Computer communication Air-conditioner
connecting communication connecting

4. System configure
With MD-CCM02, we could both centrally display the outdoor units’ running state and bridge up to 32 outdoor
units to the PC monitoring software or BMS--Building Management System. In fact, for the purpose of
connecting the indoor units to the PC or the gateway, which makes the outdoor units visible on the display
panel, MD-CCM02/E is necessary.

The location of CCM02 in the network is as follows.

Control System 178

Control System

RS232 terminal:
Plug in the COM port of computer

RS485 invert RS232

Connect to Good method of peeling communcation

other
central Connect matched R120Ω in the
controller front-end communication

Connect matched R120Ω in the

rear-end communication

A ir-conditioner communication
Computer communication connecting connecting

Masking end
reliable grounding
Masking end

Communication between
KWH meter and outdoor
Main control panel
M ain cont ro l panel
reliable grounding
Main control panel Power Main control panel
supply

NO.1 outdoor
monitor
NO.1 outdoor unit NO.8 outdoor unit NO.32 outdoor unit
NO.18 outdoor unit
Power input
KWH meter
Connect matched R120Ω in the

Notice：when the KWH meter

is connected to outdoor unit，
you can read energy Connect matched R120Ω in the
rear-end communication

Air-conditioner communication
Computer communication connecting connecting

Main control panel Main control panel Main control panel Main control panel

NO.6 outdoor
monitor
NO.1 outdoor unit NO.6 outdoor unit NO.8 outdoor unit NO.32 outdoor unit

Connect matched R120Ω in the front-end

Connect matched R120Ω in the

rear-end communication
Masking end
reliable grounding

A ir-conditioner communication
Computer communication connecting connecting

M a i n c o n t ro l p a n e l Main control panel Main control panel Main control panel

NO.16 outdoor
monitor
NO.1 outdoor unit NO.6 outdoor unit NO.8 outdoor unit NO.32 outdoor unit

Outdoor sample Outdoor sample

Main control K1 K2 E Main control K1 K2 E

panel panel
Outdoor unit Outdoor unit

Notes：
1. One computer can connect 16 outdoor central monitors.
2. One outdoor central monitor can connect up to 8 refrigerant systems and 32 outdoor units.
3. You need connect R120 in the front and rear of monitor system.
4. Communication wire masking end assure reliable grounding.
Remarks
(1) In the wiring, the part from Rs485 to Rs232 is only needed when connecting with PC. And one PC can
connect maximum 16 outdoor MD-CCM02 and 16 indoor MD-CCM03. The addresses of MD-CCM03 ranges

179 Control System

 Control Syste
em
fro
om 0 to 15, w
while the MD
D-CCM02 on
nes from 16 to 31. And the address of any two ooutdoor CCM
M can't be th
he
same, or the ssystem can'tt work norma
ally.
(2)) One outdoo ed monitoring MD-CCM0
or centralize 02 can conn
nect maximu
um 32 outdooor units, while one indoo
or
MD
D-CCM03/E can connecct maximum 64 indoor u
units.
(3)) The addresss of outdoo
or CCM and the addresss of outdoor units are se
et by manuaal.

5. Structure a
and compos
sition

Back Coverr Turn a screwdriver at the concavee on bottom pa

anel
of the
e Wired Contro
oller to remove the Back Covver

Top Cov
ver

L
LCD Holes match
he with the
86X86 Wiring box

Board

Bottom Cover

Wood Mounting
W
Sc
crew (M4X20)

When n installing thee Wired Contro oller, you should

d Whhen installing the Wired Controller
adjusst the bottom of
o the Wired Co ontroller Board Cov ver,be sure the
ere is a hole in the wall
to the
e Wired Contro oller Back Cove er which shouldd to avoid the Wired
W Controlleer Back
be fix
xed first, then press
p the otherr end of the Cov ver being fixeed directly to the
t wall
Wiredd Controller Bo oard. which is not allowwed for the Wire Joint
exttrudes out of the Wired Controller
Bac ck Cover

6. Power supply

MD
D-CCM02 uses a powe
er adaptor to
o obtain pow
wer supply from
f the norrmal AC [Link] to connect
the
e adaptor’s cconnector

7. Query and error codes

Pre
ess QUERY
Y button to start
s the que
ery function . Then pres VOIS and N EXT button to select th
ss the PREV he
outdoor units that want to
o check. Pre
ess PAGE U
UP button 15
5 times to display
d the ccorrespondin
ng outdoorss’s
errror code or 1
16 times to display
d the protection
p co
odes.

Control System 180

0
Control System

4.. Gatewa
ay

D-LonGW64
MD 4 MD--CCM08 CCM-18
8A IMM44
41V4PA512 CCM15

4.1 LonWo
orks BMS
S gatewa
ay: MD-L
LonGW64
4

Th
he new LonW
Works gatew
way MD-LonGW64/E ha
as been com
mpliance with
h LonWorks standard an
nd can be
e LonWorks network dirrectly. It can connect muultiple refrige
connected up to 64 indoorr units to the eration
sys
stems and d
do not need to connect CCM03.
C Forr full V4 plus
s system can be conneccted CCM03
3, and it musst
be connected from outdoo
or unit’s XYE and the old indoor units or V4 indooor units cann
E, the new a not be applie
ed
to this function
n.
MD 4 helps other LonWorks devices gatthering the information from
D-LonGW64 f the Middea central A/C,
A and help
setting the indoor units’ wo
orking mode
e.
 Connect C
Central A/C system to LonWorks
L ne
etwork.
 Easily dow
wnload the program
p on line.
 LonGW64
4 gateway applies
a non-polar twisted
d pair lines,, which mak Works network
kes connectiing to LonW
easily.
 o bridge the indoor units
Be able to s to the BMS
S.

181
1 Control
C System
m
 Control System
4.1.1 General function

Monitoring Controlling
ON/OFF state report Mode setting for single unit
Running mode state report Mode setting for all units
Fan speed state report Stop setting for single
Set temp. value report Emergency stop for single unit
Indoor temp. value repot Fan speed setting for single unit
Error state report Fan speed setting for all units
Online/offline state report Temp. setting for single unit
Quality of connection state report Temp. setting for all units

4.1.2 System configure

Indoor units can be connected to the BMS system through MD-LonGW64, and we can gather all the units’
information and control the indoor units. As a result, the indoor units need firstly connecting to the computer
to make a central monitoring system. The composition of the whole network is as follows:
(1) Connection method 1: Suitable for all of VRF air conditioner systems and connect max.64 indoor units.

MD-LonGW64/E

X,Y,E X,Y,E X,Y,E X,Y,E

RS485

BMS system

(2) Connection method 2: Only suitable for V4 plus system and connect max.64 indoor units. The outdoor
unit must be set to auto addressing mode, and it will be effective after about 6 minutes.

Control System 182

Control System

System 1
MD-Lo
onGW64/E
P,Q,E X,Y,E X,
X,Y,E X,Y,E X,Y,E

R
RS485 X,Y,E

P,Q,E

System 2

P,Q,E

System N
BMS system

No
otes:
If there
t are a few MD-Lon
nGW64 dev
vices to com
mpose a Lon
nWorks netw
work, the LoonWorks terrminals of th
he
MD
D-LonGW64
4 are able to be connectted in the ha
and-in-hand way. It can be
b connecteed up to 64 in
ndoor units to
t
e LonWorks network no matter whic
the ch system th
he indoor un
nit is from as
s long as thee address is different

4.1
1.3 Conne
ecting porrts

LO ON+ port: The

ON- and LO T ports should be co
onnected to
o the compu
uter’s COM port, using
g the RS-23
32
communicative
e standard.
XY These ports use a rem
YE ports: T movable con
nnecting way Works network
y to help user connectt the LonW
conveniently.
OWER: Thiss port should
PO d be connectted to the AC
C 220V pow
wer adaptor.

183
3 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
4.1
1.4 Extern
nal View

Dim
mensions: 3
319*251*61m
mm

No e are three installation methods a

otes: There as the follow
wing figure. Don’t instaall the unit in any othe
er
orientation.

Control System 184

4
Control System

4.2 BACne
et® BMS
S gateway
y: MD-CC
CM08

MD
D-CCM08 iss a gateway to connect the
t indoor u nits and outtdoor units to
o the BACneet. BACnet stands
s for th
he
Bu
uilding Autom
mation and Control
C Netw
work. MD-CC
CM08 gathe
ers the inform
mation of thee IDU and ODU.
O Besides,
MD
D-CCM08/E is able to send the com
mmand to the
e units.
 e to bridge the indoor and outdooor units to the BACne
Be able et
protocoll BMS.
 Also be able to con
nnect the ind
door and ouutdoor units only, withou
ut
the BMS
S.
 Containss 4 groups of RS485 communicaation ports and able to
o
connectt up to 256 in
ndoor units or
o 128 outdooor units ins
stead.
 User ca n check the e and changge their settings via loca
e units’ state al
networkk.
 With the
e WEB service control.

4.2
2.1 Functiions description

MD
D-CCM08 ga ACnet ports ffor Building Management System ( BMS) and air
ateway provvides the BA a conditione
er
to realize the ssystems inte
egration. It also
a can be cconnected with
w the Mide
ea VRF indeependently.
MD
D-CCM08 bu
uilt-in the BA
ACnet function module and WEB page
p services. It supportts BACnet/IP
P access an
nd
loc
cal web brow
wser accesss. It can conttrol and mon
nitor up to 25
56 indoor un
nits or 128 ooutdoor units
s.

4.2
2.2 System
m configure

※ CCM08 and the BM

MS control system
s musst be in the same IP su
ubnet segmeent, and you
u need to se
et
configurration before
e you using.
※ After IP setting, you
u can modify
y the CCM08
8 IP through WEB functiion.
※ The defa
ault adminisstrator accou
unt is "admin
n" and passw
word is "123
345".
※ Default IP address: [Link]
8
※ MD-CCM
M08 is able
e to connec
ct up to 4 g
groups of RS485
R communicative network. Each port ca
an
connect up to 64 ind
door units orr up to 32 ou
utdoor units and 8 refrig
gerant system
ms.
※ If there are a few MD-CCM08
M applied in t he system, MD-CCM08
8 can be coonnected to the HUB an
nd
then con
nnected to th ng system a nd BMS.
he monitorin

185
5 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
otes: MD-CC
No CM08 and the
t BMS computer musst be at the same subnet address ffield. Or els
se, the devicce
cannot work normally. The
e default add
dress of CC
CM08 is set to
t be under the
t segmennt "192.168.1
1.*".

4.2
2.3 Conne
ecting porrts and fun
nctions

Ethe
ernet interfa
ace, connec
ct
with
h BACnet/IP network
Four groups of 485 interfaaces, each
one connect
c with
h a universaal BACnet

Ethernet portt is an Etherrnet interface

e base on th
he BACnet network
n prottocol. Conneect this port with the
BA
ACnet HUB, then the de
evice connec
ct to the HUB
B can comm CM08.
municate with the MD-CC
Fo
our groups o orts: Each port
of RS485 po p can be cconnected directly
d YE ports of inndoor units or the K1K2
to XY 2E
ports of the ou
utdoor units; each port can CCM03 or one
c also be cconnected to one indoor controller C o outdoor
mo
onitor CCM0
02 through F1F2E
F ports, and the ad
ddress of ind must be set to zero (0)
door controller CCM30 m
wh
hich need to connect witth MD-CCM08.

※ Reset settting
n, short connect the porrt 1 and porrt 2 can rese
Aftter power on way to the fa ctory setting
et the gatew g if you need
d.
Th
he connectio
on method as following:

Control System 186

6
Control System
4.2
2.4 Netwo
ork example

※ Each po
ort can connect up to 64
4 indoor unitss or up to 32
2 outdoor un
nits and 8 reefrigerant systems.
※ Each po
ort can be co
onnected dirrectly to XYE
E ports of indoor units or the K1K2E
E ports of the outdoor
units.
※ Each po
ort can also be
b connecte
ed to one ind o one outdooor monitor CCM02
door controller CCM03 or
through F1F2E portts, and then the addresss of indoor controller
c CC
CM30 must bbe set to zerro (0) and th
he
addresss of outdoor monitor CCM
M02 must b
be set to 16.
※ When co o the indoor CCM contro
onnecting to oller via XYE
E ports of ma
aster outdooor unit of eve
ery refrigerant
system. Notice that in this case, the outdooor unit must be set to auto addreessing mode,
, and it willl
be effective afterr about 6 minutes.
m

187
7 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
4.2
2.5 WEB a
access

MD
D-CCM08 ca
an offer WEB service, which
w allows users acces
ss the gatew
way from thee local comp
puter networrk.
Type the addre CCM08 in the explorer’ss address fie
ess of MD-C eld and users can view tthen MD-CC
CM08’s
connecting sta
ate or chang
ge the workin
ng state of t he indoor un
nits. The inte
erfaces are as follows:

No
otes:
1. To save the air condition
ner’s running data; an S
SD card is ne
eeded but no
ot included iin this produ
uct. Users ca
an
purchase one from the ma ards of differrent volume can save different perioods of runnin
arket. SD ca ng data.
No
ormally an S
SD card of 1 GB is able to data of more
t save the d e than 1 yea
ar.
2. Do not operrate the air-cconditioner frequently,
f fo
or avoiding the
t operating state wouuld be differe
ent from the
expected state
e. The opera
ation time interval betwe t same airr-conditioner should be
een differentt objects in the
over 10~20 se
econds and ensure
e that the air cond
ditioner state anged timeli ness and efffectiveness.
e can be cha

4.2
2.6 Netwo
ork setting
g

Th
here is an Etthernet (Eth0
0) port in the
e controller. The Etherne
et port is the
e network poort of BACne
et/IP.
IP address of Eth0 has be
een set "192
[Link]" be
efore ex-facttory, please modify the aaddress of MD-CCM08
M
and make sure
e that the ad
ddress is in the
t same su
ubnet with th
he BMS com
mputer beforre used.
Mo
oreover, the default adm
ministrator ac
ccount to log
gin the MD-C Admin", defaault password "12345".
CCM08 is "A
If the
t gateway and PC in different netw
work segmentt, you need to
t replace IP
P address 1 [Link] to
t your IP
address first.
Fo
or example: tthe new IP address
a is [Link], subnet mas
sk 255.255.2
255.0 and gaateway 10.4
46.1.1.
Aftter configura
ation, must click
c the "Ap
pply" and "Re
eboot" key to
t restart the
e CCM08.

Control System 188

8
Control System

4.2
2.7 Available BMS

MD
D-CCM08 ha
as a wonderrful adaptab
bility to the B
BMS. It can be
b connecte
ed to many ccompany’s building
b
ma
anagement ssystem softw
ware. We ca
an get the m
mainly suppo nformation ffrom the table below:
orting BMS in

Company BMS software Brand

SIMENS APPOGEE APOG

GEE
1 A N Y W H E RE

TM

2 TRANE Traceer Summit

TRACER SUMMTT

3 Honeywell A
Alerton

4 Schneider Anndover

5 Johnson MEETASYS

189
9 Control
C System
m
 Control System
4.2.8 BACnet setting

The BACnet network number only represents a BACnet Centralized Controller, and in the range from 0 to
65535. After setting must be restart the device.
BACnet network No. is the BACnet network No. that belong to the BACnet device of the MDV series air
conditioner which under connect with the BACnet centralized controller. For different centralized controller
must be set in different BACnet network NO., which is the unique number in the system could not be used for
represent the other device or BACnet centralized controller.
The calculation formula of air-conditioner indoor and outdoor unit instance number is as follow:
Device ID=BTXX;
B is the bus Number 0-3;
T means type, 0 is the indoor unit, 1is the outdoor unit;
XX is the indoor unit Number 0-63 or outdoor unit 0-31;

4.2.9 Object table

This device provides with different objects tables for the different types of outdoor units which are in using for
the MDV system. System will automatically identify the in using outdoor unit and generate the BACnet object.
 Indoor objects
This equipment provides with fourteen types of BACnet object, show as the following table, for connecting
with indoor unit using in the Building Management System (BMS) or other system which suitable for BACnet
Protocol.
Number Content
1 Device information
2 Operation mode
3 Fan state
4 Preset temperature
5 Indoor temperature
6 Timer on setting
7 Timer off setting
8 Swing function
9 Electric heater function
10 Malfunction state
11 Protection state
12 Mode query
13 Fan speed query
14 Temperature setting query

Control System 190

Control System
1. Device information
Property identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Device + AC number R
Object Name CharacterString Indoor_*_* R
Object Type BACnetObject Type Device R
Device Status BACnetDeviceStatus Operational R
Producer Name CharacterString AC Inc R
Producer Identifier Unisgned16 111 (Unsigned) R
Get one of these from
Protocol analysis:
Wall Mounted Type
Floor Type
Embedded Type
Duct Type
Floor & ceiling Type
Model Name CharacterString R
AC Auxiliary Machine
Type
Digital Mutil-connection
Type
Frequency Conversion
Type
Digital Rotation Type
Firmware Edition CharacterString 1.0 R
Application Software Edition CharacterString 1.0 R
Protocol Edition Unsigned 1 R

Protocol Correspondency Type Unsigned 3 R

Protocol Service Support BACnetServiceSupport ReadProperty R
Protocol Object Types Support BACnetObjectTypesSupport AnalogInput R
Object Array BACnetArray[n] Array all object R
Max length of APDU support Unsigned 1476 R
Segmentation support BACnetSegmentation Segmented both(0) R
Local Time Time R/W
Local Date Date R/W
APDU Segmentation Time over Unsigned 2000 O
APDU Time over Unsigned 3000 R
APDU Resend Times Unsigned 3 R
Device Address Binding AddressBinding ASN.1 ‘’ R
Select the "Object name" property of this selected object, it means
Operation instruction
"Model information" and cannot be set.

191 Control System

 Control System
2. Operation mode
Property identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Multistate-output 1 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_OMode Setting R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Multistate-output R
Description CharacterString Operation mode setting O
Current value Unsigned W
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
States number Unsigned 6 R
Auto
Cool
BACnet ARRAY[N] Heat
States text O
CharacterString Dehumidify
Fan Only
Stop
Priority Array BACnetPriorityArra NULL R
Release default Unsigned 6 R
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Feedback value Unsigned 6 O
Event enable BACnet Event TransitionBits TTT O
Affirm transform BACnet Event TransitionBits TTT O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Select the object "current value" property, and the property that is the
"operation mode" state. The property is writable and can be set on the "current
value" property. When "current value" property is "1" means running the
Heating mode; When "current value" property is "2", means running the
Operation instruction
Cooling mode; When "current value" property is "3" means running the
Dehumidify mode; When "current value" property is "4" means running the Fan
only mode; When "current value" property is "5" means running the Auto
mode; When "current value" property is "3" means Turn off.

Control System 192

Control System
3. Fan states
Property identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Multistate-output 2 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_OFan Speed R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Multistate-output R
Description CharacterString Fan Speed Setting O
Current value Unsigned W
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Status Flags BACnet Event States Normal R
Event states BOOLEAN F R
Out of service Unsigned 5 R
Stop
Auto
BACnet ARRAY[N]
States number Low O
CharacterString
Middle
High
Priority Array BACnetPriorityArra NULL R
Release default Unsigned 5 R
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Feedback value Unsigned 5 O
Event enable BACnetEvent TransitionBits TTT O
Affirm transform BACnetEvent TransitionBits TTT O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Select the object "current value" property, and the property that is the
"operation fan speed" state. The property is writable and can be set on the
"current value" property. When "current value" property is "1" means running
the high fan; When "current value" property is "2" means running the middle
fan; When "current value" property is "3" means running the low fan; When
Operation instruction
"current value" property is "4" means running the auto fan; When "current
value" property is "5" means fan stop.
For ensure the normal work of the air conditioner and during air conditioner
operating, if the "current value" is set to "5" (the order of stopping the fan), it
will be automatically ignored air conditioner system.

193 Control System

 Control System
4. Preset temperature
Property identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Analog-output 1 R
Object Name Character String AC_OTemp Setting R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Analog-output R
Description CharacterString Temperature Setting O
Current value REAL W
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Status Flags BACnet Event States Normal R
Event states BOOLEAN F R
Unit BACnet Engineering Units Degree-Celsius R
Minimum REAL 16 O
Maximum REAL 32 O
Priority array Value BACnetPriority Arra NULL R
Default release REAL 25 R
Distinguishability REAL 1 O
COV increment REAL 1 O
Low valve value REAL 16 O
High valve value REAL 32 O
Width valve value REAL 1 O
Enable valve value BACnet Limit Enable TT O
Event enable BACnet Event Transition Bits T T T O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Affirm transform BACnetEvent TransitionBits TTT O
Select the object "current value" property, and the property that is the current
"Setting temperature". The property is writable and can be set. The "Minimum"
Operation instruction means the lower limit value of the setting temperature; The "Maximum" means
the lower limit value of the setting temperature, and the setting temperature
value cannot exceed the upper limit value and lower limit value.

Control System 194

Control System
5. Room temperature
Property identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Analog-input 1 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_ITempIndoor R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Analog-input R
Current value REAL R
Description CharacterString Indoor temperature O
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Reliability BACnetReliability NO-FAULT-DETECTED R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
Unit BACnetEngineering Units Degree-Celsius R
Minimum REAL -20 O
Maximum REAL 100 O
Distinguishability REAL 1 O
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Low valve value REAL -20 O
High valve value REAL 100 O
Width valve value REAL 1 O
Enable valve value BACnetLimitEnable TT O
Event enable BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType event O
Select the object "current value" property, and the property that is the current
"Room temperature". The property is read only and cannot be set. The
"Minimum" means the lower limit value of the temperature; The "Maximum"
Operation instruction means the lower limit value of the temperature.
When "the current value is greater than the" upper limit value "or" less than
"lower limit value", the controller will automatically generate alarm warning to
BMS.

195 Control System

 Control System
6. Timer on setting
Property identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnet Object Identifier Analog-input 2 R
Object Name Character String AC_IOnTime R
Object Type BACnet Object Type Analog-input R
Current value REAL R
Description Character String On Time O
Status Flags BACnet Status Flags FFFF R
Event states BACnet Event States Normal R
Reliability BACnet Reliability NO-FAULT-DETECTED R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
Unit BACnetEngineering Units Hours R
Minimum REAL 0 O
Maximum REAL 24 O
Distinguishability REAL 0.25 O
Reliability BACnetReliability NO-FAULT-DETECTED R
Priority Array BACnetPriorityArra NULL O
Default release REAL 0 O
COV INCREMENT REAL 0.25 O
Low valve value REAL 24 O
High valve value REAL 0.5 O
Enable valve value BACnetLimitEnable TT O
Event enable BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Affirm transform BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Select the object "current value" property and the property that is the current
Operation instruction "Timer on time". The property is read only and cannot be set. "0" to "24"
means no timer to 24 hours timer.

Control System 196

Control System
7. Timer off setting
Property identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Analog-input 3 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_IOffTime R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Analog-input R
Current value REAL 0 R
Description CharacterString Off Time O
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
Unit BACnetEngineering Units Hours R
Minimum REAL 0 0
Maximum REAL 24 0
Distinguishability REAL 0.25 0
Priority Array BACnetPriorityArra NULL R
Default release REAL 0 R
COV INCREMENT REAL 0.25 O
Low valve value REAL 0 O
High valve value REAL 24 O
Width valve value REAL 0.5 O
Enable valve value BACnetLimitEnable TT O
Event enable BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Affirm transform BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Select the object "current value" property and the property that is the current
Operation instruction "Timer off time". The property is read only and cannot be set. "0" to "24"
means no timer to 24 hours timer.

197 Control System

 Control System
8. Swing function
Property identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Binary-output 1 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_OSwing R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Binary-output R
Current value BACnetBinaryPV inactive W
Description CharacterString Swing Setting O
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
Polarity BACnetPolarity Normal R
Inactive text CharacterString Turn off O
Active text CharacterString Turn on O
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
States change time BACnetDateTime O
States change times Unsigned O
Change time to 0 BACnetDateTime O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Feedback value BACnetBinaryPV inactive O
Event enable BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT R
Affirm transform BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Priority Array BACnetPriorityArra NULL R
Default release BACnetBinaryPV inactive R
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Select the object "current value" property and the property that is the "Swing
Operation instruction function" states. "Inactive” states means the swing function is turn off,
"active" states means the swing function is turn on.

Control System 198

Control System
9. Electronic heater function
Property identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Binary-output 2 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_OElecHeat R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Binary-output R
Current value BACnetBinaryPV Inactive W
Description CharacterString Elecheat Setting O
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
Polarity BACnet Polarity Normal R
Inactive text CharacterString Turn off O
Active text CharacterString Turn on O
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
States change time BACnetDateTime O
States change times Unsigned O
Change time to 0 BACnetDateTime O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Feedback value BACnet Binary PV inactive O
Event enable BACnetEvent TransitionBits TTT R
Affirm transform BACnetEvent TransitionBits TTT O
Priority Array BACnet Priority Arra NULL R
Default release BACnetBinaryPV inactive R
Notify Type BACnetNotify Type alarm O
Select the object "current value" property and the property that is the
"electric auxiliary heater function" states. "Inactive” states means the electric
auxiliary heater is turn off, "active" states means the electric auxiliary heater is
Operation instruction turn on.
For ensure the normal work of the air conditioner and during air conditioner
operating, if the "current value" is set to "electric auxiliary heater function"
turn on command, it will be automatically ignored air conditioner system.

199 Control System

 Control System
10. Error states
Property identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Multistate-input 1 R
Object Name Character String AC_IMalfunction R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Multistate-input R
Current value CharacterString Malfunction State O
Description Unsigned R
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
States number Unsigned 17 R
No E
EF
EE
ED
EC
EB
EA
E9
BACnet ARRAY[N]
States text E8 O
CharacterString
E7
E6
E5
E4
E3
E2
E1
E0
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Event enable BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Affirm transform BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Select the object "current value" property, and the property that is the
current "error states", the property is read only. If the "current value" is "No
E" means that no error, the other error codes means the relevant error, the
details please refer to related product manual.
When multiple faults occur at the same time, it will only display the smallest
object number. Among them, if the "current value" is "1" means" E0 "; if the
"current value" is "2" means E1; if the "current value" is "3" means E2; if the
Operation instruction "current value" is "4" means E3; if the "current value" is "5" means E4; if the
"current value" is "6" means E5; if the "current value" is "7" means E6; if the
"current value" is "8" means E7; if the "current value" is "9" means E8; if the
"current value" is "10" means E9; if the "current value" is "11" means EA; if
the "current value" is "12" means EB; if the "current value" is "13" means
EC; if the "current value" is "14" means ED; if the "current value" is "157"
means EE; if the "current value" is "16" means EF; if the "current value" is
"17" means no error.

Control System 200

Control System
11. Protection states
Property identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Multistate-input 2 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_IProtect R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Multistate-input R
Current value CharacterString Protect State O
Description Unsigned R
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
States number Unsigned 11 R
No P
PF
P8
P7
P6
BACnetARRAY[N]
States text P5 O
CharacterString
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Event enable BACnet Event Transition Bits TTT O
Affirm transform BACnet Event Transition Bits TTT O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Select the object "current value" property, and the property that is the
current "protection states", the property is read only. If the "current value" is
"No P" means that no protection, the other protection codes means the
relevant error, the details please refer to related product manual.
When multiple faults occur at the same time, it will only display the smallest
Operation instruction object number. Among them, if the "current value" is "1" means" P0 "; if the
"current value" is "2" means P1; if the "current value" is "3" means P2; if the
"current value" is "4" means P3; if the "current value" is "5" means P4; if the
"current value" is "6" means P5; if the "current value" is "7" means P6; if the
"current value" is "8" means P7; if the "current value" is "9" means P8; if the
"current value" is "10" means PF; if the "current value" is "11" means no
protection.

201 Control System

 Control System
12. Mode query
Property identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnet Object Identifier Multistate-input 3 R
Object Name Character String AC_Query Mode R
Object Type BACnet Object Type Multistate -input R
Description Character String Query Mode O
BACnet ARRAY[N] { "Heat", "Cool",
States text CharacterString "Dehumidify", O
"Fan only" ,"Auto", "Stop"}

13. Fan speed query

Property identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Multistate-input 4 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_QueryFa nSpeed R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Multistate -input R
Description CharacterString Query Fan Speed O
BACnet ARRAY[N] {"High", "Middle", "Low",
States text O
CharacterString "Auto","Stop"}

14. Temperature setting query

Property identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Multistate-input 4 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_Quer Temp Setting R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Multistate -input R
Current value REAL 0 r
Description CharacterString QueryTempSetting O
Unit BACnetEngineeringUnits Degree-Celsius R

Control System 202

Control System
 Outdoor objects
The device provides ten types of BACnet object for connecting with Inverter A/C or Digital A/C as the
following table, and using in the Building Management System (BMS) or other system which suitable for
BACnet Protocol.
Number Content
1 Device Information
2 Operation mode
3 Fan state
4 Outdoor temperature
5 Indoor unit quantity
6 The current of compressor 1
7 The current of compressor 2
8 The current of compressor 3
9 Malfunction state
10 Protection state
1. Device information
Property Identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Device + ACnumber R
Object Name CharacterString Outdoor_*_*_* R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Device R
System State BACnetDeviceStatus Operational R
Producer Name CharacterString AC Inc R
Producer Identifier Unisgned16 111(Unsigned) R
Frequency Conversion
Model Name CharacterString R
AC or Digital rotation AC
Firmware Edition CharacterString 1.0 R
Application Software
CharacterString 1.0 R
Edition
Protocol Edition Unsigned 1 R
Protocol Correspondency
Unsigned 3 R
Type
Protocol Service Support BACnetServiceSupport Read Property etc. R
Protocol Object Types
BACnetObjectTypesSupport Analog Input etc. R
Support
Object Array BACnetArray[n] List all objects R
Max length of APDU
Unsigned 1476 R
support
Segmentation support BACnetSegmentation Segmented both(0) R
Local Time Time R/W
Local Date Date R/W
APDU SEGMENTATION
Unsigned 2000 O
TIMEOVER
APDU TIMEOVER Unsigned 3000 R
APDU RESEND TIMES Unsigned 3 R
Device Address Binding AddressBinding ASN.1 ‘’ R
Select the "Object name" property of this selected object, it means
Operation instruction "Model information" and cannot be set. Specific "model name" by the
protocol specified.

203 Control System

 Control System
2. Operation mode
Property Identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Multistate-input 1 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_IOperationMode R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Multistate-input R
Description CharacterString Operation mode O
Current value Unsigned R
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
States number Unsigned 3 R
BACnetARRAY[N] Stop
States text CharacterString Cool O
Heat
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Event enable BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Affirm transform BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Select the object "current value" property, and the property that is the
"outdoor operation mode" state. The property cannot be set. When
Operation instruction "current value" property is "1" means running the Heating mode; When
"current value" property is "2" means running the Cooling mode; When
"current value" property is "3" means Turn off.

3. Fan states
Property Identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Multistate-iutput 2 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_IFanSpeed R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Multistate- iutput R
Current value Unsigned O
Description CharacterString Fan speed R
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
States number Unsigned 4 R
Stop
BACnetARRAY[N] Low
States text O
CharacterString Middle
High
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Event enable BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Affirm transform BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Select the object "current value" property, and the property that is the
"operation fan speed" states. The property cannot be set. When "current
value" property is "1" means running the high fan; When "current value"
Operation instruction
property is "2" means running the middle fan; When "current value"
property is "3" means running the low fan; When "current value" property
is "4" means fan stop.

Control System 204

Control System
4. Outdoor temperature
Property Identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Analog-iutput 1 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_ITempOutoor R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Analog-iutput R
Current value REAL R
Description CharacterString Outdoor Temperature O
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
Unit BACnetEngineering Units Degree-Celsius R
Minimum REAL -20 O
Maximum REAL 100 O
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Low valve value REAL -20 O
High valve value REAL 100 O
Width valve value REAL 1 O
Enable valve value BACnetLimitEnable TT O
Event enable BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType event O
Select the object "current value" property, and the property that is the
current "outdoor temperature". The property cannot be set. The
"Minimum" means the lower limit value of the temperature; The
Operation instruction "Maximum" means the lower limit value of the temperature.
When the current value is greater than the" upper limit value" or less than
"lower limit value", the controller will automatically generate alarm warning
to BMS.

5. Indoor quantity
Property Identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Analog-iutput 2 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_ITotalACs R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Analog-iutput R
Current value REAL R
Description CharacterString Indoor unit qty O
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
Unit BACnetEngineering Units R
Minimum REAL 0 O
Maximum REAL 250 O
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Low valve value REAL 0 O
High valve value REAL 250 O
Width valve value REAL 1 O
Enable valve value BACnetLimitEnable TT O
Event enable BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Select the object "current value" property, and the property that is the
Operation instruction
current "indoor quantity". The property cannot be set.

205 Control System

 Control System
6. Compressor 1 current
Property Identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Analog-iutput 3 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_ICom1Current R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Analog-iutput R
Current value REAL R
Description CharacterString Compressor 1 current O
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
Unit BACnetEngineering Units Amperes R
Minimum REAL 0 O
Maximum REAL 200 O
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Low valve value REAL 0 O
High valve value REAL 200 O
Width valve value REAL 1 O
Enable valve value BACnetLimitEnable TT O
Event enable BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Select the object "current value" property, the property that is the "compressor 1
current" and cannot be set. The "Minimum" means the lower limit value of the
Operation compressor 1 current; The "Maximum" means the lower limit value of the
instruction compressor 1 current.
When "the current value is greater than the" upper limit value" or less than "lower
limit value", the controller will automatically generate alarm warning to BMS.

7. Compressor 2 current
Property Identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Analog-iutput 4 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_ICom2Current R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Analog-iutput R
Current value REAL R
Description CharacterString Compressor 2 current O
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
Unit BACnetEngineering Units Amperes R
Minimum REAL 0 O
Maximum REAL 200 O
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Low valve value REAL 0 O
High valve value REAL 200 O
Width valve value REAL 1 O
Enable valve value BACnetLimitEnable TT O
Event enable BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Select the object "current value" property, the property that is the "compressor
2 current" and cannot be set. The "Minimum" means the lower limit value of the
compressor 2 current; The "Maximum" means the lower limit value of the
Operation instruction compressor 2 current.
When "the current value is greater than the" upper limit value" or less than
"lower limit value", the controller will automatically generate alarm warning to
BMS.

Control System 206

Control System
8. Compressor 3 current
Property Identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Analog-iutput 5 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_ICom3Current R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Analog-iutput R
Current value REAL R
Description CharacterString Compressor 3 current O
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
Unit BACnetEngineering Units Amperes R
Minimum REAL 0 O
Maximum REAL 200 O
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Low valve value REAL 0 O
High valve value REAL 200 O
Width valve value REAL 1 O
Enable valve value BACnetLimitEnable TT O
Event enable BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Select the object "current value" property, the property that is the
"compressor 3 current" and cannot be set. The "Minimum" means the
lower limit value of the compressor 3 current; The "Maximum" means the
Operation instruction lower limit value of the compressor 3 current.
When "the current value is greater than the" upper limit value" or less than
"lower limit value", the controller will automatically generate alarm warning
to BMS.

207 Control System

 Control System
9. Error states
Property Identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Multistate-input 3 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_IOutfunction R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Multistate-input R
Description CharacterString Malfunction State O
Current value Unsigned R
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
States number Unsigned 17 R
No E
EF
EE
ED
EC
EB
EA
E9
BACnetARRAY[N]
States text E8 O
CharacterString
E7
E6
E5
E4
E3
E2
E1
E0
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Event enable BACnetEventTransitionBits T T T O
Affirm transform BACnetEventTransitionBits T T T O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Select the object "current value" property, and the property that is the
current "error states", the property is read only. If the "current value" is "No
E" means that no error, the other error codes means the relevant error, the
details please refer to related product manual.
When multiple faults occur at the same time, it will only display the smallest
object number. Among them, if the "current value" is "1" means" E0 "; if the
"current value" is "2" means E1; if the "current value" is "3" means E2; if
Operation instruction the "current value" is "4" means E3; if the "current value" is "5" means E4;
if the "current value" is "6" means E5; if the "current value" is "7" means
E6; if the "current value" is "8" means E7; if the "current value" is "9"
means E8; if the "current value" is "10" means E9; if the "current value" is
"11" means EA; if the "current value" is "12" means EB; if the "current
value" is "13" means EC; if the "current value" is "14" means ED; if the
"current value" is "157" means EE; if the "current value" is "16" means EF;
if the "current value" is "17" means no error.

Control System 208

Control System
10. Protection states
Property Identifier Data mode Property value Read/write
Object Identifier BACnetObjectIdentifier Multistate-input 4 R
Object Name CharacterString AC_IOutprotect R
Object Type BACnetObjectType Multistate-input R
Description CharacterString Protect State O
Current value Unsigned R
Status Flags BACnetStatusFlags FFFF R
Event states BACnet EventStates Normal R
Out of service BOOLEAN F R
States number Unsigned 17 R
No P
PF
PE
PD
PC
PB
PA
P9
BACnet
States text P8 O
ARRAY[N]CharacterString
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
Time delay Unsigned 1 O
Publicly type Unsigned 1701 O
Event enable BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Affirm transform BACnetEventTransitionBits TTT O
Notify Type BACnetNotifyType alarm O
Select the object "current value" property, and the property that is the
current "protection states", the property is read only. If the "current value"
is "No P" means that no protection, the other protection codes means the
relevant error, the details please refer to related product manual.
When multiple faults occur at the same time, it will only display the smallest
object number. Among them, if the "current value" is "1" means" P0 "; if the
"current value" is "2" means P1; if the "current value" is "3" means P2; if
Operation instruction the "current value" is "4" means P3; if the "current value" is "5" means P4;
if the "current value" is "6" means P5; if the "current value" is "7" means
P6; if the "current value" is "8" means P7; if the "current value" is "9"
means P8; if the "current value" is "10" means PF; if the "current value" is
"11" means PA; if the "current value" is "12" means PB; if the "current
value" is "13" means PC; if the "current value" is "14" means PD; if the
"current value" is "15" means PE; if the "current value" is "16" means PF; if
the "current value" is "17" means no protection.

209 Control System

 Control Syste
em
4.2
2.10 Anno
ounce BAC
Cnet proto
ocol realizze the consistency

 Mode of s
supportive BACnet co
onsistency

Mo
ode 1 M
Mode 4

Mo
ode 2 M
Mode 5

Mo
ode 3 M
Mode 6

 Functional group off supportive

e BACnet

Clock function group

eration equip
Hand-ope pment functional group

Personal computer working

w statio
on functiona
al group

Event start functional group

Event response functtional group

nt start functional group

COV even p

COV even
nt response functional group
g

File functiional group

Reinitializzation functio
onal group

Virtual operator interfface function

nal group

Virtual terrminal functional group

Communiication equip
pment functiional group

Time main
n station fun
nctional grou
up

Control System 210

0
Control System
 Application services
s of supplie
ed BACnet
A
Application
n services Reque
est start Requesst preforme
ed
Confirm alarm
Confirmed COV notification
n
Confirmed event notification
Get A
Alarm Summ
mary
Get E
Enrollment Summary
S
Unco
onfirmed COV Notificatio
on
Unco
onfirmed eve
ent notificatio
on
Atomic Read File
e
Atomic write File
Add L
List Elementt
Remo
ove List Elem
ment
Creatte Object
Delette Object
Read
d Property

Read
d Property Conditional
C
Read
d Property Multiple
M

Write Property

Write Property Multiple

M

Devicce Communication Conttrol

Confirmed Privatte Transfer
Unco
onfirmed Privvate Transfe
er
Reinittialize Devicce
Confirmed Text Message
M
Unco
onfirmed Texxt Message
Time Synchronization
Who--Has

I-Hass

Who--Is

I-Am

VT –O
Open
VT –O
Open
VT –O
Open
Authe
entication Se
ervice
Requ
uest secret key
k service

211
1 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
 Supportiv
ve object Type
Ty
Dynam ic creatie Dynamic de
elete writable
e
Object Type
e support or no
ot Optioonal attributte
orr not or not support attribute
e
Analog Inpu
ut
Object Type
e
Analog Outtput
Object Type
e
Analog Valu
ue
Object Type
e
Binary Input
Object Type
e
Binary Outp
put
Object Type
e
Binary Valu
ue
Object Type
e
Calendar O
Object
Type
Command O
Object
Type
Device Obje
ect
Type
Event Enrollment
Object Type
e
File Object Type
Group Obje
ect Type
Loop Objecct Type
Multi-state IInput
Object Type
e
Multi-state O
Output
Object Type
e
Notification Class
Object Type
e
Program Ob
bject
Type
Schedule O
Object
Type

Control System 212

2
Control System
 Option off Data Link Layer

ISO 8802-3,10BASE
E5 ARCNE
ET, coax starr

ISO 8802-3,10BASE2
2 ARCNE
ET, coax buss

ISO 8802-3,10BASET
T ARCNE
ET, twisted ppair star
ISO 8802
2-3, Fiber ARCNET, twisted ppair star
MS/TP m
master, baud
d rate(s):___
_____ ARCNE
ET, fiber starr
MS/TP sllave, baud rate(s):_____
r ___ LonTalk
k, medium:__
_____
232, baud rate(s):______
Point-To--Point, EIA2 ___ other
Point-To--Point, mode
em, baud rate(s):______
__

 Supportiv
ve characte
er set

ANSI X3.4
4 IBM TM/Microso
oft TM DBCS
S JIS C 62266

ISO 10646
6(ICS-4) ISO 10646(UCS
S2) ISO 8859- 1

 Especial function

Su
ubsection req
quest suppo
ort yes o
no window sizee: 1476

Su
ubsection ressponds supp
port yes no
o window sizee: 1476

otes: BACne
No et® is a regisstered trade
emark of Am
merica ASHA
ARE associa
ation which rregistered in
n United Statte
and other coun
ntries.

213
3 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em

4.3 Modbu
us BMS gateway:
g : CCM-18
8A

CC
CM-18A sup
pport the Mo
odbus proto
ocol networkk, bridge the Midea central A/C syystem to the BMS, an
nd  
support RTU o
or TCP/IP mode.
m
 Supporrt the Modbu
us protocol network
n
 Built-in WEB serve
er function
 Each g
gateway can be connectted up to 166 or 64 indoo
or units and 4
outdoo r units (4 ou
utdoor units must be in tthe same system)
 Transfe
er the inform
mation via the
e RTU modee
 Can dirrectly conne oor/outdoor units withou
ect with indo ut centralize
ed
CCM03 and monitor conntroller CCM
controlller CCM30/C M02

4.3
3.1 Main ffeatures

 Can checck and contro

ol all indoor units throug
gh built-in Web
W server fu
unctions.
 Can direcctly connect with
w indoor/o
outdoor unitts without ce
entralized co
ontroller CCM
M30/CCM03
3 and monito
or
controller CCM02.
 Can contrrol indoor un
nits, configurre gateway tthrough Web function in
n the LAN.
 nect to the BMS system through TC P/IP or RTU
Can conn U.
 ntrol and get the running
BMS systtem can con g real-time data of the aiir conditioneer through CCM-18A.
C
 Two typess for your ch
hoice:
Fo
or CCM-18A//N-U can be
e connected up to 16 ind
door units.
Fo
or CCM-18A//N, if there are
a the V4 Plus
P and D4 plus series indoor unit , it can be coonnected up
p to 64 indoo
or
utdoor units, and then if there are th
units and 4 ou he V4 and D3
D series ind
door units, itt can be con
nnected up to
t
60 indoor unitss and 4 outd
door units.
1) When the b
baud rate of the outdoor unit is 600, can be conn
nected up to
o 64 indoor uunits and 4 outdoor
o units.
2) When the b
baud rate off the outdoor unit is 480
00, can be connected
c up to 60 indooor units (indoor addresss
mu
ust be from 4 to 63) and
d 4 outdoor units.
u
3) 4 outdoor units must be
e in the same
e system an b from differrent systems but addresss
nd the indoorr units can be
is not repeated
d.

Control System 214

4
Control System
4.3
3.2 Ports iinstruction

WA
AN port： C
Connect to th
he router by
y 5 Ethernet cables to en
nsure that PC
P can acceess to the we
eb page.
A1B1E port：C
Connect to the
t XYE porrts of the ind
door unit and
d the K1K2E
E ports of thee outdoor un
nit
2B2E port：C
A2 Connect to the
t terminal serial port.
PO
OWER port: Offer DC 5V
V
Re
eset button: Can reset to
o the origina
al setting.

4.3
3.3 Netwo
ork structu
ure

Ca
an control the unit and configuration
c n the gatewa
ay through WEB
W function in the LAN
N
Ca
an be conne
ected to the BMS
B system
m through TC
CP/IP or RT
TU mode

215
5 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
4.3
3.4 Netwo
ork example

1. One Modbu
us gateway can
c bridge one
o refrigera
ant system with
w a PC or the Modbuss master
2. The PC sysstem with th
he Modbus protocol
p porrt can comm
municate with CCM-18A
A through RT
TU or TCP/IIP
me
ethod to con
ntrol and monitor units. There
T wo methods for your refe
are tw erence.
1) TCP/IP con
nnection me
ethod:

2) RTU conne
ection meth
hod:

Control System 216

6
Control System
No
otes：
 If it doesn
n’t monitor th
he ODU’s states, it can d
directly conn
nect to the XYE
X ports off the indoor//outdoor units
in both wa
ays above.

 If it conne
ects to XYE ports of mas
ster ODU, O
ODU must be
e set to auto
o addressingg mode.

 XYE and K1K2E musst be connec

cted hand byy hand.
 It supportts two kinds of baud rattes (600 and
d 4800) of the
t outdoor unit can bee connected.. Baud rate is
Plus and D4 plus series; and baud rrate is 4800: V4 and D3 series.
600: V4 P
 One Modb
bus gatewayy can bridge
e one refrige
erant system
m with a PC or
o the BMS ssystem (Mod
dbus masterr).
 e baud rate of the outdoor unit is 6
When the 600, can be connected up to 64 inddoor units and
a 4 outdoo
or
units.
 When the
e baud rate of 800, can be connected up
o the outdoor unit is 48 u to 60 indooor units (indoor addresss
must be frrom 4 to 63)) and 4 outdoor units.
 The addrresses of acccessed ind
door/outdoorr units can'tt repeat; 4 outdoor uniits must be in the sam
me
system.

4.3
3.5 Operattion introd
duction

4.3
3.5.1 IP Con
nfiguration
Th
he default IP s gateway iss [Link]. Modbu
P address of the Modbus us gateway aand the PC which can be
b
used for visitin
ng the websites must be
e in the sam
me subnet se
egment, it sh
hould be [Link] (xxx must be
b
fro
om 2 to 254)). There are 2 methods to
t configure IP: configurre single IP and configuure several IP.
Co
onfigure sin
ngle IP
Op
pen protocoll dialog, con
nfigure the IP
P address an
nd subnet mask,
m for exa
ample: the IP
P address is
s
[Link], and the su
ubnet mask is 255.255.2
255.0.
please click "OK" button
Aftter setting, p n.

Fig
g.4.1

217
7 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em

Co
onfigure sev
veral IP
Be
efore configu
uring severa
al IP, it needs
s to configurre a statistic IP address. Open the pproperty dialog, select th
he
"Ad and it will dissplay the TCP/IP setting dialog.
dvanced", a
Cliick "Add" bu b can add an IP addre
utton in the IP address bar ess which is in the samee segment as
[Link]", for exam
"19 mple ,the IP address
a is 1
[Link]
09, subnet mask
m is 255..255.255.0, and click
"O
OK" button w
will be OK.

Fig.4.2

4.3
3.5.2 The ga
ateway con
nfiguration
Inp
put "[Link]
[Link]
0" in the add
dress bar in IE Browser (suggest us
sing IE Brow
wser) and prress Enter
button will ente
er the WEB page of Mo
odbus gatew Configurationn" button and will displayy
way. You can click the "C
the
e following d
dialog.

Fig.4.3

Control System 218

8
Control System
Pa
arameters S
Setting:
Para
ameter Descrip
ption
Modbus ID is ussed to disting
guish multiple gatewayss which with Modbus
Modbus address proto
ocol in the sa
ame subnett segment. The
T ID must not repeat anda can be
modified.
Baudd rate: suggeest 9600；
Modbus
M comm
munication
Checck bit: no ch
hecking by default
se
etting Stop
p bit: 1 Stop Bit by defau
ult
IP a
address IP ad
ddress of Moodbus gatewway, multiple
e IP addressses can't reppeat.
Subnnet Mask Defaault：255.2555.255.0
Gaateway Locaal gateway a
address
Baud rate of tthe outdoor unit Outd door commu unication bau
ud rate which is connectted to Modb bus gatewayy
Cliick "Applicattion Settingss" after channging the co rresponding
g parameterss. If you wannt the use th
he updated
setting, please
e click "Get Settings"
S bu
utton.
Mo
odbus gatew art automatically after c hanging setttings, and th
way will resta he network w
will break an
nd reconnecct
automatically.
4.3
3.5.3 A/C information query
q
※ Select "P
Power winding" or "inpu
ut register" in
n the web pa
age to query
y the informaation of the air
condition
ner unit.
hen select "power windiing", it will display the fo
Wh ollowing dialog.

Fig.4.4
Wh
hen click the
e address nu
umber of the
e indoor or o
outdoor unit, it will displa
ay corresponnding opera
ation
infformation of the air cond
ditioner. The
e chosen devvice will disp
play in the re
ed frame.

219
9 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
Wh
hen click "input register"", it will display as follow
wing dialog:

Fig.4.5
5

Add
dresses Content Display value Addres
sses Content Display value
v

Th
he first colum
mn is the add
dress, the se
econd is the
e content and the third is
s displayed vvalue, e.g. 17/0011,
1 17 is
decimal displa
ay, 0011 is hexadecimal display.
xplanation off part of the content:
Ex
Fo 0~3 outdoorr unit online state is 1/00
or example, 0 001. When 0#
0 indoor un
nit is online, its value is
0001(decimaalism /hexadecimal); whe
1/0 en No. 0 and
d No.1 indoor unit are online,
o 03 (decimalism
its vaalue is 3/000
/he
exadecimal)).

Control System 220

0
 Control System
4.3
3.5.4 Air Co
onditioner Control
C
※ When cllick “Air Con
nditioner Con
ntrol” on the
e web page, it will display as followinng dialog:

Single control area

a

Group control
c area

Fig.4.6
Sin
ngle control area:
Yo
ou can contro
ol a single air
a conditione
er, set mode
e, fan speed, temperature setting annd click "App
ply" button to
t
carry out a sin
ngle controlling function.
Grroup Controll area:
Ch
hoose the co g group control button, a
orresponding all the indoo
or units unde
er the controol of the Mod
dbus gatewa
ay
willl be turn on or turn off.

221
1 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
4.3
3.5.5 Softwa
are installattion and de
ebug
※ PC acce
ess mode
Th
he PC system
m with Modb
bus protocoll port can co
ommunicate with the Mo
odbus gatew
way through TCP/IP
pro
otocol or Mo
odbus RTU. For detailed
d information
n, please reffer to 4.3.3 Network
N exaample.
※ Install M
Modbus Poll software
Th
hrough Modb
bus Poll softtware to acc
cess debugg
ging.
Wh
hen finish in
nstalling Mod
dbus Poll so
oftware, the h
home page will display as followingg dialog:

Fig.44.7
※ Connec
ct Modbus Gateway
G
Th
here're 2 con
nnection methods: TCP//IP and Mod
dbus RTU
1) Connection
n through TCP/IP
T
Ch
hoose "Conn
nection"->"C
Connection" in Fig.4.3, itt will enter th
he following dialog, and then you ca
an choose
TC
CP/IP in the Pop-up wind
dow:

To ch
hoose the
connnection meth
hod

Fig
g.4.8
IP ad
ddress of the
e Connnection port:
gatew
way for connnection default 502 port

Control System 222

2
 Control System
2) Connection
n through Modbus/RT
M U
Ch
hoose RTU tto connect, iti will display
y as followin
ng dialog and
d you can se
et the corressponding pa
arameters.

To PC porrt

Parammeter settingg must be

the sa
ame as WEB B page,
detaile
ed refer to F
Fig.4.3

Fig.4.9
※ Test
Mo
odbus Poll ssoftware can
n read/write the
t content of the corresponding ad
ddress in maapping table
e. Take
rea
ading coil co
ontent for an
n example:
Ch
hoose "Poll D
Definition" under
u "Setup
p", it will disp
play the follo
owing dialog.

Modbus
M add
dress

Starting address
need to check

Ad
ddress length
h Fig.4.100

Cliick "OK" buttton, it will diisplay the co

ontent of the
e reading. If the reading content is tthe same as
s the value of
o
the
e web page which has the same address, it me e software debugging suuccess.
eans that the

223
3 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
Take writing h
holding reg
gister for ex
xample:

Ch
hoose button in Fiig.3.7, as sh
hown below:

change the value

M
Modbus
address

hholding reggi
s
ster addresss

Aftter changed the value, click

c "send" button to fin
nish the writing operation.

※ Softwarre Reset
Pre T" button on the gatewa
ess "RESET ay for 3 seco wer on again, the softwa
onds and pow ware configurration will be
e
back to the oriiginal setting
g.

4.3
3.6 Functiion Code

Function code Function name

n Function
F
0x01
1 Read Co
oils Read
0x04
4 R
Read Input Register
R Read
0x10
0 Wrrite Holding Register Write

4.3
3.7 Abnorrmal Reply
y

Th
he master un
nit sends req
quests and waits
w for a re
eply from the
e slave unit. When theree's no error, the slave un
nit
willl reply norm
mally, but if th
he data chec
cking error, tthe slave un
nit does not respond. W
When the mas
ster unit
sends a wrong ept checking error), the sslave will respond abnormally.
g data (exce
Code Namme Descrip
ption
0x01 Illegal functtion code The slave u units receive
e a function code that caan’t comply..
0x02 Illegal functtion code The addresss of receive ed data isn’t permitted bby the slave units.
0x03 Illegal data The value o of query areea data isn’t permitted byy the slave units
The slave u unit is busy processing a long progrram command, and
0x06 Slave busyy
don't receivve informatioon from the main unit.

Control System 224

4
Control System
4.3.8 Mapping table

[Link] Indoor unit variable mapping table

Indoor Modbus
Modbus Octet
address register Data name Length Explanation
description Order
number address
1 Fan mode 1: Yes; 0:No
2 Dry mode 1: Yes; 0:No
3 Heat mode 1: Yes; 0:No
4 Cool mode 1: Yes; 0:No
1 Octet 1
5 Auto mode 1: Yes; 0:No
6 Mode locking 1: Yes; 0:No
7 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8 On/Off 1= on; 0=off
High fan speed 1= on; 0=off
Mid fan speed 1= on; 0=off
Low fan speed 1= on; 0=off
Low fan speed 1= on; 0=off
Coils(R) 0 9-16 1 Octet 2
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Auto(fixed)fan 1= on; 0=off
Compressor 1= on; 0=off
ODU high fan speed 1= on; 0=off
ODU low fan speed 1= on; 0=off
4-way valve 1= on; 0=off
17-24 1 Octet 3
Crankcase 1= on; 0=off
Oil return Reserve, stay 0
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Reserve Reserve, stay 0

225 Control System

 Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Modbus Indoor Modbus Octet
address register Data name Length Explanation
description Order
number address
ECO operation 1= on; 0=off
Electric auxiliary heating 1= on; 0=off
Swing 1= on; 0=off
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
25-32 1 Octet 4
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Horizontal swing 1= on ;0=off
Add water 1= on ;0=off
Water drain pump 1= on ;0=off
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
33-40 1 Octet 5
Locking cool mode 1: Yes; 0:No
Locking heat mode 1: Yes; 0:No
Centralized controller lock 1: Yes; 0:No
Remote controller lock 1: Yes; 0:No
E0 Phase sequence error or no
1:Error; 0:Normal
phase
E1 communication error 1:Error; 0:Normal
E2 T1 sensor error 1:Error; 0:Normal
E3 T2A sensor error 1:Error; 0:Normal
41-48 1 Octet 6
E4 T2B sensor error 1:Error; 0:Normal
E5 T3/T4/Digital compressor
1:Error; 0:Normal
discharge temp. sensor error
E6 Zero crossing detection error 1:Error; 0:Normal
Coils(R) 0 E7 EEPROM error 1:Error; 0:Normal
E8 Fan speed detection error 1:Error; 0:Normal
E9 Mainboard and display board
1:Error; 0:Normal
communication error
EA Compressor over current
1:Error; 0:Normal
(4 times)
49-56 1 Octet 7
EB Inverter module protection 1:Error; 0:Normal
EC Flesh error 1:Error; 0:Normal
ED Outdoor unit error protection 1:Error; 0:Normal
EE Water level detection error 1:Error; 0:Normal
EF Other errors 1:Error; 0:Normal
1:Protection;
P0 Evaporator temp. protection
0:Normal
1:Protection;
P1 anti-cold or defrost protection
0:Normal
P2 Condenser high temp. 1:Protection;
protection 0:Normal
1:Protection;
P3 Compressor temp. protection
0:Normal
57-64 1 Octet 8
P4 Discharge pipe temp. 1:Protection;
protection 0:Normal
P5 Discharge high pressure 1:Protection;
protection 0:Normal
P6 Discharge low pressure 1:Protection;
protection 0:Normal
P7 Over voltage or under 1:Protection;
voltage protection 0:Normal

Control System 226

Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Modbus Indoor Modbus Octet
address register Data name Length Explanation
description Order
number address
P8 Compressor over current 1:Protection;
protection 0:Normal
P9 Reserve, stay 0
PA Reserve, stay 0
PB Reserve, stay 0
65-72 1 Octet 9
PC Reserve, stay 0
PD Reserve, stay 0
PE Reserve, stay 0
1:Protection;
PF Other protections
0:Normal
0# Network connection module
and mainboard communication 1:Error; 0:Normal
error
0
1# Centralized controller and
1:Error; 0:Normal
network module error
2# Centralized controller and
function module communication 1:Error; 0:Normal
73-80 error 1 Octet 10
3# Centralized controller and
computer (gateway) 1:Error; 0:Normal
communication error
4# Order limit execution 1:Error; 0:Normal
5# Order timeout, not execution 1:Error; 0:Normal
6# Destination address not exist 1:Error; 0:Normal
7# Error (unsupported) order 1:Error; 0:Normal
Coils(R) 81-128 Reserve 6 Octet 11~16 Reserve, stay 0
129 Fan mode 1: Yes; 0:No
130 Dry mode 1: Yes; 0:No
131 Heat mode 1: Yes; 0:No
132 Cool mode 1: Yes; 0:No
1 Octet 17
133 Auto mode 1: Yes; 0:No
134 Mode locking state 1: Yes; 0:No
135 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
136 On/Off state 1: on; 0:off
High fan speed 1: Yes; 0:No
Mid fan speed 1: Yes; 0:No
Low fan speed 1: Yes; 0:No
Low fan speed 1: Yes; 0:No
1 137-144 1 Octet 18
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Auto(fixed)fan 1: Yes; 0:No
Compressor 1= on; 0=off
ODU high fan speed 1= on; 0=off
ODU low fan speed 1= on; 0=off
4-way valve 1= on; 0=off
145-152 1 Octet 19
Crankcase 1= on; 0=off
Oil return Reserve, stay 0
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Reserve Reserve, stay 0

227 Control System

 Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Modbus Indoor Modbus Octet
address register Data name Length Explanation
description Order
number address
Eco operation 1= on; 0=off
Electric auxiliary heating 1= on; 0=off
Swing 1= on; 0=off
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
153-160 1 Octet 20
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Horizontal swing 1= on; 0=off
Add water 1= on; 0=off
Water drain pump 1= on; 0=off
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
161-168 1 Octet 21
Locking cool mode 1: Yes; 0:No
Locking heat mode 1: Yes; 0:No
Centralized controller lock 1: Yes; 0:No
Remote controller lock 1: Yes; 0:No
E0 Phase sequence error or
1:Error; 0:Normal
no phase
E1 communication error 1:Error; 0:Normal
E2 T1 sensor error 1:Error; 0:Normal
E3 T2A sensor error 1:Error; 0:Normal
169-176 1 Octet 22
E4 T2B sensor error 1:Error;0: Normal
E5 T3/T4/Digital compressor
1:Error; 0:Normal
discharge temp. sensor error
E6 Zero crossing detection error 1:Error;0: Normal
Coils(R) 1 E7 EEPROM error 1:Error; 0:Normal
E8 Fan speed detection error 1:Error; 0:Normal
E9 Mainboard and display board
1:Error; 0:Normal
communication error
EA Compressor over current 1:Error; 0:Normal
(4 times)
177-184 1 Octet 23
EB Inverter module protection 1:Error; 0:Normal
EC Flesh error 1:Error; 0:Normal
ED Outdoor unit error protection 1:Error; 0:Normal
EE Water level detection error 1:Error; 0:Normal
EF Other errors 1:Error; 0:Normal
1:Protection;
P0 Evaporator temp. protection
0:Normal
1:Protection;
P1 anti-cold or defrost protection
0:Normal
P2 Condenser high temp. 1:Protection;
protection 0:Normal
1:Protection;
P3 Compressor temp. protection
0:Normal
185-192 1 Octet 24
P4 Discharge pipe temp. 1:Protection;
protection 0:Normal
P5 Discharge high pressure 1:Protection;
protection 0:Normal
P6 Discharge low pressure 1:Protection;
protection 0:Normal
P7 Power supply over or under 1:Protection;
voltage protection 0:Normal

Control System 228

Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Indoor Modbus
Modbus Octet
address register Data name Length Explanation
description Order
number address
P8 Compressor over current 1:Protection;
protection 0:Normal
P9 Reserve, stay 0
PA Reserve, stay 0
PB Reserve, stay 0
193-200 1 Octet 25
PC Reserve, stay 0
PD Reserve, stay 0
PE Reserve, stay 0
1:Protection;
PF Other protections
0:Normal
0# Network connection module
and mainboard communication 1:Error; 0:Normal
error
Coils(R) 1 1# Centralized controller and
1:Error;0: Normal
network module error
2# Centralized controller and
function module communication 1:Error;0: Normal
201-208 error 1 Octet
26
3# Centralized controller and
computer or gateway 1:Error;0: Normal
communication error
4# Order limit execution 1:Error;0:Normal
5# Order timeout, not execution 1:Error;0: Normal
6# Destination address not exist 1:Error;0:Normal
7# Error (unsupported) order 1:Error;0:Normal
209-256 Reserve 6 Octet 27~32 Reserve, stay 0

229 Control System

 Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Modbus Indoor Modbus
address register Data name Length Octet Order Explanation
description
number address
(128*n+1)- 1 Octet n*16+1
(128*n+8)

(128*n+9)- 1 Octet n*16+2

(128*n+16）

(128*n+17)- 1 Octet n*16+3

(128*n+24)
(128*n+25)- 1 Octet n*16+4
(128*n+31)
(128*n+32)- 1 Octet n*16+5
(128*n+40) The same as
The same as the
n (128*n+41)- 1 Octet the 1# indoor
1# indoor unit n*16+6
(128*n+48) unit.
(128*n+49)- 1 Octet n*16+7
(128*n+56)
(128*n+57)- 1 Octet n*16+8
(128*n+64)
(128*n+65)- 1 Octet n*16+9
Coils(R) (128*n+72)
(128*n+73)- 1 Octet n*16+10
(128*n+80)
(128*n+81)- 6 Octet (n*16+11)~(n*16+16)
(128*n+128）

8065-8072 1 Octet 1009

8073-8080 1 Octet 1010

8081-8088 1 Octet 1011

8089-8096 1 Octet 1012

8097-8104 1 Octet 1013 The same as

The same as the
63 8105-8112 1 Octet 1014 the 1# indoor
1# indoor unit.
unit.
8113-8120 1 Octet 1015

8121-8128 1 Octet 1016

8129-8136 1 Octet 1017

8137-8144 1 Octet 1018

8145-8192 6 Octet 1019~1024

Control System 230

Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Modbus Indoor Modbus
address register Data name Length Explanation
description
number address
bit0: the running state of the system
1:running, 0:stop;
30001 System state 2 Octet bit1: the error state of the system,
1:error,0:normal;
bit2: local/remote, 1:remote, 0:local
30002 Model message 1 2 Octet
30003 Model message 2 2 Octet
16~32 means the temperature
30004 Setting temp Ts 2 Octet
range is16 to 32℃
0~240 means the temperature
30005 Indoor temp T1 2 Octet
range is from - 20 to 100℃
0~240 means the temperature
30006 Evaporator pipe temp T2A 2 Octet
range is from - 20 to 100℃
Evaporator medium pipe 0~240 means the temperature
30007 2 Octet
temp. T2B range is from - 20 to 100℃
0~240 means the temperature
30008 Condenser pipe temp T3 2 Octet
range is from - 20 to 100℃
30009 Reserve
30010 Reserve
0~96 means no timer ~ 24 hours
30011 Timer on 2 Octet
timer
0~96 means no timer ~ 24 hours
30012 Timer off 2 Octet
timer
Electric consumption
30013 2 Octet Unit :0.1HP
power
Input 30014~
Reserve 4 Octet Reserve, stay 0
Register 0 30015
(R) bit0: means E0 error, 1:Yes, 0:No
bit1: means E1 error, 1:Yes, 0:No
30016 Error state 2 Octet
……
bit15: means EF error,1:Yes, 0:No
bit0: means P0 protection,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit1: means P1 protection,
30017 Protection state 2 Octet 1: Yes, 0: No
……
bit15: means PF protection ,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit0: means 0# outdoor unit online,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit1: means 1# outdoor unit online,
0~3 outdoor unit online 1: Yes, 0: No
30018 2 Octet
state bit2: means 2# outdoor unit online,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit3: means 3# outdoor unit online,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit0: means 0# indoor unit online,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit1: means 1# indoor unit online,
0~15 indoor unit online 1: Yes, 0: No
30019 2 Octet
state ……
bit15: means 15# indoor unit
online,
1: Yes, 0: No

231 Control System

 Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Modbus Indoor Modbus
address register Data name Length Explanation
description
number address
bit0: means 16# indoor unit online,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit1: means 17# indoor unit online,
16~31# indoor unit 2 Octet
30020 1: Yes, 0: No
online state
……
bit15: means 31# indoor unit online,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit0: means 32# indoor unit online,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit1: means 33# indoor unit online,
32~47# indoor unit 2 Octet
30021 1: Yes, 0: No
online state
……
bit15: means 47# indoor unit online,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit0: means 48# indoor unit online,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit1: means 49# indoor unit online,
48~63# indoor unit
30022 2 Octet 1: Yes, 0: No
online state ……
bit1: means 63# indoor unit online,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit0: means 0# outdoor unit error,
1: Yes, 0: No
Input bit1: means 1# outdoor unit error,
Register 0 0~3 #outdoor unit 1: Yes, 0: No
30023 2 Octet bit2: means 2# outdoor unit error,
(R) error state
1: Yes, 0: No
bit3: means 3# outdoor unit error,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit0: means 0# outdoor unit running
state,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit1: means 1# outdoor unit running
state,
0~3# outdoor unit 1: Yes, 0: No
30024 2 Octet bit2: means 2# outdoor unit running
running state
state,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit3: means 3# outdoor unit running
state ,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit0:means 0# indoor unit error state,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit1:means1# indoor unit error state,
0~15# indoor unit 1: Yes, 0: No
30025 2 Octet
error state ……
bit15:means15# indoor unit error
state,
1: Yes, 0: No

Control System 232

Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Modbus Indoor Modbus
address register Data name Length Explanation
description
number address
bit0: means 16# indoor unit error state,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit1: means 17# indoor unit error state,
16~31# indoor 2 Octet
30026 1: Yes, 0: No
unit error state
……
bit15:means 31# indoor unit error
state,1: Yes, 0: No
bit0: means 32# indoor unit error state,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit1: means 33# indoor unit error state,
32~47# indoor 2 Octet
30027 1: Yes, 0: No
unit error state
……
bit15: means 47# indoor unit error state,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit0: means 48# indoor unit error state,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit1: means 49# indoor unit error state,
48~63# indoor 2 Octet
30028 1: Yes, 0: No
unit error state ……
bit15: means 63# indoor unit error state,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit0:means 0# indoor unit running state,
1: Yes, 0: No
0~15# indoor bit1:means1# indoor unit running state,
Input
30029 unit running 2 Octet 1: Yes, 0: No
Register 0
state ……
(R)
bit15:means15# indoor unit running state,
1: Yes, 0: No
bit0: means 16# indoor unit running state,
1: Yes, 0: No
16~31# indoor bit1: means 17# indoor unit running state,
30030 unit running 2 Octet 1: Yes, 0: No
state ……
bit15:means 31# indoor unit running
state,1: Yes, 0: No
bit0: means 32# indoor unit running state,
1: Yes, 0: No
32~47# indoor bit1: means 33# indoor unit running state,
30031 unit running 2 Octet 1: Yes, 0: No
state ……
bit15: means 47# indoor unit running
state, 1: Yes, 0: No
bit0: means 48# indoor unit error state,
1: Yes, 0: No
48~63# indoor bit1: means 49# indoor unit error state,
30032 unit running 2 Octet 1: Yes, 0: No
state ……
bit15: means 63# indoor unit error state,
1: Yes, 0: No

233 Control System

 Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Indoor Modbus
Modbus
address register Data name Length Explanation
description
number address
30033 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
30034 Model message 1 2 Octet
30035 Model message 2 2 Octet
16~32 means the
30036 Setting temp. Ts 2 Octet temperature range is16 to
32℃
0~240 means the
30037 Indoor temp T1 2 Octet temperature range is from -
20 to 100℃
0~240 means the
30038 Evaporator pipe temp. T2A 2 Octet temperature range is from -
20 to 100℃
0~240 means the
Evaporator medium pipe temp. temperature range is from -
30039 2 Octet
T2B
20 to 100℃
0~240 means the
30040 Condenser pipe temp. T3 2 Octet temperature range is from -
20 to 100℃
30041 Reserve
30042 Reserve
0~96 means no timer ~ 24
30043 Timer on 2 Octet
Input hours timer
Register 1 0~96 means no timer~ 24
30044 Timer off 2 Octet
(R) hours timer
30045 Electric consumption power 2 Octet Unit :0.1HP
30046~3
Reserve 4 Octet Reserve, stay 0
0047
30048 Error state 2 Octet
30049 Protection state 2 Octet
30050 0~3 outdoor unit online state 2 Octet
30051 0~15 indoor unit online state 2 Octet
30052 16~31 indoor unit online state 2 Octet
30053 32~47 indoor unit online state 2 Octet
30054 48~63 indoor unit online state 2 Octet
30055 0~3 outdoor unit error state 2 Octet
The same as the 0# indoor
30056 0~3 outdoor unit running state 2 Octet
unit.
30057 0~15 indoor unit error state 2 Octet
30058 16~31 indoor unit error state 2 Octet
30059 32~47 indoor unit error state 2 Octet
30060 48~63 indoor unit error state 2 Octet
30061 0~15 indoor unit running state 2 Octet
30062 16~31 indoor unit running state 2 Octet
30063 32~47indoor unit running state 2 Octet
30064 48~63 indoor unit running state 2 Octet

Control System 234

Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Indoor
Modbus Modbus register
address Data name Length Explanation
description address
number
n 30000+n*32+1 Reserve
30000+n*32+2 Model message 1 2 Octet
30000+n*32+3 Model message 2 2 Octet
30000+n*32+4 Setting temp. Ts 2 Octet
30000+n*32+5 Indoor temp T1 2 Octet
30000+n*32+6 Evaporator pipe temp. T2A 2 Octet
Evaporator medium pipe temp.
30000+n*32+7 2 Octet
T2B The same as the 1#
30000+n*32+8 Condenser pipe temp. T3 2 Octet indoor unit.
30000+n*32+9 Reserve
30000+n*32+10 Reserve
30000+n*32+11 Timer on 2 Octet
30000+n*32+12 Timer off 2 Octet
30000+n*32+13 Electric consumption power 2 Octet
(30000+n*32+14） 38
Input Reserve
~(30000+n*32+32 Octet
Register
(R) 63 32017 Reserve
32018 Model message 1 2 Octet
32019 Model message 2 2 Octet
32020 Setting temp. Ts 2 Octet
32021 Indoor temp. T1 2 Octet
32022 Evaporator pipe temp. T2A 2 Octet
Evaporator medium pipe temp.
32023 2 Octet
T2B The same as the 1#
32024 Condenser pipe temp. T3 2 Octet indoor unit.
32025 Reserve
32026 Reserve
32027 Timer on 2 Octet
32028 Timer off 2 Octet
32029 Electric consumption power 2 Octet
38
32030~32048 Reserve
Octet

235 Control System

 Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Modbus Indoor Modbus
address register Data name Length Explanation
description
number address
0:All-off the system
1:All-on the system – The summer mode 1:
cooling,17℃,Low speed, no timer and
auxiliary;
2 : All-on the system – The summer mode 2:
cooling, 24℃, medium speed, no timer and
auxiliary;
3: All-on the system – The summer mode 3:
Refrigerant cooling, 26℃, high speed, no timer and
40001 2 Octet auxiliary;
system on/off
4: All-on the system - the winter mode 1:
heat mode, 30℃, high speed, no timer and
auxiliary;
5: All-on the system - the winter mode 2:
heat mode, 26℃, medium speed, no timer
and auxiliary;
6: All-on the system - the winter mode 3:
heat mode, 24℃, low speed, no timer and
auxiliary.
bit15~bit8: reserve, stay 0
bit7: turn On/Off,
1: On, 0: Off
bit6: reserve, stay 0
Holding bit5: mode lock
bit4: auto mode
register 0 1: Yes, 0: No
(W) Setting mode bit3: cool mode
40002 2 Octet
1: Yes, 0: No
bit2: heat mode
1: Yes, 0: No
bit1: dry mode
1: Yes, 0: No
bit0: Fan mode
1: Yes, 0: No
bit6~bit0: every bit mutually exclusive.
bit15~bit8: reserve, stay 0
bit7: Auto fan
1: Yes, 0: No
bit6~bit3: reserve, stay 0
Setting fan bit2: Low fan speed
40003 2 Octet 1: Yes, 0: No
speed
bit1: Medium fan speed
1: Yes, 0: No
bit0: High fan speed
1: Yes, 0: No
bit7~bit0: every bit mutually exclusive.
Setting 2 Octet 16~32 means the temperature range is16 to
40004
temperature 32℃
40005 Time on 2 Octet 0~96 means no timer ~ 24 hours timer
40006 Time off 2 Octet 0~96 means no timer ~ 24 hours timer

Control System 236

Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Modbus Indoor
Modbus register Data name Length Explanation
address
description address
number
bit15~bit4:Reserve, stay 0
bit3: Change of air
1:On, 0:Off
bit2: Swing
Auxiliary 2 Octet
40007 1: On, 0: Off
0 function state
bit1: Electric auxiliary heating
1: On, 0: Off
bit0: Economic operation
1: On, 0: Off
40008-40032 Reserve 50 Octet Reserve , cannot write.
40033 Reserve 2 Octet

40034 Setting mode 2 Octet

Setting fan 2 Octet
40035
speed
Setting 2 Octet
40036 The same as the 0# indoor unit.
1 temperature
40037 Time on 2 Octet

40038 Time off 2 Octet

Auxiliary 2 Octet
40039
function state
40040~40064 Reserve 50 Octet Reserve , cannot write.
Holding 2 Octet
40000+n*32+1 Reserve
register 2 Octet
40000+n*32+2 Setting mode
(W) Setting fan
40000+n*32+3 2 Octet
speed
Setting 2 Octet
40000+n*32+4 The same as the 1# indoor unit.
temperature
n
40000+n*32+5 Time on 2 Octet

40000+n*32+6 Time off 2 Octet

Auxiliary 2 Octet
40000+n*32+7
function state
(40000+n*32+8)~ 50 Octet
Reserve Reserve , cannot write.
(40000+n*32+32）
42017 Reserve 2 Octet

42018 Setting mode 2 Octet

Setting fan 2 Octet
42019
speed
Setting 2 Octet
42020 The same as the 1# indoor unit.
63 temperature
42021 Time on 2 Octet

42022 Time off 2 Octet

Auxiliary 2 Octet
42023
function state
42024~42048 Reserve 50 Octet Reserve, cannot write.

237 Control System

 Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Modbus Indoor Modbus
address register Data name Length Explanation
description
number address
Can group control the 0-7# indoor
64 / / / units and the format is the same as
the above each indoor unit.
Can group control the 8-15# indoor
65 / / / units and the format is the same as
the above each indoor unit.
Can group control the 16-23# indoor
66 / / / units and the format is the same as
the above each indoor unit.
Can group control the 24-31# indoor
67 / / / units and the format is the same as
the above each indoor unit.
Can group control the 32-39# indoor
68 / / / units and the format is the same as
the above each indoor unit.
Can group control the 40-47# indoor
69 / / / units and the format is the same as
the above each indoor unit.
Can group control the 48-55# indoor
70 / / / units and the format is the same as
the above each indoor unit.
Can group control the 56-63# indoor
71 / / / units and the format is the same as
the above each indoor unit.
Can group control the 0-63# indoor
72 / / / units and the format is the same as
the above each indoor unit.
Explain：
• For Coil
Address = (Value of Modbus address for registers) - 1
• For Input register
Address = (Value of Modbus address for registers) - 30001
• For holding register
Address = (Value of Modbus address for registers) - 40001

Control System 238

Control System
[Link] Outdoor unit variable mapping table
Modbus Outdoor Modbus
address register Data name Explanation
description
number address
8192+1 Cool mode 1: Yes, 0: No
8194 Heat mode 1: Yes, 0: No
8195 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8196 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8197 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8198 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8199 Lock indicator 1: Yes, 0: No
8200 Force locking 1: Yes, 0: No
8201 Low speed 1: Yes, 0: No
8202 Medium speed 1: Yes, 0: No
8203 High speed 1: Yes, 0: No
8204 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8205 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8206 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8207 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8208 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8209 4-way valveST1 1: on, 0: off
8210 Auxiliary 4-way valve ST2 1: on, 0: off
8211 Solenoid valve SV1 1: on, 0: off
8212 Solenoid valve SV2 1: on, 0: off
8213 Solenoid valve SV3 1: on, 0: off
8214 Solenoid valve SV4 1: on, 0: off
8215 Solenoid valve SV5 1: on, 0: off
8216 Solenoid valve SV6 1: on, 0: off
Coils(R) 0 8217 Compressor 1 1: on, 0: off
8218 Compressor 2 1: on, 0: off
8219 Compressor 3 1: on, 0: off
8220 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8221 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8222 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8223 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8224 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8225 E0 Outdoor unit communication error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8226 E1 Phase sequence error or no phase 1:Error, 0: Normal
E2 Communication error between
8227 1:Error, 0: Normal
outdoor and indoor unit
8228 E4 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
E3 T3/T4/digital compressor
8229 1:Error, 0: Normal
discharge temperature sensor error
8230 E5 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8231 E6 T6 sensor error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8232 E7 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8233 E8 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8234 E9 Voltage error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8235 H1 Network communication error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8236 H0 DSP communication error 1:Error, 0: Normal
H2 Outdoor unit quantities decreasing
8237 1:Error, 0: Normal
error (Only master unit effective)
H3 Outdoor unit quantities increasing
8238 Reserve, stay 0
error (Only master unit effective)

239 Control System

 Control System

Outdoor unit variable mapping table

Modbus Outdoor Modbus
address register Data name Explanation
description
number address
8239 EE Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8240 EF Other error
8241 P0 Compressor top temp. protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8242 P1 Discharge high pressure protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8243 P2 Discharge low pressure protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8244 P3 Current protection of compressor 1 1:protection, 0: Normal
8245 P4 Discharge pipe temp. protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8246 P5 Condenser high temp protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8247 P6 Inverter module protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
0 8248 P7 Current protection of compressor 2 1:protection, 0: Normal
8249 P8 Current protection of compressor 3 1:protection, 0: Normal
P9 Over voltage and under voltage
8250 1:protection, 0: Normal
protections
8251 PA Defrost protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8252 PB Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8253 PC Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8254 PD Oil return 1:protection, 0: Normal
8255 PE Oil Balance 1:protection, 0: Normal
8256 PF Other error 1:protection, 0: Normal
8257~8320 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8320+1 Cool mode 1: Yes, 0: No
8322 Heat mode 1: Yes, 0: No
8323 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8324 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8325 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Coils(R) 8326 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8327 Lock indicator 1: Yes, 0: No
8328 Force locking 1: Yes, 0: No
8329 Low speed 1: Yes, 0: No
8330 Medium speed 1: Yes, 0: No
8331 High speed 1: Yes, 0: No
8332 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8333 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8334 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8335 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
1 8336 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8337 4-way valveST1 1: on, 0: off
8338 Auxiliary 4-way valve ST2 1: on, 0: off
8339 Solenoid valve SV1 1: on, 0: off
8340 Solenoid valve SV2 1: on, 0: off
8341 Solenoid valve SV3 1: on, 0: off
8342 Solenoid valve SV4 1: on, 0: off
8343 Solenoid valve SV5 1: on, 0: off
8344 Solenoid valve SV6 1: on, 0: off
8345 Compressor 1 1: on, 0: off
8346 Compressor 2 1: on, 0: off
8347 Compressor 3 1: on, 0: off
8348 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8349 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8350 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8351 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8352 Reserve Reserve, stay 0

Control System 240

Control System

Outdoor unit variable mapping table

Modbus Outdoor Modbus
address register Data name Explanation
description
number address
8353 E0 Outdoor unit communication error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8354 E1 Phase sequence error or no phase 1:Error, 0: Normal
E2 Communication error between
8355 1:Error, 0: Normal
outdoor and indoor unit
8356 E4 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
E3 T3/T4/digital compressor discharge
8357 1:Error, 0: Normal
temperature sensor error
8358 E5 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8359 E6 T6 sensor error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8360 E7 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8361 E8 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8362 E9 Voltage error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8363 H1 Network communication error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8364 H0 DSP communication error 1:Error, 0: Normal
H2 Outdoor unit quantities decreasing
8365 1:Error, 0: Normal
error (Only master unit effective)
H3 Outdoor unit quantities increasing
8366 Reserve, stay 0
error (Only master unit effective)
Coils(R) 1 8367 EE Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8368 EF Other error
8369 P0 Compressor top temp. protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8370 P1 Discharge high pressure protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8371 P2 Discharge low pressure protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8372 P3 Current protection of compressor 1 1:protection, 0: Normal
8373 P4 Discharge pipe temp. protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8374 P5 Condenser high temp protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8375 P6 Inverter module protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8376 P7 Current protection of compressor 2 1:protection, 0: Normal
8377 P8 Current protection of compressor 3 1:protection, 0: Normal
P9 Over voltage and under voltage
8378 1:protection, 0: Normal
protections
8379 PA Defrost protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8380 PB Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8381 PC Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8382 PD Oil return 1:protection, 0: Normal
8383 PE Oil Balance 1:protection, 0: Normal
8384 PF Other error 1:protection, 0: Normal
8385~8448 Reserve Reserve, stay 0

241 Control System

 Control System

Outdoor unit variable mapping table

Modbus Outdoor
Modbus register Data name Explanation
address
description address
number
8192+n*128+1 Cool mode 1: Yes, 0: No
8192+n*128+2 Heat mode 1: Yes, 0: No
8192+n*128+3 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+4 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+5 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+6 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+7 Lock indicator 1: Yes, 0: No
8192+n*128+8 Force locking 1: Yes, 0: No
8192+n*128+9 Low speed 1: Yes, 0: No
8192+n*128+10 Medium speed 1: Yes, 0: No
8192+n*128+11 High speed 1: Yes, 0: No
8192+n*128+12 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+13 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+14 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+15 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+16 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+17 4-way valve ST1 1: on, 0: off
8192+n*128+18 Auxiliary 4-way valve ST2 1: on, 0: off
8192+n*128+19 Solenoid valve SV1 1: on, 0: off
8192+n*128+20 Solenoid valve SV2 1: on, 0: off
8192+n*128+21 Solenoid valve SV3 1: on, 0: off
8192+n*128+22 Solenoid valve SV4 1: on, 0: off
8192+n*128+23 Solenoid valve SV5 1: on, 0: off
8192+n*128+24 Solenoid valve SV6 1: on, 0: off
8192+n*128+25 Compressor 1 1: on, 0: off
Coils(R) n 8192+n*128+26 Compressor 2 1: on, 0: off
8192+n*128+27 Compressor 3 1: on, 0: off
8192+n*128+28 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+29 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+30 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+31 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+32 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+33 E0 Outdoor unit communication error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8192+n*128+34 E1 Phase sequence error or no phase 1:Error, 0: Normal
E2 Communication error between
8192+n*128+35 1:Error, 0: Normal
outdoor and indoor unit
8192+n*128+36 E4 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
E3 T3/T4/digital compressor
8192+n*128+37 1:Error, 0: Normal
discharge temperature sensor error
8192+n*128+38 E5 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+39 E6 T6 sensor error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8192+n*128+40 E7 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+41 E8 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+42 E9 Voltage error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8192+n*128+43 H1 Network communication error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8192+n*128+44 H0 DSP communication error 1:Error, 0: Normal
H2 Outdoor unit quantities decreasing
8192+n*128+45 1:Error, 0: Normal
error (Only master unit effective)
H3 Outdoor unit quantities increasing
8192+n*128+46 Reserve, stay 0
error (Only master unit effective)
8192+n*128+47 EE Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+48 EF Other error

Control System 242

Control System
Outdoor unit variable mapping table
Modbus Outdoor
Modbus register Data name Explanation
address
description address
number
8192+n*128+49 P0 Compressor top temp. protection 1:protection, 0:Normal
8192+n*128+50 P1 Discharge high pressure protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8192+n*128+51 P2 Discharge low pressure protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8192+n*128+52 P3 Current protection of compressor 1 1:protection, 0: Normal
8192+n*128+53 P4 Discharge pipe temp. protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8192+n*128+54 P5 Condenser high temp protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8192+n*128+55 P6 Inverter module protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8192+n*128+56 P7 Current protection of compressor 2 1:protection, 0: Normal
8192+n*128+57 P8 Current protection of compressor 3 1:protection, 0: Normal
n P9 Over voltage and under voltage
8192+n*128+58 1:protection, 0: Normal
protections
8192+n*128+59 PA Defrost protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8192+n*128+60 PB Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+61 PC Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8192+n*128+62 PD Oil return 1:protection, 0: Normal
8192+n*128+63 PE Oil Balance 1:protection, 0: Normal
8192+n*128+64 PF Other error 1:protection, 0: Normal
(8192+n*128+65)~
Reserve Reserve, stay 0
(8192+n*128+128)
8577 Cool mode 1: Yes, 0: No
8578 Heat mode 1: Yes, 0: No
8579 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8580 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8581 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8582 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
Coils(R) 8583 Lock indicator 1: Yes, 0: No
8584 Force locking 1: Yes, 0: No
8585 Low speed 1: Yes, 0: No
8586 Medium speed 1: Yes, 0: No
8587 High speed 1: Yes, 0: No
8588 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8589 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8590 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8591 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
3 8592 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8593 4-way valveST1 1: on, 0: off
8594 Auxiliary 4-way valve ST2 1: on, 0: off
8595 Solenoid valve SV1 1: on, 0: off
8596 Solenoid valve SV2 1: on, 0: off
8597 Solenoid valve SV3 1: on, 0: off
8598 Solenoid valve SV4 1: on, 0: off
8599 Solenoid valve SV5 1: on, 0: off
8600 Solenoid valve SV6 1: on, 0: off
8601 Compressor 1 1: on, 0: off
8602 Compressor 2 1: on, 0: off
8603 Compressor 3 1: on, 0: off
8604 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8605 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8606 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8607 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8608 Reserve Reserve, stay 0

243 Control System

 Control System
Outdoor unit variable mapping table

Modbus Outdoor Modbus

address register Data name Explanation
description
number address
8609 E0 Outdoor unit communication error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8610 E1 Phase sequence error or no phase 1:Error, 0: Normal
E2 Communication error between
8611 1:Error, 0: Normal
outdoor and indoor unit
8612 E4 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
E3 T3/T4/digital compressor discharge
8613 1:Error, 0: Normal
temperature sensor error
8614 E5 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8615 E6 T6 sensor error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8616 E7 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8617 E8 Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8618 E9 Voltage error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8619 H1 Network communication error 1:Error, 0: Normal
8620 H0 DSP communication error 1:Error, 0: Normal
H2 Outdoor unit quantities decreasing
8621 1:Error, 0: Normal
error (Only master unit effective)
H3 Outdoor unit quantities increasing
8622 Reserve, stay 0
error (Only master unit effective)
Coils(R) 3 8623 EE Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8624 EF Other error
8625 P0 Compressor top temp. protection 1:protection, 0:Normal
8626 P1 Discharge high pressure protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8627 P2 Discharge low pressure protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8628 P3 Current protection of compressor 1 1:protection, 0: Normal
8629 P4 Discharge pipe temp. protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8630 P5 Condenser high temp. protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8631 P6 Inverter module protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8632 P7 Current protection of compressor 2 1:protection, 0: Normal
8633 P8 Current protection of compressor 3 1:protection, 0: Normal
P9 Over voltage and under voltage
8634 1:protection, 0: Normal
protections
8635 PA Defrost protection 1:protection, 0: Normal
8636 PB Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8637 PC Reserve Reserve, stay 0
8638 PD Oil return 1:protection, 0: Normal
8639 PE Oil Balance 1:protection, 0: Normal
8640 PF Other error 1:protection, 0: Normal
8641~8704 Reserve Reserve, stay 0

Control System 244

Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Modbus Indoor Modbus
address register Data name Explanation
description
number address
32048+1 Reserve Reserve, stay 0

32050 The first byte of models message

The second byte of model
32051
message
0~240 means the temperature
32052 Ambient temperature T4 range is from - 20 to 100℃
(temp*2+20)
0~240 means the temperature
32053 Condenser outlet temperature T3 range is from - 20 to 100℃
(temp*2+20)
0~240 means the temperature
32054 Condenser inlet temperature T6 range is from - 20 to 100℃
(temp*2+20)
0~240 means the temperature
The discharge temperature of
32056 range is from - 20 to 100℃
compressor 2
(temp*2+20)
0~240 means the temperature
0 The discharge temperature of
32057 range is from - 20 to 100℃
compressor 3
(temp*2+20)
0~250 means 0~250 indoor
32058 Quantity of indoor units
units
0~200 means the current
32059 Current of compressor 1
range from 0A to 200A
0~200 means the current
32060 Current of compressor 2
Input range from 0A to 200A
register 0~200 means the current
32061 Current of compressor 3
(R ) range from 0A to 200A
32062 Inverter compressor frequency 0~250 means 0~250Hz
32063 Opening degree of EXV 1 00h~07Dh means 0~1000 step
open degree and resolution is
32064 Opening degree of EXV 2 8 step; 0FFh means no the
data.
Each 1 means 1HP, and 0~250
32065 Capacity of outdoor unit
means 0~250
32066~32080 Reserve Reserve, stay 0

32081 Reserve Reserve, stay 0

32082 The first byte of models message

The second byte of model
32083
message
0~240 means the temperature
32084 Ambient temperature T4 range is from - 20 to 100℃
(temp*2+20)
1 0~240 means the temperature
32085 Condenser outlet temperature T3 range is from - 20 to 100℃
(temp*2+20)
0~240 means the temperature
32086 Condenser inlet temperature T6 range is from - 20 to 100℃
(temp*2+20)
0~240 means the temperature
The discharge temperature of
32087 range is from - 20 to 100℃
compressor 2
(temp*2+20)

245 Control System

 Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Modbus Indoor Modbus
address register Data name Explanation
description
number address
0~200 means the current range
32089 Current of compressor 3
from 0A to 200A
32090 Inverter compressor frequency 0~250 means 0~250Hz
32091 Opening degree of EXV 1 00h~07Dh means 0~1000 step
1 open degree and resolution is 8
32092 Opening degree of EXV 2
step; 0FFh means no the data.
Each 1 means 1HP, and 0~250
32093 Capacity of outdoor unit
means 0~250
32094 Reserve Reserve, stay 0

32113 Reserve Reserve, stay 0

32114 The first byte of models message

The second byte of model
32115
message
0~240 means the temperature
32116 Ambient temperature T4 range is from - 20 to 100℃
(temp*2+20)
0~240 means the temperature
32117 Condenser outlet temperature T3 range is from - 20 to 100℃
(temp*2+20)
Input 0~240 means the temperature
register 32118 Condenser inlet temperature T6 range is from - 20 to 100℃
(R ) (temp*2+20)
0~240 means the temperature
The discharge temperature of
32119 range is from - 20 to 100℃
compressor 2
(temp*2+20)
2 0~240 means the temperature
The discharge temperature of
32120 range is from - 20 to 100℃
compressor 3
(temp*2+20)
0~250 means 0~250 indoor
32121 Quantity of indoor units
units
0~200 means the current range
32122 Current of compressor 1
from 0A to 200A
0~200 means the current range
32123 Current of compressor 2
from 0A to 200A
0~200 means the current range
32124 Current of compressor 3
from 0A to 200A
32125 Inverter compressor frequency 0~250 means 0~250Hz
32126 Opening degree of EXV 1 00h~07Dh means 0~1000 step
open degree and resolution is 8
32127 Opening degree of EXV 2
step; 0FFh means no the data.
Each 1 means 1HP, and 0~250
32128 Capacity of outdoor unit
means 0~250
32129 Reserve Reserve, stay 0

Control System 246

Control System
Indoor unit variable mapping table
Modbus Indoor Modbus
address register Data name Explanation
description
number address
32145 Reserve Reserve, stay 0

32146 The first byte of models message

The second byte of model
32147
message
0~240 means the temperature
32148 Ambient temperature T4 range is from - 20 to 100℃
(temp*2+20)
0~240 means the temperature
32149 Condenser outlet temperature T3 range is from - 20 to 100℃
(temp*2+20)
0~240 means the temperature
32150 Condenser inlet temperature T6 range is from - 20 to 100℃
(temp*2+20)
0~240 means the temperature
The discharge temperature of
32151 range is from - 20 to 100℃
compressor 2
Input (temp*2+20)
register 3 0~240 means the temperature
(R ) The discharge temperature of
32152 range is from - 20 to 100℃
compressor 3
(temp*2+20)
0~250 means 0~250 indoor
32153 Quantity of indoor units
units
0~200 means the current range
32154 Current of compressor 1
from 0A to 200A
0~200 means the current range
32155 Current of compressor 2
from 0A to 200A
0~200 means the current range
32156 Current of compressor 3
from 0A to 200A
32157 Inverter compressor frequency 0~250 means 0~250Hz
32158 Opening degree of EXV 1 00h~07Dh means 0~1000 step
open degree and resolution is 8
32159 Opening degree of EXV 2
step; 0FFh means no the data.
Each 1 means 1HP, and 0~250
32160 Capacity of outdoor unit
means 0~250
32161 Reserve Reserve, stay 0

Explain：
Address = (Value of Modbus address for registers) - 1
• For Input register
Address = (Value of Modbus address for registers) - 30001
• For Holding register
Address = (Value of Modbus address for registers) - 40001

247 Control System

 Control Syste
em

4.4 M-interface gatteway: IM

MM441V4
4PA512

M--INTERFACE
E gateway is used for querying
q and
d controls th
he air condittioning indooor unit, and transmits th
he
sta
ate informatiion of the ind
door unit to the compute
er and trans
smits the controlling andd querying orders
o sent by
b
e computer tto the indoor unit.
the

E Gateway has 8 M-nett terminals, 1 LAN terminal, 8 M-nett terminal inddication lam
M--INTERFACE mps, 4 state
dis
splay lamps (Power, Sta
atus, Alarm, and Modem
m) and a pow
wer switch. Connection
C tto the centra
al air
conditioner system throug
gh the M-nett terminal, an s the local arrea networkk or Internet network
nd connects
thrrough a LAN
N terminal. Computer
C or other simila
ar devices ca NTERFACE WEB throug
an visit M-IN gh Brower,
and the local o
or remote co
ontrol device
es.
otes: M-Inte
No erface gatew
way needs to
t be installled at the end
e of the XYE
X or K1K
K2E communication wire
e,
cannot be installed in the middle
m of the
e XYE or K1
1K2E communication wire. Connecttion needs to m2
o use 0.7mm
2
~ 1.0mm
1 thre
ee cores shie
elded wire.

Control System 248

8
Control System
4.4
4.1 Gatew
way structu
ure

※ Dimensiions: 319*25
51*66.4mm

※ Detailed
d drawing of installation holes (Unit: mm)

249
9 Control System
m
 Control Syste
em
4.4
4.2 WEB h
home page
e of M-inte
erface gatteway

M--INTERFACE
E is based on
o WEB tec
chnology, un
nrelated to computer or similar devicces operatio
onal systems.
M--INTERFACE o the networrk then can browse the
E insert into e WEB page o the system
e through thhe browser of
atform, we ssuggest using IE (9.0 or above), Fire
pla efox (11.0 or above), Ch o Safari ((5.1
hrome (18.00 or above) or
or above).

Control System 250

0
Control System
4.4
4.3 M-INTE
ERFACE Network
N

1) M-INTERFA
ACE gatewa
ay can conne
ect to the loccal area netw
work or Interrnet networkk through a LAN
L termina
al.
2) M-net termiinals are listted to be tw
wo rows, 1 to
o 4 is XYE terminals,
t d E terminals.
and 5 to 8 is K1, K2 and
Co
omputer or o
other similarr devices ca NTERFACE WEB throug
an visit M-IN gh browser,, and the loc
cal or remotte
control devices.

251
1 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em

4.5 Data c
converterr CCM15

4.5
5.1 Product introdu
uction

CC
CM15 is a da
ata converte
er which can
n realize datta conversio
on between the
t IP protoccol and the 485 protoco
ol,
pro
oviding the TCP / IP port
p for VRF
F system off Midea to achieve
a WE
EB/HTTP/TC
CP/IP access. Users ca
an
access Midea VRF system
m easily thro
ough the LA N or WAN.
WE age visiting to the VRF system, including air-coonditioner state browsing
EB system ffunctions acchieve webpa g,
airr-conditionerr control and
d system setttings.
Us
sers can co
ontrol the A/C
A systems
s commodio
ously throug er, iPhone, iPad or oth
gh compute her intelligent
terrminals. WE
EB function realizes
r VRF
F system's w
webpage ac
ccess. You can
c login thee web and monitor
m signal
or ground A//C when yo
ou input "h
http: // ww
[Link] n" (With M
[Link] Midea logo) or "http: //
ww [Link]" (No brand) on th
[Link] he browser a
address.
Th
he software h
has been up
ploaded to th
he APP STO
ORE and use
ers can inpu
ut "Midea" too search, you
u can find th
he
software called
d "Midea MD
DV" and dow
wnload it forr free.
Ba
asic princip
ple
1) CCM15 colllected data and control VRF system
m through 48
85 bus
2) Built-in a W c control the A/C and system configuration
Web server, can
3) Can upload
d the collecte
ed data to th
he Cloud serrver
4) The phone /pad get the
e units 'state
es from the C
Cloud serverr
5) The phone /pad sends the control order
o to the Cloud serve
er, and the Cloud
C serverr will transm
mit to CCM15
5
and then CCM
M15 operate the order to
o units.

Control System 252

2
Control System
Integrated technology
1) 485 communication technology
2) TCP/IP communication technology
3) WEB server technology
4) Cloud server technology
5) Linux technology
6) iOS App/Android App development technology

4.5.2 Main features

One cloud server can be connected thousands of CCM15.

One user can control many CCM15 gateways.
Can check the state of each A/C.
Can control group, area or single A/C.
With the weekly schedule control function.
Can query operation logs and fault records.
Intelligent control: you can control and query the A/C through iPhone, iPad or other intelligent
terminals anytime and anywhere.

Locking and unlocking function: Locking mode, fan speed, temperature and remote controller through
LAN.

Convenient operation: Large screen display, and temperature available fingers sliding adjustment and
synchronous display for iPad, iPhone and the other intelligent terminal.

WEB function: Support various intelligent terminal and PC access.

WEB browser: IE 6.0, Safari 4.0, Chrome 18.0, UC 8.4 or over.
Operation system: Windows/Linux/Unix/Mac/IOS and so on.
Operation platform: PC, Laptop, iPad, iPhone, Android.

253 Control System

 Control Syste
em
4.5
5.3 Softwa
are downloads

So
oftware dow
wnloads forr iPhone and iPad:
Un
nder the App
p store to sea
arch "Midea
a", you can fiind software
e called "Mid
dea MDV" annd "Midea MDV
M HD", an
nd
it will
w display th
he following
g interface, you
y can dow
wnload it for free.
f
IPh
hone page

Fig.0.1
iPa
ad page

Fig.0.2
2

So
oftware dow
wnloads forr Android so
oftware:
1. Input "http
p: // www.m [Link]" or "http: // [Link]
[Link].c w [Link]"on thhe browser address an
nd
enter the Web
b interface.

2. Click the " " icon can

c be down
nloaded.

Control System 254

4
Control System

Fig.0
0.3
No
otes:
Th
he download
d address of Midea brand Android so
oftware is “h
[Link]
[Link]"; the
e download
address of No brand Andrroid software
e is “[Link]
[Link] " and the
t customeer brand And
droid softwarre
can be downlo
oaded in the
e correspond
ding custome
er brand address)

4.5
5.4 Operattion & ins
stallation introductio
on

4.5
5.4.1 Sep 1:: Wire conn
nection

Th
he system includes A/C system, data converter, router, clou
ud server and control terrminal.
CC
CM15 can b
be directly connected
c with
w outdoor//indoor units
s' XYE port. If you wannt to use th
he centralize
ed
controller CCM
M03/CCM30
0, you can co
onnect to the
e network bu
us F1F2E off CCM. It cann connect up
p to 64 indoo
or
units.

ote:
No
1. If it is conne
ected to outd
door XYE po
ort, then the
e master outd
door unit should be set as auto add
dressing.
2. The indoor units can co ems, but the indoor addrress should not the sam
ome from diffferent syste me.
3. If connected
d to indoor or nits directly, the port is XYE.
o outdoor un X But if connected too indoor centtral controlle
er,
the
e port is F1F
F2E.
255
5 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
4. The networkk port is con
nnected to ro
outer
5. Please makke sure the CCM15
C and the PC are under the same
s router
6. Please use wire conne
ection as prio nd gateway get by wirelless and con
ority, becausse the IP an nnection ma
ay
be in the netw
work segmen
nt that get by
y wire conne
ection.
Wh
hen the wirin according to the following steps stricctly.
ng is correcttion, please operation a

4.5
5.4.2 Step 2
2: apply an account of cloud serv
ver

(1)) Please vissit Midea cloud serverr [Link]

[Link]
[Link] orr [Link]
[Link].c
cn and presss
“Register”
(2)) Input the p
password and Verify Cod
de
(3)) After succe
essfully regisstered, pleas
se remembe
er the ID, pa
assword and
d Cloud servver IP well.

(1) (2))

(3)

Control System 256

6
Control System
4.5
5.4.3 Sep 3:: set the nettwork

 Connect the PC and

d CCM15 to the same rrouter
① Please entter the "Conttrol panel" or
o click "Ope
en Network and
a Sharing Center"
② Click "Loca
al Area Conn
nection"
③ Click “Deta
ails”
④ Get the info
ormation:
V4 Address:: [Link]
IPV
Su
ubnet mask: 255.255.25
55.0
IPv
v4 Default g
gateway: 10..56.0.1
Th
he default IP
P address of
o CCM15 is
s 192.168.1
1.200, and then
t the PC
C and CCM
M15 are not in the sam
me
network segment.
Ple
ease take P
PC and CCM
M15 to connect with tthe same ro
outer and th
he router ccan access the Interne
et.
CC
CM15 will au
utomatically change itts IP addres
ss to the same network
k segment w
with the PC
C. The new IP
I
ad
ddress of th
he CCM15 is
s "[Link].200"(ta
ake 10.56.3..200 for exa
ample).
Notes: [Link].200 is d remembe rs it for nex
i the new IP address o f the CCM15 gateway and xt time login
n.

(1)

(2)

257
7 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em

(3) (4)

 If there is
s no a route
er between CCM15 and
d PC, you can
c do it like
e that:
The
e specific steps are as follows:
Fir
rstly, you need to usse the netw
work cable tto connect CCM15 and computer ddirectly and don't neeed
an exchanger or router. If the ex
xchanger or router has
s been conn
nected to tthe computer, please
disconnect itt.
e wiring diiagram as following:
The f

(1)) Click the "P

Properties" on
o the below
w diagram
(2)) Select "Intternet Prop
perties Ver
rsion 4(TCP /IPv4)"
(3)) Click the "P
Properties" button
b
(4)) Select thee "Use the following IP address"" and input
t the follo
owing inforrmation:
IP address: [Link] (take "192.168.1. 100"for exa
ample)
bnet mask: [Link] (tak
Sub ke "255.255..255.0"for example)
Def
fault gatewway: 192.1668.1.1
Notes: "xxx" range fromm 0 to 255.

Control System 258

8
Control System

(2)

(3
3)

(1)

(4))

259
9 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
4.5
5.4.4 Step 4 Configura
ation for CC
CM15

Aft
ter configuuring the IPP address, please
p open IE browser and input CCM15
C IP adddress (aaa.b
[Link].2000)
to enter the WEB page and
a click "Config." buutton:
ke 10.56.3..200 for exxample:
Tak

m Step 2: apply
Get from a an
account of cloud se
erver

200), take [Link]

IP: CCM15 IP address ([Link].2 0 for examp
ple
Netmask: 255..255.255.0.
v4 Default ga
Gateway: [Link] (gett from "IPv ateway")
oud Server,, Cloud Useer ID and Password/Con
Clo P nfirm infor
rmation can
n get from Step 2.
Reg on: automattic registratio
gister butto on and bindiing cloud se
erver.
Ba
ack button: b
back to the main
m page.
Aft t repower on the CCMM15.
ter settingg and clickk the "Apply" button, you need to

Control System 260

0
Control System
4.5
5.4.5 Cloud services webpage
w

 After succcessfully sett CCM15, ple

ease visit clo
oud server, and use the
e ID and passsword which is gotten by
b
step 2 to llogin into the
e cloud serv
ver.
Input http
p://[Link]
[Link] or http
p://[Link] on the brow
wser will log
gin the clou
ud
services w
webpage, it will display the
t following
g dialog:

Fig.2.8
put the Userr ID and passsword, click
Inp k the "Login"" button will enter the WEB
W control ppage.
No
otes:
1. Select "Rem
member it" can
c record th
he user ID a
and passworrd, it is conve
enient for neext login.
2. Select "As Group Use
er" and one user can m
manage man
ny CCM15, the specificc operation as shown in
"Group contro
ol".
 
 Control A
A/C system by Cloud server
s
Aftter login succcessfully, ca
an get below
w interface:
Co
ontrol each A
A/C indoor unit
u by press
sing each ico
on

All Off W
Weekly sc
chedule tim
mer
Group control

A
Area control

Fig.2.9

261
1 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
Re
efresh: Refre
esh the webpage
AllCtrl: Group control all th
he indoor un
nits.
AllOff: can turn
n off all the indoor
i units.
Sc
chedule: can ekly schedule timer funcction.
n set the wee
Re ect the region or unit beffore and clicck "Rename"" button can
ename: Sele n rename.
Are
ea +/ Area --: add a new
w region or delete the reg
gion.
C+/AC-: can add indoor unit to the area
AC a or delette units from
m area.
Sa
ave: Click Sa
ave button after
a weekly schedule tim
mer setting
Error Table: ca
an check the
e error code
es
Ala
arms: can ch
heck the fau
ult records.
Logs: can che ation records.
eck the opera
Pa
assword: can
n modify the
e user’s pass
sword.
Logout: return to the main
n page as Fig.2.8.

 Weekly s
schedule tim
mer function
Firstly click the "Schedu a then clicck the area which you want to sett a week tim
ule" button and me, it can se
et
weekly
w sched
dule timer fu f this area .
unction can for
MON
M - SUN means from
m Monday to
o Sunday.
Number
N 1-20
0 means 20 periods schedule.
Time
T zone: in
n order to en
nsure that weekly
w sched nction can run normallyy, please select your local
dule time fun
time zone and click "Ena
able" button.
And ess "Save" button to sav
A then pre ve the setting
gs

Fig.2.9
F

Control System 262

2
Control System
 A/C regio
on setting
In the initial intterface of Clloud server, we can onlyy control the A/C system
m by individu al or by All. So if we want
to control som
me of these in
ndoor units, then we ne egion, and place the inddoor units wh
eed to add re hich we wan
nt
to group contrrol to this reg
gion. Then we
w can group
p control all the indoor units
u under tthis region.
Pre
ess “Area+” or “Area-”, you will get below interfface：
Yo
ou can set th
he name of each
e room or
o region
Yo
ou also can d
delete some
e region

Fig.3.0

To add A/C in f each region, press “A

ndoor units for AC+” or “AC
C-”, you will get
g below innterface:

Fig.3.1
Select
S the co
orresponding
g address co
ode, and pre
ess OK to ad
dd this indoo
or unit to thiss region

263
3 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
 Click the single unit can
c control the
t unit, for example, setting
s the operation moode, tempera
ature and fa
an
speed and
d so on. Afte
er setting an
nd click "App
ply" button to
o confirm.

Fig
g.3.2
Turn off" b
button can turn off the air
a conditione
ers.
Click "+" o
or "-" button can adjust the
t setting ttemperature.
Click "App
ply" button after
a setting the operatio
on mode, tem
mperature and
a fan speeed.

 Click the "Lock" button

n, can set th
he operation
n mode, temperature, fan speed andd remote controller.
otes: Some old indoor units
No u can loc
ck remote co
ontroller only
y.

Fig3.3
Click "Bacck" button or butto
on will return
n to the main
n control pag
ge.

Control System 264

4
Control System
 Group co
ontrol
Wh
hen more th
han one CCM
M15, please
e select as g roup user, in
nput user ID
D and passw
word of mastter CCM15
wh
hich you can
n define it byy yourselves
s, one user ccan manage
er multi CCM
M15.
1. Select "As G n, it will enterr the group user control interface.
Group User"" when login
2. Click the "E
Edit" button
3. Input ID and
d password of other data converterss.

(1)

(2)

265
5 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em

(3)

(4)

4. Input each CCM15 ID and passwo

ord, and the
e name can be input forr free. After setting and click "Applyy"
button, one usser can manage many CCM15.
C
5. The operatio
on of each CCM15
C is sa
ame as befo
ore.

Control System 266

6
Control System
 Error table & Alarms
s & Logs

267
7 Control System
m
 Control Syste
em
[Link] iPhon
ne software
e introduction

iPh
hone APP ssoftware is designed
d forr Apple IOS
S to control the
t A/C system. Underr the App sto
ore to searcch
"M
Midea MDV", you can find the softwa
are called "M
Midea MDV"", and you ca
an downloadd it for free.
Aftter connectin
ng and open
n the softwa
are to login, iit will enter the
t following
g pages.

Device C
Configuration
(Reserve
ed)

Scan (R
Reserved)

Login

Virtual tria
al

Control System 268

8
Control System
De
evice Config
guration:
Th
his function
n is available for upgra
ade version CCM15.
Pre
ess "Device
e Configuration" option to
o enter the ffollowing pa
age.
he phone and CCM15 must
Th m in the same
s LAN n
networks and
d the router can accesss to the Interrnet normallly,
clic
ck “Apply to
o Device" op
ption, you do
on’t manuall y configure,, it will be co
onfigured seettings autom
matically. Yo
ou
can get a rand
dom ID number, please keep it well.. If you sharre the following QR codee to others, and then ca
an
als
so login CCM
M15 and ope
eration.
No
otes:
If you
y have allready configured cloud on the built-in WEB pag
d account o ge and needd not to con
nfiguration by
b
phone softwarre again.

If the
t phone an
nd CCM15 aren’t
a in the same LAN networks orr the router can’t
c accesss to the Interrnet normally,
Apply to Device" option, it will displ ay the follow
aftter clicking “A wing page and please chheck.

269
9 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
Sc
can option:
Th
his function
n is available for upgra
ade version CCM15.
Yo
ou can share
e the QR cod
de to others and you ca
an also scan other’s QR code and loogin their ac
ccount.

Lo
ogin option::
If you
y have alrready registe
er an accoun oud server and manual configured
nt on the clo c thhe CCM15, you can input
the
e ID accountt and passw ollow page, and click OK
word in the fo K button to login.

ID num
mber

Passwo
ord

Control System 270

0
Control System
Ma
ain Page:

Group control key

Refresh key Setting keyy

Seet temp. /
ro
oom temp.

Indoo
or address

S
Statues icon
n

Cliick each sta

atues icon, iti will display all units w
which are un
nder this current statuees. Click the
e statues ico
on
again will backk to all units page.

Cool Heat
H Fan OFF Errror

Lo
ong press u
unit can rename:

271
1 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
Co
ontrol page
Just click the ssingle unit can enter the
e single unit control page.

Unit number

Returrn to the
previo
ous menu Refresh th
he unit status

Room tem
mperature
S
Setting Tem
mperature

Operation mode
Fan sppeed control area

Swing icon Error ico

con

Turn on/off
o key
No otes:
t swing function is ope
If the eration, the swing icon w
will be light on
o and there
e is malfuncttion, the erro
or icon will be
b
light on.
Grroup contro
ol page

Click the
e
Group key
k

etting key
Se
Cliick the settin
ng key will enter
e the settting page.

After cclicking
“Acco unt
Info“ o
option

Control System 272

2
Control System
Ad
dd a new arrea:
1. Press “All “o
option

2. Press
3. Create new
w name and input
i name.
4. Press settin
ng key
5. Choose machine config
guration
6. Add
A new ma
achine No by
b press add
d button
7. Input the un
nit address (0-63)
( and click Confirm
m button
8. Delete machine or Rename Area by bottom bu
uttons

(1
1)

(3)
(2)

(5)
(4)

(6)

(7)

273
3 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
4.5
5.4.7 iPad s
software inttroduction

Un
nder the App
p store to search "Midea
a MDV", you
u can find the
e software called
c "Mideaa MDV HD", and you ca
an
download it for free.
Login page:
IP:: [Link] (default)
Po
ort: 3562(deffault)
ID: user ID number
ID and passwo
ord get from
m step 2.

Co
ontrol main page:
Refresh the unit status
s

Setting key
k
All units
u
Weekly
e setting
schedule
Current area
a

Setting Temp.
T

Operation mode

Fan spee
ed

Error ico
on
Add a ne
ew area

Turn on/offf key

No
otes: Status area
a Swing
S icon
If the
t swing function is ope
eration, the swing icon w
will be light on
o and there
e is malfuncttion, the erro
or icon will be
b
light on.

Control System 274

4
Control System
Cliick the Settin
ng key will enter
e the settting page a nd can chan
nge the IP address, passsword and so
s on.

Cliick the wee

ekly schedulle key will enter
e the w
weekly sched
dule function setting. Y
You can sett multi perio
od
schedule for p
per day in the
e weekly setting page.

275
5 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
Ad
dd a new arrea
1. Click b
button to add
d a new area
a
2. Select an arrea name orr create an area
a name
3. Add
A a new iindoor unit and
a input ind
door addresss (0-63).
4. Click "Done
e" key will fin
nish.
5. Delete unit or Rename Area by bottom buttonss.

(1) (2)

(4)

(3)

Control System 276

6
Control System
4.5
5.4.8 Andro
oid software
e introduction

Lo
ogin page:
Th
he phone an
nd CCM15 must be in the same LAN netwo
orks and the
e router cann access to
o the Interne
et
normally.
or older version CCM15, you need to
Fo t registered
d an accoun
nt from the cloud server first, and th
hen input use
er
ID, password a
and select lo
ogin key to login.

User ID
D Scan function

Passwo
ord

"Sc
can" function and "Config" option is only ava
ailable for upgrade vers
sion CCM1 5:
If you
y don't havve anyone ID account, you
y can also
o click the "c
config" option and selectt "Register new
n accountt",
you will get a n
new ID acco
ount and pas
ssword, plea
ase keep it well.
w
Aftter register need to clicck "Use the account", yyou don’t manually
m con
nfigure, it wiill be configured setting
gs
automatically.
Yo
ou can share
e the followin
ng QR code to others, a
and then the
ey can also lo
ogin CCM155 and operation.

(4) (3)

(2)

(1)

277
7 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
Aftter login and
d click "All Devices",
D it will
w show all the units. Click
C on the single
s unit ccan control and
a query th
he
operation mod
de, temperatture, fan spe
eed and turn
n on/off the unit.
u Select the
t All-on orr All-off key can
c turn on or
o
turrn off all unitts.

If long presss "All Device

es", it will dis
splay as the following pa
age and you
u can operatte it.
Group
G conttrol: can con
ntrol all units
s;
Add:
A can ad
dd a new are
ea;
Import data
a from gatew
way:
Click
C this bu
utton will syynchronize th
he name of the units and area to mobile
m phonne when you
u rename th
he
units on the cloud serve
er.
Export data
a to gatewa
ay:
Click
C this bu
utton will syn
nchronize th
he name of tthe units and
d area to the
e cloud servver when you rename th
he
units on mobile phone.

Control System 278

8
Control System
Ad
dd new area
a
1. Click Add ne
ew area buttton
2. Input an are
ea name
3. Build an are
ea successfu
ully
4. Need to add
d the unit to the area
5. Input the un
nit’s addresss (0-63)

(2)
(1)

(3)

(55)
(4)

279
9 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
If long presss the new arrea, it will dis
splay as the
e following page and you
u can operatte it.
Group
G conttrol: can con
ntrol all units
s;
Rename: ca
an change th
he area nam
me
Delete: dele
ete this area
a
Add:
A can ad
dd a new are
ea;
Import data
a from gatew
way:
Click
C this bu
utton will syynchronize th
he name of the units and area to mobile
m phonne when you
u rename th
he
units on the cloud serve
er.
Export data
a to gatewa
ay:
Click
C this bu
utton will syn
nchronize th
he name of tthe units and
d area to the
e cloud servver when you rename th
he
units on mobile phone.

hare option:
Sh
Th
his function
n is available for upgra
ade version CCM15.
Yo
ou can scan other’s QR code and lo
ogin their acccount.

otes:
No
Th
he "advance
e" option is
s a reserved
d function.

Control System 280

0
Control System
(11
1) Dimensio
ons

(12
2) Side view
w of CCM15
5

No
ote:
1) 485 indicate
e LED: when
n communic
cation norma
ally between
n CCM15 an
nd indoor un its, LED will flash slowlyy;
2) Internet com
mmunication
n indicates LED:
L when ccommunication normally
y between C
CCM15 and Internet, LE
ED
willl flash slowlly;
3) Power LED: when power on, it will light on.

281
1 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em

5.. Networrk monittoring sy

ystem

5.1 Intelligent Ma
anager of a (IMM) - 4thgen
o Midea neration network
k contro
ol
sy
ystem

Inttelligent Man
nager of Mid
dea, designe
ed specificallly to controll VRF system
ms, is basedd on a centralized forma
at
and dedicated plete control and monito
d to the comp he system’s functions. Itt can be use
oring of all th ed as a
flexible multi-p
purpose systtem and app
plied to a va
ariety of need
ds, accordin e and control
ng to the scaale, purpose
me
ethod of eacch building.

Sy
ystem Confiiguration
 AT compa
atible machine that runs
s Microsoft®
® windows®
 OS: XP P
Professional (English verrsion)
 Windows 7 Home /Prremium/Proffessional
(Correspo
onds to 8 diffferent langu
uages.*)
 32-bit verssion is supp
ported.
 er® Pentium® 2.5GHz or
CPU: Inte o above
 HDD:80 G
GB or more of free spac
ce
 Memory: 2 GB or more
 Display: 1
1024 x 768 dots
d or more
e
 Max.4 reffrigerant systems for 1 in
nterface.
And maximum of 4 M-interfaces,
M ant
64 refrigera
systems, 1,024 indoo
or units, and 256 outdoo
or
units can be controlle
ed by one PC
C.
Th
he details ple
ease refer to
o IMM manu
ual.

Control System 282

2
Control System

6. Accessories

Ap
ppearance Model Descrip
ption

Send the
e electric energy data too outdoor un
nit for
DTS634/DT
TS636
realizing
g network fee
e charge funnction.

MD-NIM05 Match ho
otel card sys
stem to conttrol the air conditioner.
c

Automattically turn off and turn oon the indoor unit, saving
MD-NIM09
energy.

MD-NIM10 Electricitty distributio

on module foor Mini VRF

When ou
utdoor unit is
s working abbnormally, itt can output
KJR-32B/E
E
the outdoor unit’s fault and proteection state.

KJR-150A/M-E Could control

c a group of indoorr units at the
e same time.

AHUKZ-01 Can be used to co onnect VRF

F outdoor units with DX X
AHU or other brand indoor unitss, but canno
ot connect to
AHUKZ-02 the heat recovery sy
ystem.

AHUKZ-03

283
3 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
6.1
1 Digital a
ammeter DTS634/DT
D T636

Th
he digital am
mmeter DTS6
634/DT636 is a device to calculate
e the power consumptio n of the outdoor unit an
nd
tra
ansmit the in
nformation when
w it is req
quired.

 Steadily fu
unctioning an
nd needs no
o adjusting.
 Be with great precisio n.
 Works in wide
w g temperature, from -35 ℃ to +55℃ .
working
 Be able to be built ins ide the outd
door units in our factory.

6.1
1.1 Digitall ammeterr wiring

he ammeter has two kinds of ports. One is the p

Th power port used
u to calculate the cuurrent flow th
hrough it. Th
he
oth gnal port O, A, E used to send the signals to the
her is the sig t other device. Both oof these two
o kinds of po
ort
should be connected and fastened be
efore use.
1) Three-phasse four-wire system
s with current tran
nsformer

  1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

A
B
C
N

2) Three-phasse three-wire
e system witth current tra
ansformer

  1 2 3 4 5 6 7

A
B
C

3) Three-phasse four-wire system

s

  1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A
B
C
N

Control System 284

4
Control System

4) Three-phasse three-wire
e system witth current tra
ansformer and voltage transformer

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

A
B
C

6.1
1.2 Installation

otes: The am
No mmeter device is an optional device
e. Without th
his device, the
t central A
AC system is also able to
t
wo
ork normally..
If users
u want tto realize the network fe
ee calculatin
ng function, this device is necessarry. And each
h outdoor un
nit
should equip o
one ammete
er. Do remem
mber to fix tthe power lin
ne terminals
s and the siggnal line term
minals beforre
use.

285
5 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em

6.2 Hotel c
card key
y interfac
ce modulle: MD-NIM05

MD
D-NIM05 is m
mainly desig
gned for the hotel card-iinsert system
m. It offers a smart way to save ene
ergy and
ma
anage the aiir conditione
ers.
 A sma
art way to sa
ave energy and
a money.
 erates with tthe hotel card-insert sys
Coope stem.
 Extra power supp
ply is unnece
essary.
 Conne
ected but in sulate to the
e card-insertt system
 Coope
erate with th
he wired con
ntroller to au
utomate conttrol.
 Easy to install.
Th
he main diffe
erence betw
ween MD-NIM05/E and MD-NIM05//E-1 is that MD-NIM05//E-1 is able to record th
he
run after power off and reco
nning state a vious running state. Wh ile MD-NIM0
over the unitt to the prev 05/E runs th
he
unit to the defa
ault starting state after power
p off.

6.2
2.1 Wiring
g

Wh
hen the card
d is inserted, to turn on the air cond
ditioner, the terminal
t CO
OM and GND
D should be connected or
o
short. So the ccard-insert system
s shou
uld send the signal to the
e terminal COM
C and GN
ND. When co
onnecting th
he
CO
OM port and GND, it willl send a turn
n ON signal to the indoo
or unit; when D are broken,
n the COM pport and GND
it will urn OFF signal to the indoor unit.
w send a tu
D-NIM05 can be conneccted to the network
MD n mod
dule port of the
t indoor un
nit the hotel card system
m can provid
de
the
e DC [Link]
e wiring diag
gram should
d be as follow
ws.

Wiiring diagra
am:
 MD-NIM0
05 can be co
ooperated with the wired
d controller or
o remote co
ontroller to aautomate control.
 Can use rremote controller and wired controlller to control A/C.
 Includes a build-in auto-restart
a function
f and
d NIM05 co ot affect autto-restart fu
ontrol will no unction of th
he
indoor unit.
 Only need
d to connectt to the netw
work module port of the indoor unit and
a wiring iss simple.
 When con
nnecting the
e COM port and nal to the inddoor unit; when the COM
a GND, it will send a turn ON sign
port and G
GND are bro
oken, it will send
s OFF signal to the indoo
a turn O or unit.

Control System 286

6
Control System

No
otes:
1) An AC conta
actor or a de
elay is necessary to tran
nsform the signal.
s
2) Wiring assyy. 2 connectts the CN2 of
o hotel card
d-insert assy
y. to network
k module poort of indoorr main contrrol
board.
3) CN1 port reeserved.

otes: COM1 and GND te

No erminals sho
ould be sho rt to work an
nd not be co T electricity
onnected to tthe power. The
voltage over 5
5V will proba
ably damage
e the device or get the device
d burnt and cause ffire.

287
7 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em
6.2
2.2 Installation

※ Dimens
sions

Wiiring metho
od and figurre:
CN
N2 port need
ds to connecct with netwo
ork module port of the in
ndoor unit.

C
CN2

RELAY
K

Hotel
control
system

Control System 288

8
Control System
5000mm
ToCN2 ofhotelcard-inserter
BROWN RED
YELLOW BROWN Tothenetworkmoduleport
BLACK
RED
① YELLOW
BLACK
ontheindoormaincontrol
board

BALCK
GREEN
② BLUE
YELLOW
RED

Wheninstallingho telcard-inserterandnetwork
modulesimultaneously,connectthiswi regroup
tothenetworkmodule.

Note:Excepttheabovesituation,thiswi regroup
isunnecessa ry!

Notes:
The COM1 and GND input port of hotel card-inserter is a switch signal, which must be connected to the hotel
control system through a RELAY component for controlling the ON or OFF state between COM1 and GND.
When the COM1 and GND input port connect with the relay, it is unnecessary to consider the wire sequence,
but the wiring length must be short as possible.
The ①②③ connecting wires are standard wires.
The ③ connecting wire is only used for the situation which you need use the hotel card-inserter and the
network module at the same time

289 Control System

 Control System
6.2.3 Operation description

1) Connect 5-place terminal at fixed rated wired controller via 5 terminals: A, B, C, D, and E.
2) Connect LCD at main control panel of indoor unit via terminals REV, C, D, and E.
3) Upon wiring according to the wiring diagram in, please power on the A/C and the indication lamp of the
hotel card-inserter will be light up. When the card has been inserted between in COM1 and GND (means the
relay is closed and the COM1 and GND are short connect), air conditioner is turned on and can be controlled
normally.
4) When no card has been inserted between in COM1 and GND (i.e. it is broken), the ON/OFF button of
remote controller or wired controller cannot start air conditioner, but two beeps of air conditioner closed down
signals be giving out.
5) When power on every time, user need to use the remote controller or wired controller to turn on air conditioner
and setting operation mode.
User must use the remote controller or wired controller to turn on air conditioner and set operation modes
when the first start-up main unit. After then, operation modes of this performance would be memorized,
although took off card and insert it on again, as long as power does not be cut off from main unit.
I.e. if the A/C does not power down, when the card is pulled out, it will turn off the A/C; when insert the card
again, the system will perform as per the last setting.
6) System can receive signal delivering from remote controller or wired controller, and transits the signal to
indoor unit; it can also memorizes the latest ON/OFF information sending by remote controller or wired
controller (Timing, Eco and swing information can be transited but memorized.)
7) Upon powered to card-inserter, transited signal defaults as unit shutdown. Once take off the card, system
will send signal of unit shut down twice; till to the next time card is inserted, system will not start unit until 3
seconds later, because of memory information delivery.

Control System 290

Control System

6.3 Infrare
ed senso
or controller: MD--NIM09

Infrare
ed control bo
ox Infraredd sensor module

MD
D-NIM09/E iis an Infrare
ed sensor, which
w is able
e to detect whether
w there is people nearby and auto chang
ge
the
e air conditio
oner back to
o running mo
ode. This hu manistic dev
vice helps making
m a com
mfortable en
nvironment fo
or
the
e users and the turning down the co
onditioner au
utomatically
y.

 Easy to iinstall on the

e wall or ceiling.
 With a w
wide detectivve range up to
t 100 digre ss.
 e distance: horizontal
Detective h is at least 4M and vertical is about 3M
M, great senssibility.
 Optional auto-restartt function.
 Automatically adjustt the room environment.
 Automatically extend
d the shuttin
ng down time
e, avoiding frequent
f ON
N/OFF.
 Graceful appearance
e accommod
dates itself tto different buildings.
b
 Be powe
ered from the
e indoor unitt display pan ower supply is unnecesssary.
nel. Extra po

6.3
3.1 Wiring
g

Th
he Infrared ssensor conttroller MD-N
NIM09/E con
ntains a sen
nsor and a control boxx. The contrrol box help
ps
connecting the
e device to the
t wired controller and the indoor unit.
u
MD
D-NIM09 can be conneccted to the network
n dule port of the indoor unit
mod u and get the power supply
s DC 5V
5
fro
om it.
Wh
hen connectting the COM
M port and GND,
G it will ssend a turn ON signal to
o the indoor unit; when the
t COM po
ort
and GND are broken, it will send a turrn OFF sign
nal to the ind
door unit.

291
1 Control
C System
m
 Control Syste
em

 MD-NIM0
09 can be wo
ork togetherr with the rem
mote controller or wired controller.
 CN1 is ussed for connecting the in
nfrared senssor.
 CN2 is ussed for connecting the network mod
dule port of the
t indoor un
nit.
 CN3 port reserved.
 The switcch S1 standss for:

Turn off
o the indoo 5 hour after users leavee (default).
or units in 0.5

Turn off
o the indoo
or units in 1 hour
h after us
sers leave.

With optional
o auto
o-restart function.

Withou
ut optional a
auto-restart function.
f

Inffra-red sensor installatio

on place

Ceiling Wall

~100°
1.2m~1.5m

~100°

Floor Floor
No
otes:
Th
he induction distance off X-direction
n is farther t han the Y-d
direction, ensure that th e X-directio
on of infra-re
ed
sensor paralle
el to the corridor direction to obtain tthe best indu
uction effectt.

Control System 292

2
Control System
6.3.2 How to use

The general function of MD-NIM09/E is turning down the indoor unit automatically. So users should run the
indoor unit firstly and adjust the temperature, fan speed, etc, via the remote controller or wired controller.
Once set, users do not need to turn down the indoor unit. The MD-NIM09 will turn it down automatically after
the users leave. Once the users come to the Infrared sensor’s detective area, the MD-NIM09 turns the indoor
unit on and runs it at the state which is set previously.
Main parameters：
Input voltage DC +5V
Ambient temperature -5℃~43℃
Ambient humidity RH40%~RH90%

6.3.3 Operation Instruction

1) Infrared sensors can induct human activities in certain area and turn off the indoor unit automatically if
there is nobody activity.
The induction range and angle is shown as below:

3M

5M
2) When the indoor unit is turned on and the infrared sensor does not induct human activities or did not
receive commands from the wired or remote controller lasting for 30 minutes (or 60 minutes, according to the
switch S1-1 setting on the Infrared inductive control box), then the inductive controller will turn off the indoor

293 Control System

 Control Syste
em
unit automaticcally. Until ne
ext time indu
uct human a
activities, the
e infrared in
nductive conntroller turn on the indoo
or
unit again.
3) The inductivve controllerr will continu
ue inducting
g human acttivities and determine
d w
whether turn off or turn on
o
e indoor unitt when the in
the ndoor unit is d or remote controller, d espite of tim
s turned on by the wired mer setting, or
o
control instrucctions to the indoor unit from
f other ccontrol terminal such as CCM.
4) It is recomm
mended thatt do not use Central Co ntrol Module
e or other co
ontrol terminnals when th
he indoor un
nit
is connecting
c tthe infrared inductive co
ontroller. Oth
herwise the operation conflict or co ntrol failure may happen
n.
5) Do not placce the infra
ared sensor close to th
he radio freq
quency inte m cause a
erference soource, or it may
mistaken triggering on the
e infrared se
ensor.

6.3
3.4 Installation

※ Dimensio
ons
Infrared
d sensor Control box

※ Connectiing and Ass

sembly

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step

S 5

Control System 294

4
Control System

Connect to the network

module port of main board

※ Wires methods

ToCN2of Infrared Inductive Controller

BROWN RED
YELLOW
①
BROWN
BLACK YEL LOW
RED BLACK

Wheninstallinginfra redinducti vecontrollerand

②

networkmodulesimultaneously,connectthiswi re
group tothenetworkmodule.

Note:Excepttheabo vesituation,thiswi regroup

isunnecessa ry!

Tothenet workmodulepo rt
oftheindoormaincont rol
RED
YELLOW
BLUE
GREEN
BALCK

board

Notes:
The Infrared inductive controller is a low voltage device, so it's forbidden to contact with above 220V or 380V
high-voltage cable directly, and it can't be placed at the same wiring pipe with the above described loop and
the interval space of the wiring pipes should be at least more than 300~500mm.

295 Control System

 Control Syste
em

6.4 Electriicity disttribution module MD-NIM10

MD
D-NIM10 is d
designed sp
pecifically forr Mini VRF. IIt provides th
he OAE portts and Mini V
VRF can be connected to
t
the
e IMM netwo
ork control system
s to realize networrk electricity
y distribution.
Wiring
W diagram
 OAE portss: connected
d to OAE po
ort of ammetter.
 PQE portss: connected
d to PQE po
ort of outdoo
or unit.
 Each portt of M-interfa
ace gateway e connected
y only can be d with one MD-NIM10
M thhrough K1 K2
K E ports.
 Can set th
he network address
a thro
ough S1 dia l on the main board of MD-NIM10.
M

Control System 296

6
 Control System
m

6.5 Fault a
alarm controller: KJR-32B
B

KJ
JR-32B is sp
pecially desig
gned for eng
gineering ap
pplications. It
I does not display
d the ooutdoor unit’s working
parameters, but it can con
nnect to the alarm
a device
e when outd
door unit is working
w abnoormally, the RUN light will
w
flash.

 C
Connect the
e outdoor unit through K
K1 K2 E term
minals.
 O
Output and input the same
s poweer through the
t fault ala
arm
o
output side.
 W
With LED indication function.

6.5
5.1 Wiring
g methods
s

Th
here are two wiring meth
hods can be
e connected for fault ala er. Each faullt alarm con
arm controlle ntroller can be
b
connected up to 32 outdoor units and 8 refrigeran
nt systems.

Outdoor unit Outdoor unitt Outdoorr unit Outdooor unit Outdooor unit O
Outdoor unit

Fault alarm

Outdoorr unit Outdooor unit Outdooor unit Outdoor unit Outddoor unit Outtdoor unit

Fault ala
arm

297
7 Contrrol System
Control System
6.5.2 System wiring diagram

1) One computer can be connected only one fault alarm controller.

2) Must connect according to the follow system wiring method, if not it will not work normally.
3) You need to connect R120 to the front or rear of the monitoring system, and at the end of communication
wire masking should be reliable ground.
RS232 terminal:
Plug in the COM port of computer

RS485 invert RS232 module

F1 F1 F2 F2 E Better way of stripping the communication wire

Connect other
central controller
F1 F1 F2 F2 E

Connect matched R120Ω in the

front-end communication

F2 F1 E K2 K1
Computer communication Air-conditioner
connecting communication connecting

Shielding side
Shielding side grounding reliably
Main control K2 K1 E Main control K2 K1 E grounding reliably Main control K2 K1 E Main control K2 K1 E
power panel panel panel panel
Communication between
KWH meter and outdoor

NO.1 Outdoor unit(main unit) NO.1 Outdoor unit(slave unit 1) NO.1 Outdoor unit(slave unit 2) NO.1 Outdoor unit(slave unit 3)

Notice：when the KWH meter is connected

Power input KWH meter to outdoor unit ，you can read energy
consumption in the outdoor monitor!

Connect matched R120Ω in the

front-end communication

Shielding side Shielding side

grounding reliably grounding reliably
Main control K2 K1 E Main control K2 K1 E Main control K2 K1 E Main control K2 K1 E
panel panel panel panel

NO.2 Outdoor unit(slave unit 3) NO.2 Outdoor unit(slave unit 2) NO.2 Outdoor unit(slave unit 1) NO.2 Outdoor unit(main unit )

Outdoor unit system figure

Fault alarm
wiring base figure

Main control K2 K1 E
panel
Outdoor unit F2 F1 E K2 K1
Computer communication Air-conditioner
connecting communication connecting

Outdoor unit system figure Fault alarm figure Fault alarm wiring base figure
Notes:
[Link] install the fault alarm controller, after setting the fault protection through the outdoor main panel 2
minutes, observe the indication lamp whether be flashed or not, then judge whether the fault alarm
communication with the outdoor unit.
2. When using the fault alarm controller, its output connected appliance requirements: all the AC220V
appliances lower than 3.15 A current can be the fault alarm controller appliance, such as miniwatt lamp.

Control System 298

 Control System
6.5.3 Installation

1. The RS485 shift RS232 module, connecting wire in the wiring figure can be used only when network
monitoring need to connect the computer;
2. One computer cannot connect with one fault alarm and outdoor central controller at the same time, you
must choose one for connection;
3. When connected to the computer with 3rd network control system, the default address of the alarm module
is 16 and it cannot be changed. Outdoor unit addresses need to be set manually and the outdoor unit
addresses cannot be repetitive, or the system cannot operate normally;
4. Power part and fault output part as follows display:

Fault alarm output module

No Lo

Power input AC220V

Self-furnish power
strips2*0.75mm² Fault alarm output AC220V
Self-furnish wire2*0.75mm²
Electrical appliance current
used for fault alarm＜3.15A

Fault alarm base

Fault alarm main control panel
136mm

Fault alarm cover 60mm

Fault alarmoperation,
fault display lamp

Fix the base at the holes,

and use the cross screwdriver
to screw the cross recessed pan
head tapping screws into the
plastic expanded tube,and fix the base.

Use electric drill to drill four holes with φ6mm

and depth are 30mm, and then put the plastic
expanded tube into the holes.

299 Control System

Control System

6.6 Indoorr unit gro

oup conttroller: K
KJR-150A
A

KJ
JR-150A is sspecially dessigned for V4
4 plus indoo
or units and its
i appearan
nce is the saame as KJR--32B. A grou
up
controller can connect up
p to 16 V4 plus
p indoor u
units through X1 Y1 E, but it cannoot directly connect to th
he
central controlller. If you need
n to use a centralize
ed controllerr or a PC, yo
ou can connnect to the XYE
X from th
he
outdoor unit. A group con
ntroller can control a grroup of indo
oor units sim
multaneouslyy, and query
y the runnin
ng
sta
ate of each u
unit in the grroup via the display pan
nel.

6.6
6.1 Wiring
g methods
s

Th
he following ttwo methods are accepted for the in
ndoor unit group controller KJR-1500A. One indo
oor unit grou
up
controller is on
nly allowed to
t connect up
u to 16 indo
oor units.
Wh
hen conneccted indoorr unit to th
he group ccontroller as
s a group, indoor unnits could be
b controlle
ed
sim
multaneouslyy and enterr to unique running
r stat e with the group
g contro
oller. And thhen indoor units
u could be
b
controlled sep
parately by th
heir standard
d controller, such as the
e remote con
ntroller, wireed controllerr and so on.

Control System 300

0
 Control System
m
6.6
6.2 System
m wiring diagram
d

No
otes:
Fo
or the same indoor unit which has the
t multiple board mac
chine (such as10 HP orr above ductt indoor unitt),
cannot directlyy connect with the indoo ntroller, if you need, plea
or group con ase contact the technica
al engineer to
t
customize.

6.6
6.3 Installation

1. When seleccting the old

d display bo
oard, please
e dial the first bit of SW
W1 to ON. W
When selec
cting the ne
ew
dis
splay board, please dial the first bit of SW1 to O
OFF.
2. In the group
p, anti-cold air
a switches of all the ind
door units ha
ave to be the
e same withh the group controller's,
c o
or
some displayss about this will
w be wrong.
3. One Group controller iss only allowe he 16 indoor units.
ed to connecct most of th
4. When the ccentralized controller
c is needed,
n you
u have to co
onnect to the
e centralizedd controller from
f the X, Y,
Y
and E port of tthe outdoor unit.
5. Only with th
he correspon
nding units Group
G contro
oller could work.
w
6. Power part and commu
unication porrts as follow
ws display:

301
1 Contrrol System
Control System

otes: Comm
No munication signal in CN5
5 (X1 Y1) and
d CN6 (E) is
s a low volta
age signal. D
Do not apply high voltage
e,
or breakdown will occur and even cau
use fire.

Group
p controller ba
ase

Group
p controller ma
ain control panel

Group co
ontroller cove
er

Fix the base at the hole

es,
and use thhe cross screw
wdriver
to screw th
he cross rece
essed pan
head tappping screws into the
plastic exp
panded tube,aand fix the ba
ase.

Use electric
c drill to drill fo
our holes with
h φ6mm
and depth are
a 30mm, an nd then put the plastic
expanded tube into the holes.h

Control System 302

2
 Control System
m

6.7 AHU control bo

ox 14&28
8&56kW:: AHUKZ
Z-01, AHU
UKZ-02, A
AHUKZ-0
03

he new AHU control boxxes of 14 kW

Th W, 28 kW and
d 56 kW can
n be used to
o connect VR
RF outdoor units with DX
D
AH
HU or other brand indoo
or units, but cannot con nect to the heat recove
ery system. T
The EXV is controlled by
b
superheat deg
gree; one ga d one liquid pipe, easy to install an
as pipe and nd maintain.. The diame
eters of thesse
thrree models a
are differentt, you can ch
hoose you n
need models
s.

6.7
7.1 Electriic control box wiring figure

AH
HUKZ-01, AHUKZ-02 an
nd AHUKZ-0
03 are appliied one maiin control bo
oard, the tem
mperature sensor
s T1, T2
T
and T2B mustt be connectted to the ma
ain control b
board before
e first powerred on.
 T1 is indo
oor temperatture sensor, install at the
e air inlet of the indoor unit.
u
 T2 is indoor evapora
ator interme
ediate temp nsor, install at the interrmediate off temperaturre
perature sen
evaporato
ors.
 T2B is ind
door evapora all at the outlet of the eva
ator outlet sensor, insta aporator.
 door evaporator inlet sensor, and it has been in
T2C is ind nstalled befo
ore the produuct leaves th
he factory.
T2C

T1

T2B
T
T2
T2

T1

T
T2B

Connecctor

303
3 Contrrol System
Control System
6.7.2 Error and protection codes

When the AHU control box is working abnormally, it can display the malfunction and protection codes through
the new or old display panel. At the same time, you can check the temperature parameters by the LED
display panel.

New display panel Old display panel

Codes Descriptions
Without address when first Definition LED state
FE
time power on
Without address when first Time LED and run LED
M-home not matched time power on flash together
H0 between MS module and
control box M-home not matched
between MS module and 4 LED flash together
E0 Mode conflict control box

Communication malfunction Mode conflict Defrost LED flashes

E1 between indoor unit and
outdoor unit Communication
malfunction between indoor Timer LED flashes
E2 T1 sensor malfunction unit and outdoor unit

E3 T2 sensor malfunction Indoor sensors error Run LED flashes

T2B/T2C sensor EEPROM malfunction Defrost LED flash slowly

E4
malfunction
Alarm LED flashes
Outdoor unit malfunction
E7 EEPROM malfunction slowly
Water level switch error Alarm LED flash
Ed Outdoor unit malfunction

Water level switch

EE
malfunction

6.7.3 Query instructions

Sequence Display contents Remarks

0 Normal display
1 Address of AHU control box
Actual address is 1~59, but check
2 Capacity of AHU control box
value displays 1~58.
3 Net address of AHU control box 0~63
4 Actual setting Temp.
5 T1 actual Temp. Minimum displays - 9 ℃
6 T1 actual Temp. Minimum displays - 9 ℃
7 T2 actual pipe Temp. Minimum displays - 9 ℃
8 T2B actual pipe Temp. Minimum displays - 9 ℃
9 T2C actual pipe Temp. Minimum displays - 9 ℃
10 Error code
11 ―― End of check

Control System 304

 Control System
6.7.4 Basic specification

Model AHUKZ-01 AHUKZ-02 AHUKZ-03

Power supply 220-240V~ 50Hz; 208-230V~ 60Hz
Indoor unit capacity kW 9~20 20.1~33 40~56
IP-class IPX0 IPX0 IPX0
Piping size (in/out) mm Φ8/Φ8 Φ12.7/Φ12.7 Φ16/Φ16
Dimension mm 375×350×150
Packing dimension mm 490×240×420

6.7.5 Dial code definition

1) SW1 definition
S W1
ON ● 00 means DC fan static pressure
SW1 ● 1 means the factory test mode
selection 0 set (reserved)
ON 1234
● 0 automatic search address mode
S W1
(factory default) ON ● 01 means DC fan static pressure
1234
selection 1 set (reserved)
SW1 1234
ON ● 1 means select DC fan(reserved)
S W1
● 0 means select AC fan ON ● 10 means DC fan static pressure
1234 selection 2 set (reserved)
1234
SW1
ON ● 00 means DC fan static pressure S W1
selection 0 set (reserved) ON ● 11 means DC fan static pressure
selection 3 set (reserved)
1234 1234

2) SW2 definition
y p

SW2 ● 00 means temperature of S W2

ON shut down against cool air ON ● 00 means the time of TERMAL
is 15°C stop the fan is 4 minutes
1234 1234
SW2 ● 01 means temperature of S W2
ON ● 01 means the time of TERMAL
shut down against cool air ON
stop the fan is 8 minutes
is 20°C
1234 1234
SW2 ● 10 means temperature of S W2
ON ● 10 means the time of TERMAL
shut down against cool air ON stop the fan is 12 minutes
is 24°C
1234 1234
SW2 ● 11 means temperature of S W2
ON shut down against cool air ON ● 11 means the time of TERMAL
is 26°C stop the fan is 16 minutes
1234 1234

3) SW5 definition
S W5 S W5
ON ● 00 means the temperature ● 10 means the temperature
ON
compensation under heating compensation under heating
1 2 mode is 6°C 1 2 mode is 4°C
S W5 S W5
● 01 means the temperature ● 11 means the temperature
ON ON
compensation under heating compensation under heating
mode is 2°C mode is 8°C
1 2 1 2

305 Control System

Control System
4) SW6 definition 5) SW7 definition
S W6 S W7
ON ● 1 means the old display panel
● 0 means the new display panel ON Standard configuration
1 2 3
S W6
ON ●1 means automatic mode automatic fan
1 2
●0 means non-automatic mode automatic fan
1 2 3 S W7
S W6 ON The last set of
ON Reserved the network
1 2 3 1 2

6) J1, J2 definition 7) 0/1 definition

J1 J1 Jumperless for has
power down memory
function

J1
J1 Jumper for has no ON
Means 0
power down memory function

J2
Reserved ON Means 1

6.7.6 Installation methods

1) Installation methods for vertically, and horizontal installation is invalid.

Install vertically

Wrong installation way

Vertically (√) Horizontally (×)

2) Wiring diagram between indoor and outdoor units.

Water pump
Fan wire
indoor power
Water level switch
T1/T2/T2B

Signal wire

T2
T1 T1(Air-return inlet)
T2(Intermediate se
T2B
-ction of evaporator)
Liquid pipe Liquid pipe T2B(Air pipe outlet)

Gas pipe

Notes: 1) If it is needed, user can select the backup function in the dotted line frame.
2) T2C has been installed before the product leaves the factory
Control System 306